Canon EOS 7D Mark II User manual

Canon EOS 7D Mark II User manual
EOS 7D Mark II (G)
 This manual is for the EOS 7D Mark II installed
with firmware version 1.1.0 or later.
 Instruction manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded
from the Canon website (p.4).
www.canon.com/icpd
ENGLISH
INSTRUCTION
MANUAL
Introduction
The EOS 7D Mark II (G) is a digital single-lens reflex camera featuring a
fine-detail CMOS sensor with approx. 20.2 effective megapixels, Dual
DIGIC 6, approx. 100% viewfinder coverage, high-precision and highspeed 65-point AF (Cross-type AF point: Max. 65 points), approx. 10.0
fps continuous shooting, Live View shooting, Full High-Definition (Full
HD) movie shooting, Dual Pixel CMOS AF, and GPS function.
Before Starting to Shoot, Be Sure to Read the Following
To avoid botched pictures and accidents, first read the “Safety
Precautions” (p.525-527) and “Handling Precautions” (p.20-21). Also,
read this manual carefully to ensure that you use the camera correctly.
Refer to This Manual While Using the Camera to Further
Familiarize Yourself with the Camera
While reading this manual, take a few test shots and see how they
come out. You can then better understand the camera. Be sure to store
this manual safely, too, so that you can refer to it again when necessary.
Testing the Camera Before Use and Liability
After shooting, play images back and check whether they have been
properly recorded. If the camera or memory card is faulty and the
images cannot be recorded or downloaded to a computer, Canon
cannot be held liable for any loss or inconvenience caused.
Copyrights
Copyright laws in your country may prohibit the use of your recorded
images of people and certain subjects for anything but private
enjoyment. Also be aware that certain public performances, exhibitions,
etc., may prohibit photography even for private enjoyment.
2
Item Check List
Before starting, check that all the following items are included with your
camera. If anything is missing, contact your dealer.
Camera
(with body cap)
Eyecup Eg
(p.247)
Wide Strap
(p.33)
Battery Charger
Battery Pack
LP-E6N
LC-E6/LC-E6E*
(p.38)
(p.32)
(with protective cover)
Cable protector
(p.34)
Interface Cable
IFC-150U II
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1
(p.36)
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution Disk
(Software)
* Battery Charger LC-E6 or LC-E6E is provided. (The LC-E6E comes with a
power cord.)
 The Instruction Manuals provided are listed on the next page.
 If you purchased a Lens Kit, check that the lenses are included.
 Be careful not to lose any of the above items.
When you need Lens Instruction Manuals, download them from the Canon
website (p.4). The Lens Instruction Manuals (PDF) are for lenses sold
individually. Note that when purchasing the Lens Kit, some of the
accessories included with the lens may not match those listed in the Lens
Instruction Manual.
3
Instruction Manuals
Basic Instruction
Manual*
Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1
Preliminary Notes and
Legal Information*
* Detailed Instruction Manuals (PDF files) can be downloaded from the Canon
website (see below).
Downloading and Viewing the Instruction Manuals (PDF Files)
1
Download the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Connect to the Internet and access the following Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
 Select your country or region of residence and download the
Instruction Manuals.
Instruction Manuals Available for Download
• Camera Instruction Manual
• Camera Basic Instruction Manual
• Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual
• Lens Instruction Manuals
• Software Instruction Manuals
2 View the Instruction Manuals (PDF files).
 Double-click a downloaded Instruction Manual (PDF file) to open
it.
 To view the Instruction Manuals (PDF files), Adobe Acrobat
Reader DC or other Adobe PDF viewer (most recent version
recommended) is required.
 Adobe Acrobat Reader DC can be downloaded free from the
Internet.
 To learn how to use a PDF viewer, refer to its Help section.
4
Compatible Cards
The camera can use the following cards regardless of capacity: If the
card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera (p.67).
 CF (CompactFlash) cards
* Type I, UDMA mode 7-compatible.
 SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards supported.
Cards that Can Record Movies
When shooting movies, use a large-capacity card with a fast reading/
writing speed as shown in the table.
Movie Recording Size (p.330)
ALL-I (For editing)
L:87
Other than above
IPB (Light)
IPB (Standard)
Movie Recording Size (p.330)
ALL-I (For editing)
L:87
Other than above
IPB (Light)
IPB (Standard)
CF Card: Recording Formats
MOV
MP4
30 MB/sec. or faster
30 MB/sec. or faster
10 MB/sec. or faster
10 MB/sec. or faster
SD Card: Recording Formats
MOV
MP4
20 MB/sec. or faster
20 MB/sec. or faster
6 MB/sec. or faster
4 MB/sec. or faster
 If you use a slow-writing card when shooting movies, the movie may
not be recorded properly. Also, if you play back a movie on a card
with a slow reading speed, the movie may not play back properly.
 If you want to shoot still photos while shooting a movie, you will need
an even faster card.
 To check the card’s reading/writing speed, refer to the card
manufacturer’s website.
In this manual, “CF card” refers to CompactFlash cards and “SD
card” refers to SD/SDHC/SDXC cards. “Card” refers to all memory
cards used to record images or movies.
* The camera does not come with a card for recording images/
movies. Please purchase it separately.
5
Quick Start Guide
Insert the battery (p.40).
1
To charge the battery, see page 38.
Insert the card (p.41).
2
The camera-front side slot is
for a CF card, and the
camera-back side slot is for
an SD card.
* Shooting is possible with either a CF card or an SD card in the camera.
3
4
5
6
White index
Red index
Attach the lens (p.50).
Align the lens’s white or red mount
index with the camera’s index of the
same color.
Set the lens’s focus mode
switch to <f> (p.50).
Set the power switch to <1>
(p.45).
Quick Start Guide
6
While holding down the center
of the Mode Dial, set it to <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) (p.29).
All the necessary camera settings
will be set automatically.
7
Focus on the subject (p.55).
8
Take the picture (p.55).
9
Review the picture.
Look through the viewfinder and
aim the viewfinder center over the
subject.
Press the shutter button halfway,
and the camera will focus on the
subject.
If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised.
Press the shutter button completely
to take the picture.
The image just captured will be
displayed for 2 sec. on the LCD
monitor.
To display the image again, press
the <x> button (p.354).
 To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see “Live View
Shooting” (p.285).
 To view the images captured so far, see “Image Playback” (p.354).
 To delete an image, see “Erasing Images” (p.392).
7
Conventions Used in this Manual
Icons in this Manual
<6>
<5>
<p>
<9>
<0>
0/9/7/8
:
:
:
:
:
:
Indicates the Main Dial.
Indicates the Quick Control Dial.
Indicates the AF area selection lever.
Indicates the Multi-controller.
Indicates the Setting button.
Indicates that the corresponding function
remains active for 4 sec., 6 sec., 10 sec., or 16
sec. respectively after you let go of the button.
* In this manual, the icons and markings indicating the camera’s buttons, dials,
and settings correspond to the icons and markings on the camera and on the
LCD monitor.
3
: Indicates a function that can be changed by pressing the
<M> button to change its settings.
M
: This icon at the upper right of the page titles indicates that
the function is available only in the <d>, <s>, <f>,
<a>, or <F> mode.
(p.**)
: Reference page numbers for more information.
: Warning to prevent shooting problems.
: Supplemental information.
: Tips or advice for better shooting.
: Troubleshooting advice.
Basic Assumptions
All operations explained in this manual assume that the power switch
is set to <1> and the <R> switch is set to the left (Multi
function lock released) (p.45, 59).
It is assumed that all the menu settings, Custom Functions, etc. are
set to their defaults.
The illustrations in this manual show the camera attached with the
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens as an example.
8
Chapters
For first-time DSLR users, Chapters 1 and 2 explain the camera’s
basic operations and shooting procedures.
Introduction
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
2
Getting Started
37
Basic Shooting
79
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
85
Image Settings
145
GPS Settings
197
Advanced Operations
215
Flash Photography
253
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
285
Shooting Movies
313
Image Playback
353
Post-Processing Images
397
Sensor Cleaning
405
Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer
411
Customizing the Camera
431
Reference
467
Downloading Images to a Computer / Software
531
9
Contents
Introduction
2
Item Check List................................................................................. 3
Instruction Manuals .......................................................................... 4
Compatible Cards............................................................................. 5
Quick Start Guide ............................................................................. 6
Conventions Used in this Manual..................................................... 8
Chapters........................................................................................... 9
Index to Features ........................................................................... 17
Handling Precautions ..................................................................... 20
Nomenclature ................................................................................. 22
1
Getting Started
37
Charging the Battery ...................................................................... 38
Installing and Removing the Battery............................................... 40
Installing and Removing the Card .................................................. 41
Turning on the Power ..................................................................... 45
Setting the Date, Time, and Zone .................................................. 47
Selecting the Interface Language................................................... 49
Attaching and Detaching a Lens .................................................... 50
Lens Image Stabilizer..................................................................... 53
Basic Operation.............................................................................. 54
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions ....................................... 61
3 Menu Operations .................................................................. 64
Before You Start............................................................................. 67
Formatting the Card..................................................................... 67
Disabling the Beeper ................................................................... 69
Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off ................................. 69
Setting the Image Review Time ................................................... 70
Reverting the Camera to the Default Settings ............................. 70
10
Contents
l Displaying the Grid. .................................................................. 74
Q Displaying the Electronic Level ...............................................75
Setting the Viewfinder Information Display .....................................77
Help .......................................................................................... 78
2
Basic Shooting
79
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto) ...................80
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto) ......................... 83
3
Setting the AF and Drive Modes
85
f: Selecting the AF Operation ..................................................... 86
S Selecting the AF Area and AF Point ......................................... 90
AF Area Selection Modes ............................................................... 95
AF Sensor ....................................................................................... 99
Lenses and Usable AF Points.......................................................100
Selecting AI Servo AF Characteristics ..........................................108
Customizing AF Functions ............................................................ 117
Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus ........................................ 133
When Autofocus Fails ................................................................... 139
MF: Manual Focus .....................................................................140
o Selecting the Drive Mode ...................................................... 141
j Using the Self-timer ................................................................. 143
4
Image Settings
145
Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback ...........................146
Setting the Image-Recording Quality ............................................ 149
i: Setting the ISO Speed .......................................................... 154
A Selecting a Picture Style.......................................................160
A Customizing a Picture Style .................................................. 163
A Registering a Picture Style ................................................... 166
11
Contents
B: Setting the White Balance ................................................... 168
O Custom White Balance........................................................ 169
P Setting the Color Temperature ............................................ 171
u White Balance Correction ....................................................... 172
Auto Correction of Brightness and Contrast................................. 175
Setting Noise Reduction ............................................................... 176
Highlight Tone Priority .................................................................. 180
Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations ......... 181
Reducing Flicker........................................................................... 185
Setting the Color Space ............................................................... 187
Creating and Selecting a Folder................................................... 188
Changing the File Name............................................................... 190
File Numbering Methods .............................................................. 193
Setting Copyright Information....................................................... 195
5
GPS Settings
197
GPS Features............................................................................... 198
GPS Precautions.......................................................................... 200
Acquiring GPS Signals ................................................................. 201
Setting the Positioning Interval..................................................... 205
Using the Digital Compass ........................................................... 206
Setting Time from GPS on the Camera........................................ 209
Logging the Route Traveled ......................................................... 210
6
Advanced Operations
215
d: Program AE ............................................................................ 216
s: Shutter-Priority AE................................................................ 218
f: Aperture-Priority AE ............................................................. 220
Depth-of-Field Preview .............................................................. 221
a: Manual Exposure ................................................................... 222
12
Contents
q Selecting the Metering Mode .................................................. 224
O Setting Exposure Compensation .............................................226
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB) ........................................... 227
A AE Lock ...................................................................................229
F: Bulb Exposures ....................................................................... 230
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) Shooting...............................233
P Multiple Exposures..................................................................238
2 Mirror Lockup .........................................................................246
Using the Eyepiece Cover ............................................................ 247
F Using a Remote Switch............................................................. 248
R Remote Control Shooting...........................................................248
H Interval Timer Shooting ...................................................... 250
7
Flash Photography
253
D Using the Built-in Flash ............................................................. 254
D Using an External Speedlite...................................................... 259
Setting the Flash ........................................................................... 262
Using Wireless Flash .................................................................... 272
8
Shooting with the LCD Monitor (Live View Shooting)
285
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor ............................................... 286
Shooting Function Settings ...........................................................292
Menu Function Settings ................................................................ 294
Using AF to Focus (AF Method) ................................................... 299
MF: Focusing Manually................................................................. 308
9
Shooting Movies
313
k Shooting Movies .....................................................................314
Autoexposure Shooting ..............................................................314
Shutter-priority AE ......................................................................315
13
Contents
Aperture-priority AE ................................................................... 316
Manual Exposure Shooting........................................................ 320
Shooting Still Photos.................................................................. 327
Shooting Function Settings .......................................................... 329
Setting the Movie Recording Size ................................................ 330
Setting the Sound Recording ....................................................... 336
Silent Control................................................................................ 338
Setting the Time Code.................................................................. 339
Menu Function Settings................................................................ 342
10
Image Playback
353
x Image Playback ..................................................................... 354
B: Shooting Information Display ............................................ 356
x Searching for Images Quickly ................................................ 361
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)..... 361
I Jump through Images (Jump Display).................................. 362
u Magnifying Images.................................................................. 364
X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)............................... 366
b Rotating the Image .................................................................. 367
K Protecting Images................................................................... 368
Setting Ratings ............................................................................. 371
Q Quick Control for Playback ..................................................... 374
k Enjoying Movies ..................................................................... 376
k Playing Movies ....................................................................... 378
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes ................................. 380
Slide Show (Auto Playback) ......................................................... 382
Viewing Images on a TV Set ........................................................ 385
a Copying Images ...................................................................... 388
L Erasing Images........................................................................ 392
14
Contents
Changing Image Playback Settings .............................................. 394
Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness ....................................... 394
Auto Rotation of Vertical Images ................................................395
11
Post-Processing Images
397
R Processing RAW Images with the Camera ...........................398
S Resizing JPEG Images ...........................................................403
12
Sensor Cleaning
405
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning................................................... 406
Appending Dust Delete Data ........................................................407
Manual Sensor Cleaning...............................................................409
13
Printing Images and Transferring Images to a Computer
411
Preparing to Print .......................................................................... 412
w Printing ...................................................................................414
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)..........................................421
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images ..................................424
d Transferring Images to a Computer........................................ 425
p Specifying Images for a Photobook .........................................429
14
Customizing the Camera
431
Custom Functions .........................................................................432
Setting Custom Functions............................................................. 434
C.Fn1: Exposure ........................................................................ 434
C.Fn2: Exposure/Drive ...............................................................438
C.Fn3: Display/Operation ...........................................................440
C.Fn4: Others.............................................................................443
83: Custom Controls ..................................................................445
Registering My Menu .................................................................... 459
w: Registering Custom Shooting Modes..................................... 464
15
Contents
15
Reference
467
B Button Functions ................................................................ 468
Checking the Battery Information ................................................. 470
Using a Household Power Outlet ................................................. 474
H Using Eye-Fi Cards................................................................. 475
System Map ................................................................................. 478
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode ............. 480
Menu Settings .............................................................................. 484
Troubleshooting Guide ................................................................. 495
Error Codes .................................................................................. 510
Specifications ............................................................................... 511
Safety Precautions ....................................................................... 525
16
Downloading Images to a Computer / Software
531
Downloading Images to a Computer ............................................ 532
About the Software....................................................................... 534
Installing the Software .................................................................. 536
Index............................................................................................. 538
16
Index to Features
Power
LCD Monitor
Charging the battery
 p.38
Brightness adjustment
 p.394
Battery check
 p.46
Electronic level
 p.75
Help
 p.78
Battery information
check
 p.470
Household power outlet  p.474
Auto power off
 p.69
Card
AF
AF operation
 p.86
AF area selection mode  p.90
AF point selection
 p.93
Formatting
 p.67
AF point registration
 p.450
Recording function
 p.146
Lens group
 p.100
Select card
 p.148
AF points lighting up
in red
 p.131
AI Servo AF
characteristics
 p.108
AF Custom Functions
 p.117
AF Microadjustment
 p.133
Focusing manually
 p.140
Release shutter without
card
 p.42
Lens
Attaching
 p.50
Zoom
 p.51
Hood
 p.52
Image Stabilizer
 p.53
Metering
Metering mode
Basic Settings
 p.224
Drive
Language
 p.49
Date/Time/Zone
 p.47
Drive mode
 p.141
Beeper
 p.69
Self-timer
 p.143
 p.195
Maximum burst
 p.153
Copyright information
Clear all camera settings  p.70
Viewfinder
Dioptric adjustment
 p.54
Eyepiece cover
 p.247
Grid display
Electronic level
 p.74
 p.76
Recording Images
Recording function
 p.146
Creating/Selecting
a folder
 p.188
File name
 p.190
File numbering
 p.193
Show/hide in viewfinder  p.77
17
Index to Features
Image Quality
Exposure
Image-recording quality  p.149
Exposure compensation  p.226
ISO speed
 p.154
Picture Style
 p.160
Exposure compensation
with M+Auto ISO
 p.223
White balance
 p.168
AEB
 p.227
Auto Lighting Optimizer  p.175
AE lock
 p.229
Noise reduction for
high ISO speeds
Safety shift
 p.436
 p.176
GPS
Noise reduction for long
exposures
 p.178
GPS
 p.197
Digital compass
 p.206
Logging
 p.210
Highlight tone priority
 p.180
Lens aberration
correction
 p.181
Anti-flicker
 p.185
Built-in flash
 p.254
 p.187
External Speedlite
 p.259
Flash exposure
compensation
 p.257
FE lock
 p.258
Flash function settings
 p.262
Wireless shooting
 p.272
Color space
Shooting
Shooting mode
 p.29
HDR
 p.233
Multiple exposures
 p.238
Mirror lockup
 p.246
Bulb timer
 p.231
Interval timer
 p.250
Depth-of-field preview
 p.221
Remote control
 p.248
Quick Control
 p.61
18
Flash
External Speedlite Custom
Functions
 p.271
Live View Shooting
Live View shooting
 p.285
AF method
 p.299
Continuous AF
 p.294
Focusing manually
 p.308
Aspect ratio
 p.295
Silent LV shooting
 p.297
Index to Features
Movie Shooting
Image Editing
Movie shooting
 p.313
RAW image processing  p.398
AF method
 p.299
Resizing JPEG
Movie Servo AF
 p.342
Movie Servo AF speed
 p.345
 p.403
Printing and Transferring
Images
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity
 p.346
PictBridge
 p.411
Print Order (DPOF)
 p.421
Movie recording quality  p.330
Image transfer
 p.425
Sound recording
 p.336
Photobook Set-up
 p.429
Time code
 p.339
HDMI output
 p.348
Still photo shooting
 p.327
Playback
Image review time
 p.70
Single-image display
 p.354
Shooting information
 p.356
Index display
 p.361
Image browsing
(Jump display)
 p.362
Magnified view
 p.364
Customization
Custom Functions (C.Fn)  p.432
Custom Controls
 p.445
My Menu
 p.459
Custom shooting mode  p.464
Sensor Cleaning and Dust
Reduction
Sensor cleaning
 p.406
Append Dust Delete Data  p.407
Interface
Cable protector
 p.34
Two-image display
 p.366
Image rotation
 p.367
Software
Protect
 p.368
Overview
 p.534
Rating
 p.371
Installation
 p.536
Movie playback
 p.378
Slide show
 p.382
Viewing images on a
TV set
 p.385
Copying
 p.388
Erase
 p.392
Quick Control
 p.374
Wireless Function
 W-E1 Instruction Manual
19
Handling Precautions
Also read “Handling Precautions” on page 529.
Camera Care
 This camera is a precision instrument. Do not drop it or subject it to physical
shock.
 The camera is not waterproof and cannot be used underwater.
 To maximize the camera's dust- and drip- resistance, keep the terminal
cover, battery compartment cover, card slot cover, and all other covers firmly
closed.
 This camera is designed to be dust- and drip- resistant, in order to help
prevent sand, dust, dirt, or water that falls on it unexpectedly from getting
inside, but it is impossible to prevent dirt, dust, water, or salt from getting
inside at all. As far as possible, do not allow dirt, dust, water, and salt to get
on the camera.
 If water gets on the camera, wipe it off with a dry and clean cloth. If dirt, dust,
or salt gets on the camera, wipe it off with a clean, well-wrung wet cloth.
 Using the camera in a location with large amounts of dirt or dust may cause
a malfunction.
 Cleaning the camera after use is recommended. Allowing dirt, dust, water, or
salt to remain on the camera may cause a malfunction.
 If you accidentally drop the camera into water or are concerned that
moisture (water), dirt, dust, or salt may have gotten inside it, promptly
consult the nearest Canon Service Center.
 Never leave the camera near anything having a strong magnetic field such
as a magnet or electric motor. Also avoid using or leaving the camera near
anything emitting strong radio waves, such as a large antenna. Strong
magnetic fields can cause camera misoperation or destroy image data.
 Do not leave the camera in excessive heat, such as in a car in direct
sunlight. High temperatures can cause the camera to malfunction.
 The camera contains precision electronic circuitry. Never attempt to
disassemble the camera yourself.
20
Handling Precautions
 Do not block the mirror operation with your finger, etc. Doing so may cause a
malfunction.
 Use a blower to blow away dust on the lens, viewfinder, reflex mirror, and
focusing screen. Do not use cleaners that contain organic solvents to clean
the camera body or lens. For stubborn dirt, take the camera to the nearest
Canon Service Center.
 Do not remove the focusing screen unless you are changing it. When
changing the focusing screen, do not touch it with bare hands. Instead use
the dedicated tool that came with the interchangeable focusing screen (sold
separately).
 Do not touch the camera’s electrical contacts with your fingers. This is to
prevent the contacts from corroding. Corroded contacts can cause camera
misoperation.
 If the camera is suddenly brought in from the cold into a warm room,
condensation may form on the camera and internal parts. To prevent
condensation, first put the camera in a sealed plastic bag and let it adjust to
the warmer temperature before taking it out of the bag.
 If condensation forms on the camera, do not use the camera. This is to avoid
damaging the camera. If there is condensation, remove the lens, card and
battery from the camera, and wait until condensation has evaporated before
using the camera.
 If the camera will not be used for an extended period, remove the battery
and store the camera in a cool, dry, well-ventilated location. Even while the
camera is in storage, press the shutter button a few times once in a while to
check that the camera is still working.
 Avoid storing the camera where there are chemicals that result in rust and
corrosion such as in a chemical lab.
 If the camera has not been used for an extended period, test all its functions
before using it. If you have not used the camera for some time or if there is
an important shoot such as a foreign trip coming up, have the camera
checked by your Canon dealer or check the camera yourself and make sure
it is working properly.
 If you use continuous shooting, Live View shooting, or movie shooting for a
prolonged period, the camera may become hot. This is not a malfunction.
 If there is a bright light source inside or outside the image area, ghosting
may occur.
21
Nomenclature
<o> Drive mode selection/
AF operation/AF method selection button (p.141/86/299)
<m> Flash exposure
compensation/ISO speed
setting button (p.257/154)
<U> LCD panel
illumination button (p.60)
<B> AF area
selection/
Multi-function button
(p.92/258)
<n> White balance selection/
Metering mode selection button (p.168/224)
EF lens mount index (p.50)
Built-in flash/AF-assist beam (p.254/89)
EF-S lens mount index (p.50)
GPS antenna
Flash sync contacts
Hot shoe (p.259)
<6> Main Dial
(p.56)
Mode Dial lock-release
button (p.56)
Mode Dial
(p.29, 56)
Shutter button
(p.55)
Strap mount
(p.33)
Self-timer lamp
(p.143)
Built-in
microphone
(p.337)
Remote control
sensor (p.248)
<D> Flash
button (p.254)
Grip
(Battery
compartment)
DC coupler cord hole
(p.474)
Depth-of-field preview button
(p.221)
Lens release button (p.51)
Lens lock pin
Lens mount
Contacts (p.21)
Mirror (p.246, 409)
Body cap (p.50)
22
Nomenclature
<p> AF area selection lever (p.58)
LCD panel (p.25-26)
Eyecup (p.247)
<p>
AF start button
(p.55, 86, 287, 325)
<A> AE lock
button (p.229)
Viewfinder eyepiece
<S>
AF point
selection
button
(p.92-93)
<B> Info button
(p.60, 75, 78, 204, 206,
288, 323, 354, 468)
Power switch (p.45)
<Q> Quick
Control
button (p.61,
293, 329,
374)
<M> Menu button
(p.64)
Terminal cover
<5> Quick
Control Dial (p.57)
Touch pad (p.59)
<0> Setting button
(p.64)
<Y> External microphone IN terminal (p.337)
<n> Headphone terminal (p.337)
<g> Digital terminal (p.412, 425, 532)
<D> PC terminal (p.260)
<D> HDMI mini OUT terminal (p.385)
Cable protector socket
<F> Remote control terminal (N3 type) (p.248)
When connecting the interface cable to a digital terminal, also use the
provided cable protector (p.34).
23
Nomenclature
Dioptric adjustment knob (p.54)
<V> Focal plane mark
Speaker (for sound)
<A/k> Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch
(p.285/313)
<0> Start/Stop button
(p.286, 314)
<b/X>
Creative Photo/
Comparative playback
(Two-image display)
button (p.160, 233,
238/366)
<9> Multi-controller
(p.58)
<c>
Rating button
(p.370, 371)
Strap mount
(p.33)
<u>
Index/Magnify/
Reduce button
(p.361/364)
Card slot
cover (p.41)
<x> Playback
button (p.354)
<L> Erase button
(p.392)
Battery
compartment
cover release
lever (p.40)
Speaker (for beeper)
Battery compartment
cover (p.40)
LCD monitor (p.64, 286,
314, 354, 394)
Access lamp (p.44)
Tripod socket
Ambient light sensor (p.394)
Serial number
SD card slot (p.41)
CF card slot (p.41)
CF card eject button (p.43)
24
Multi function lock switch (p.59)
Nomenclature
LCD Panel
Shutter speed
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Cleaning image sensor (CLn)
Logging function (LOG)
White balance
(p.168)
Q Auto
W Daylight
E Shade
R Cloudy
Y Tungsten
light
U White
fluorescent
light
I Flash
O Custom
P Color temperature
Aperture
AF point selection
([
] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([
] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2)
Possible shots
Self-timer countdown
Bulb exposure time
Card error warning (Err)
Error number
Remaining images to record
Metering mode (p.224)
q Evaluative metering
w Partial metering
r Spot metering
e Center-weighted
average metering
Battery check (p.46)
<h> AEB (p.227)
<r> GPS acquisition
status (p.201)
<u> White balance correction
(p.172)
<N> Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.175)
<J> Bulb timer shooting
(p.231)
<H> Interval timer shooting
(p.250)
<w> HDR shooting (p.233)
<P> Multiple-exposure
shooting (p.238)
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
25
Nomenclature
<f> CF card indicator
<J> CF card selection icon
ISO speed (p.154)
<J> SD card selection icon
<g> SD card indicator
<i> ISO speed
(p.154)
<A>
Highlight tone priority
(p.180)
Exposure level indicator
(Setting value)
Exposure compensation amount (p.226)
AEB range (p.227)
Flash exposure compensation amount
(p.257)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.257)
<z> Warning symbol
(p.441)
26
AF operation (p.86)
X
One-Shot AF
9
AI Focus AF
Z
AI Servo AF
4L
Manual focus
Drive mode (p.141)
u Single shooting
o High-speed
continuous shooting
i Low-speed
continuous shooting
B Silent single
shooting
M Silent continuous
shooting
Q Self-timer: 10 sec./
remote control
k Self-timer: 2 sec./
remote control
Nomenclature
Viewfinder Information
Electronic level (p.76)
Spot metering circle (p.224)
Large Zone AF frame (p.91, 97)
Focusing screen
<S> Single AF point
<O> Spot AF point
(p.95)
Grid (p.74)
Exposure level
indicator (Metering/
Flash metering)
Area AF frame
(p.91, 97)
Flicker detection
(p.185)
<i> AF status
indicator (p.89)
Shooting mode
<z>
Warning symbol
(p.441)
White balance (p.168)
Drive mode (p.141)
AF operation (p.86)
Metering mode (p.224)
Standard exposure index
Exposure level scale
: 1 stop
: 1/3 stop
Overexposure
JPEG/RAW (p.149)
Flash
overexposure
Exposure level
Flash exposure
level
Flash
underexposure
Underexposure
* The display will show only the settings currently applied.
27
Nomenclature
<i> ISO speed
(p.154)
<z> Battery check
(p.46)
<A> AE lock (p.229)
AEB in-progress
(p.227)
<D> Flash-ready
(p.254, 259)
Improper FE lock
warning
<d> FE lock (p.259)
FEB in-progress (p.269)
<e> High-speed sync (p.269)
<y> Flash exposure
compensation (p.257)
Shutter speed (p.218)
FE lock (FEL)
Busy (buSY)
Built-in flash recycling (buSY)
Multi function lock warning (L)
No card warning (Card)
Error code (Err)
Aperture (p.220)
28
<o> Focus
indicator
(p.80, 87)
<e> AF status indicator
(p.132)
Maximum burst (p.153)
Number of remaining
multiple exposures (p.240)
ISO speed (p.154)
<A> Highlight tone priority (p.180)
Exposure level indicator
Exposure compensation amount (p.226)
AEB range (p.227)
Flash exposure compensation (p.257)
Red-eye reduction lamp ON (p.256)
AF point selection
([
] AF, SEL [ ], SEL AF)
AF point registration
([
] HP, SEL [ ], SEL HP)
Card warning (Card 1/2)
Card full warning (FuLL 1/2)
Nomenclature
Mode Dial
You can set the shooting mode. Turn the Mode Dial while holding down
the Mode Dial center (Mode Dial lock release button).
F : Bulb (p.230)
a : Manual exposure (p.222)
f : Aperture-priority AE (p.220)
s : Shutter-priority AE (p.218)
d : Program AE (p.216)
A : Scene Intelligent Auto (p.80)
Custom shooting mode
You can register the shooting mode (d/s/f/a/F), AF
operation, menu settings, etc., to w, x, y Mode Dial positions
(p.464).
29
Nomenclature
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM Lens
Focus mode switch (p.50)
Hood mount (p.52)
Zoom position index
Filter thread
(front of lens)
Focusing ring
(p.140, 308)
Zoom ring (p.51)
Zoom ring lock lever (p.51)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.53)
30
Contacts (p.529)
Lens mount index (p.50)
Nomenclature
EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM Lens
Hood mount (p.52)
Focus mode switch (p.50)
Zoom position index
Distance scale
Filter thread
(front of lens)
Zoom ring (p.51)
Focusing ring (p.140, 308)
Image Stabilizer switch (p.53)
Contacts (p.529)
Lens mount index (p.50)
31
Nomenclature
Battery Charger LC-E6
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.38).
Power plug
Battery pack slot
Charge lamp
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS-SAVE THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
DANGER-TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK,
CAREFULLY FOLLOW THESE INSTRUCTIONS.
For connection to a supply not in the U.S.A., use an attachment plug adapter
of the proper configuration for the power outlet, if needed.
Battery Charger LC-E6E
Charger for Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 (p.38).
Power cord
Charge lamp
Battery pack slot
Power cord socket
32
Nomenclature
Attaching the Strap
Pass the end of the strap through the
camera’s strap mount eyelet from the
bottom. Then pass it through the strap’s
buckle as shown in the illustration. Pull the
strap to take up any slack and make sure the
strap will not loosen from the buckle.
 The eyepiece cover is also attached to
the strap (p.247).
Eyepiece cover
33
Nomenclature
Using the Cable Protector
When connecting the camera to a computer, printer or Wireless File
Transmitter, use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (shown
in the System Map on page 478).
When connecting the interface cable, also use the provided cable
protector. Using the cable protector prevents the cable from accidental
disconnection and the terminal from getting damaged.
Using a Provided Interface Cable and a Genuine HDMI Cable (sold
separately)
1
2
Clamp
3
Cable protector
4
Provided
interface cable
5
HDMI cable (sold separately)
34
Nomenclature
Using a Genuine Interface Cable (sold separately)
If you use a genuine interface cable (sold
separately, p.478), run the cable through the
clamp before attaching the clamp to the cable
protector.
Clamp
 Connecting interface cable without using the cable protector may
damage the digital terminal.
 Do not use a USB 2.0 cable equipped with a Micro-B plug. It may
damage the camera’s digital terminal.
 As shown in the lower-right illustration for step 4, check that the interface
cable is securely attached to the digital terminal.
To connect the camera to a TV set, using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately) is recommended. Using the cable protector is recommended
even when connecting an HDMI cable.
35
Nomenclature
Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1
This adapter is an accessory that enables Wi-Fi (wireless
communication) functions when installed in the SD card slot of the
camera.
For instructions, refer to “Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Preliminary Notes and
Legal Information” and “Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual” (p.4).
Contacts
The W-E1 cannot record images. To record images, be sure to use a CF
card.
36
1
Getting Started
This chapter explains preparatory steps before you start
shooting and basic camera operations.
Minimizing Dust
 When changing lenses, do it quickly in a place with minimal dust.
 When storing the camera without a lens attached, be sure to
attach the body cap to the camera.
 Remove dust on the body cap before attaching it.
37
Charging the Battery
1
Remove the protective cover.
 Detach the protective cover provided
with the battery.
the battery.
2 Attach
 As shown in the illustration, attach the
battery securely to the charger.
 To detach the battery, follow the
above procedure in reverse.
LC-E6
the battery.
3 Recharge
For LC-E6
 As shown by the arrow, flip out the
battery charger’s prongs and insert
the prongs into a power outlet.
For LC-E6E
LC-E6E
Charge Level
0-49%
50-74%
75% or higher
Fully charged
 Connect the power cord to the
charger and insert the plug into a
power outlet.
 Recharging starts automatically and
the charge lamp blinks in orange.
Color
Orange
Green
Charge Lamp
Display
Blinks once per second
Blinks twice per second
Blinks three times per second
Lights up
 It takes approx. 2 hr. and 30 min. to fully recharge a completely exhausted battery at
room temperature (23°C / 73°F). The time required to recharge the battery will vary
greatly depending on the ambient temperature and the battery’s remaining capacity.
 For safety reasons, recharging in low temperatures (5°C - 10°C /
41°F - 50°F) will take longer (up to approx. 4 hr.).
38
Charging the Battery
Tips for Using the Battery and Charger
 Upon purchase, the battery is not fully charged.
Charge the battery before use.
 Recharge the battery on the day before or on the day it is to be used.
Even during storage, a charged battery will gradually drain and lose its capacity.
 After recharging the battery, detach it and disconnect the
charger from the power outlet.
 You can attach the cover in a different
orientation to indicate whether the battery
has been recharged or not.
If the battery has been recharged, attach the
cover so that the battery-shaped hole <
> is
aligned over the blue sticker on the battery. If the battery is
exhausted, attach the cover in the opposite orientation.
 When not using the camera, remove the battery.
If the battery is left in the camera for a prolonged period, a small amount
of power current is released, resulting in excess discharge and shorter
battery life. Store the battery with the protective cover attached. Storing
the battery when it is fully charged may lower the battery’s performance.
 The battery charger can also be used in foreign countries.
The battery charger is compatible with a 100 V AC to 240 V AC 50/60 Hz
power source. If necessary, attach a commercially-available plug adapter for
the respective country or region. Do not attach any portable voltage
transformer to the battery charger. Doing so can damage the battery charger.
 If the battery becomes exhausted quickly even after being fully
charged, the battery has reached the end of its service life.
Check the battery’s recharge performance (p.470) and purchase a new battery.
 After disconnecting the charger’s power plug, do not touch the prongs for approx. 10 sec.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity (p.470) is 94% or higher, the battery
will not be recharged.
 The charger cannot charge any battery other than Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
39
Installing and Removing the Battery
Load a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N (or LP-E6) into the camera.
The camera’s viewfinder becomes bright when a battery is installed,
and darkens when the battery is removed.
Installing the Battery
1
Open the cover.
 Slide the lever as shown by the
arrows and open the cover.
the battery.
2 Insert
 Insert the end with the battery
contacts.
 Insert the battery until it locks in
place.
the cover.
3 Close
 Press the cover until it snaps shut.
Only Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 can be used.
Removing the Battery
Open the cover and remove the
battery.
 Press the battery lock lever as shown
by the arrow and remove the battery.
 To prevent short circuiting of the
battery contacts, be sure to attach the
provided protective cover (p.38) to
the battery.
40
Installing and Removing the Card
The camera can use a CF card and an SD card. Images can be
recorded when at least one card is installed in the camera.
If both types of card are inserted, you can select which card to record
images to, or simultaneously record images on both cards (p.146-148).
If you use an SD card, be sure the card’s write-protect switch
is set upward to enable writing/erasing.
Installing the Card
1
CF card
SD card
Write-protect switch
Open the cover.
 Slide the cover as shown by the
arrows to open it.
the card.
2 Insert
 The camera-front side slot is for a CF
card, and the camera-back side slot
is for an SD card.
 Face the CF card’s label toward
you and insert the end with the
small holes into the camera.
If the card is inserted in the wrong
way, it may damage the camera.
 The CF card eject button will stick
out.
 With the SD card’s label facing
you, push in the card until it clicks
in place.
41
Installing and Removing the Card
the cover.
3 Close
 Close the cover and slide it in the
Card
Possible
selection icon shots
direction shown by the arrows until it
snaps shut.
 When you set the power switch to
<1> (p.45), the number of possible
shots and the loaded card(s) will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
The images will be recorded to the
card indicated by the arrow < >
icon.
CF card indicator
SD card indicator
 The camera cannot use Type II CF cards or hard disk-type cards.
 The Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 cannot save images. Also, the SD card
indicator will not be displayed for it.
 Ultra DMA (UDMA) CF cards can also be used with the camera. UDMA
cards enable faster data writing.
 SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards are supported. UHS-I SDHC or SDXC
memory cards can also be used.
 The number of possible shots depends on the remaining capacity of the
card, image-recording quality, ISO speed, etc.
 Even if shooting 2,000 or more shots is possible, the indicator will display
only up to 1999.
 Setting [z1: Release shutter without card] to [Disable] will prevent
you from forgetting to insert a card (p.484).
42
Installing and Removing the Card
Removing the Card
1
Open the cover.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Make sure the access lamp is off,
then open the cover.
 If [Recording...] is displayed, close
the cover.
Access lamp
the card.
2 Remove
 To remove the CF card, push the
CF card eject button
eject button.
 To remove the SD card, push it in
gently and release it. Then pull it out.
 Pull the card straight out, then close
the cover.
43
Installing and Removing the Card
 When the access lamp is lit or blinking, it indicates that images are
being written to, read from, or erased from the card, or data is being
transferred. Do not open the card slot cover during this time. Also,
never do any of the following while the access lamp is lit or
blinking. Otherwise, it can damage the image data, card, or camera.
• Removing the card.
• Removing the battery.
• Shaking or banging the camera around.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may not
start from 0001 (p.193).
 If a card-related error message is displayed on the LCD monitor, remove
and reinsert the card. If the error persists, use a different card.
If you can transfer all the images on the card to a computer, transfer all
the images and then format the card with the camera (p.67). The card
may then return to normal.
 Do not touch the SD card’s contacts with your fingers or metal objects.
Do not expose the contacts to dust or water. If smudges adhere to the
contacts, contact failure may result.
 Multimedia cards (MMC) cannot be used (card error will be displayed).
44
Turning on the Power
If you turn on the power switch and the date/time/zone setting
screen appears, see page 47 to set the date/time/zone.
<1> : The camera turns on.
<2> : The camera is turned off and
does not operate. Set to this
position when not using the
camera.
Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 Whenever you set the power switch
to <1> or <2>, sensor
cleaning will be executed
automatically. (A small sound may be
heard.) During the sensor cleaning,
the LCD monitor will display <f>.
 You can still shoot during sensor cleaning by pressing the shutter
button halfway (p.55) to stop cleaning and take a picture.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1>/<2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed. This is normal and
not a malfunction.
3 Auto Power Off
 To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after 1
minute of non-operation. To turn on the camera again, just press the
shutter button halfway.
 You can set the auto power off time with [52: Auto power off]
(p.69).
If you set the power switch to <2> while an image is being recorded to
the card, [Recording...] will be displayed and the power will turn off after the
recording finishes.
45
Turning on the Power
z Checking the Battery Level
When the power switch is set to <1>, the battery level will be
indicated in one of six levels. A blinking battery icon (b) indicates
that the battery will be exhausted soon.
Display
Level (%) 100 - 70 69 - 50 49 - 20 19 - 10
9-1
0
Number of Possible Shots
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 800 shots
Approx. 760 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 670 shots
Approx. 640 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, no Live View
shooting, and CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 Possible shots with Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately)
• With LP-E6N x 2: approx. twice the shots without the battery grip.
• With size-AA/LR6 alkaline batteries at room temperature (23°C / 73°F):
approx. 270 shots with no flash, approx. 210 shots with 50% flash use.
 Doing any of the following will exhaust the battery sooner:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor often.
 The number of possible shots may decrease depending on the actual
shooting conditions.
 The lens operation is powered by the camera’s battery. Depending on
the lens used, the battery may exhaust faster.
 For the number of possible shots with Live View shooting, see page 287.
 See [53: Battery info.] to check the battery’s condition in detail (p.470).
 With Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) loaded with size AA/LR6
batteries, a four-level indicator will be displayed. ([x] [m] will not
be displayed.)
46
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
When you turn on the power for the first time or if the date/time/zone are
reset, the date/time/zone setting screen will appear. Follow the steps
below, making sure to set the time zone first. Set the camera to the time
zone in which you currently live so that, when you travel, you can simply
change the setting to the correct time zone for your destination and the
camera will automatically adjust the date/time.
Note that the date/time appended to recorded images will be based
on this date/time setting. Be sure to set the correct date/time.
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select [Date/
2 Under
Time/Zone].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Date/
Time/Zone], then press <0>.
the time zone.
3 Set
 [London] is set by default.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Time
zone].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the time
zone, then press <0>.
47
3 Setting the Date, Time, and Zone
the date and time.
4 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to select the number.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting, then press <0>
(Returns to <s>).
the daylight saving time.
5 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Y].
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Turn the <5> dial to select [Z], then
press <0>.
 When the daylight saving time is set
to [Z], the time set in step 4 will
advance by 1 hr. If [Y] is set, the
daylight saving time will be canceled
and the time will go back by 1 hr.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Turn the <5> dial to select [OK],
then press <0>.
 The date/time/zone and daylight
saving time will be set and the menu
will reappear.
 The date/time/zone settings may be reset when the camera is stored
without the battery, when its battery becomes exhausted, or when it is
exposed to below freezing temperatures for a prolonged period. If this
happens, set the date/time/zone again.
 After changing the time zone, check that the correct date/time are set.
 When performing [Sync time between cameras] via Wireless File
Transmitter, using another EOS 7D Mark II is recommended. If you
perform [Sync time between cameras] using different models, the time
zone or time may not be set correctly.
48
3 Selecting the Interface Language
 The date/time that were set will start from when you press <0> in step
6.
 In step 3, the time displayed on the upper right of the screen is the time
difference compared with Coordinated Universal Time (UTC). If you do
not see your time zone, set the time zone while referring to the difference
with UTC.
 The time can be set using the GPS auto time setting function (p.209).
3 Selecting the Interface Language
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
the [52] tab, select
2 Under
[LanguageK].
 Press the <Q> button and select the
[5] tab.
 Turn the <6> dial to select the [52]
tab.
 Turn the <5> dial to select
[LanguageK], then press <0>.
the desired language.
3 Set
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
language, then press <0>.
 The interface language will change.
49
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
The camera is compatible with all Canon EF and EF-S lenses. The
camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses.
Attaching a Lens
1
Remove the caps.
 Remove the rear lens cap and the
body cap by turning them as shown
by the arrows.
the lens.
2 Attach
 Align the lens’s red or white mount
White index
index with the camera’s mount index
of the same color. Turn the lens as
shown by the arrow until it clicks in
place.
Red index
the lens’s focus mode switch
3 Set
to <AF>.
 <AF> stands for autofocus.
 <MF> stands for manual focus.
Autofocus will not operate.
4 Remove the front lens cap.
Image Conversion Factor
Since the image sensor size is
smaller than the 35mm film
format, the angle of view of an
attached lens will be equivalent
to that of a lens with approx. 1.6x
of the focal length indicated.
50
Image sensor size (Approx.)
(22.4 x 15.0 mm / 0.88 x 0.59 in.)
35mm image size
(36 x 24 mm / 1.42 x 0.94 in.)
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Zooming
Turn the zoom ring on the lens
with your fingers.
 If you want to zoom, do it before
focusing. Turning the zoom ring after
achieving focus may throw off the
focus.
Detaching the Lens
While pressing the lens release
button, turn the lens as shown by
the arrow.
 Turn the lens until it stops, then
detach it.
 Attach the rear lens cap to the
detached lens.
 To owners of the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens:
You can prevent the lens from extending out while you are carrying it
around. Set the zoom ring to the 18mm wide-angle end, then slide
the zoom ring lock lever to <LOCK>. The zoom ring can be locked
only at the wide-angle end.
 Do not look at the sun directly through any lens. Doing so may cause
loss of vision.
 When attaching or detaching a lens, set the camera’s power switch to
<2>.
 If the front part (focusing ring) of the lens rotates during autofocusing, do
not touch the rotating part.
51
Attaching and Detaching a Lens
Attaching a Lens Hood
A lens hood can block unwanted light and prevent rain, snow, dust, etc.
adhering to the front of the lens. Before storing the lens in a bag, etc.,
you can attach the hood in reverse.
 If the Lens and the Lens Hood Have a Mount Index
1
Align the red dots, then turn the
hood as shown by the arrow.
 Align the red dots on the hood and
lens edge, then turn the hood as
shown by the arrow.
the hood as shown in the
2 Turn
illustration.
 Turn the hood clockwise until it
attaches securely.
 If the hood is not attached properly, it may obstruct the image’s
periphery, making the image look dark.
 When attaching or detaching the hood, grasp the base of the hood when
turning it. Grasping the hood’s edges when turning it may deform the
hood, resulting in failure to turn.
52
Lens Image Stabilizer
When you use the IS lens’s built-in Image Stabilizer, camera shake is
corrected to obtain a sharper shot. The procedure explained here is
based on the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM lens as an example.
* IS stands for Image Stabilizer.
1
Set the IS switch to <1>.
 Also set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
the shutter button halfway.
2 Press
 The Image Stabilizer will operate.
the picture.
3 Take
 When the picture looks steady in the
viewfinder, press the shutter button
completely to take the picture.
 The Image Stabilizer will not be effective if the subject moves during the
exposure.
 For bulb exposures, set the IS switch to <2>. If <1> is set, Image
Stabilizer misoperation may occur.
 The Image Stabilizer may not be effective for excessive shaking such as
on a rocking boat.
 The Image Stabilizer can operate with the lens’s focus mode switch set
to either <AF> or <MF>.
 When using a tripod, you can still shoot with the IS switch set to <1>
with no problem. However, to save battery power, setting the IS switch to
<2> is recommended.
 The Image Stabilizer is effective even when the camera is mounted on a
monopod.
 With the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM or EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM lens, the Image Stabilizer mode may switch automatically to suit
the shooting conditions.
53
Basic Operation
Adjusting the Viewfinder Clarity
Turn the dioptric adjustment
knob.
 Turn the knob left or right so that the
AF points in the viewfinder look
sharp.
 If the knob is difficult to turn, remove
the eyecup (p.247).
If the camera’s dioptric adjustment still cannot provide a sharp viewfinder
image, using Dioptric Adjustment Lens Eg (sold separately) is
recommended.
Holding the Camera
To obtain sharp images, hold the camera still to minimize camera
shake.
Horizontal shooting
Vertical shooting
1. Wrap your right hand around the camera grip firmly.
2. Hold the lens bottom with your left hand.
3. Rest your hand’s right index finger lightly on the shutter button.
4. Press your arms and elbows lightly against the front of your body.
5. To maintain a stable stance, place one foot slightly ahead of the other.
6. Press the camera against your face and look through the viewfinder.
To shoot while looking at the LCD monitor, see page 285.
54
Basic Operation
Shutter Button
The shutter button has two steps. You can press the shutter button
halfway. Then you can further press the shutter button completely.
Pressing Halfway
This activates autofocusing and the
automatic exposure system that sets the
shutter speed and aperture.
The exposure setting (shutter speed and
aperture) is displayed in the viewfinder
and on the LCD panel for 4 sec.
(metering timer/0).
Pressing Completely
This releases the shutter and takes the
picture.
Preventing Camera Shake
Hand-held camera movement during the moment of exposure is called
camera shake. It can cause blurred pictures. To prevent camera shake,
note the following:
• Hold and steady the camera as shown on the preceding page.
• Press the shutter button halfway to autofocus, then slowly press the
shutter button completely.
 In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting modes, pressing the
<p> button will execute the same operation as pressing the shutter
button halfway.
 If you press the shutter button completely without pressing it halfway first
or if you press the shutter button halfway and then press it completely
immediately, the camera will take a moment before it takes the picture.
 Even during menu display, image playback, or image recording, you can
go back to shooting-ready by pressing the shutter button halfway.
55
Basic Operation
Mode Dial
Turn the dial while holding down
the lock release button at the
center of the dial.
Use it to set the shooting mode.
6 Main Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<6> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n> <o> <m>, the
respective function remains selected for
6 sec. (9). During this time, you can
turn the <6> dial to change the setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select or set the
metering mode, AF operation, ISO
speed, AF point, etc.
(2) Turn the <6> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <6> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the shutter speed,
aperture, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to
the right (Multi function lock, p.59).
56
Basic Operation
5 Quick Control Dial
(1) After pressing a button, turn the
<5> dial.
When you press a button such as
<n> <o> <m>, the
respective function remains selected for
6 sec. (9). During this time, you can
turn the <5> dial to change the setting.
When the function selection ends or if
you press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will be ready to shoot.
 Use this dial to select or set the white
balance, drive mode, flash exposure
compensation, AF point, etc.
(2) Turn the <5> dial only.
While looking at the viewfinder or LCD
panel, turn the <5> dial to change the
setting.
 Use this dial to set the exposure
compensation amount, the aperture
setting for manual exposures, etc.
The operations in (1) are possible even when the <R> switch is set to
the right (Multi function lock, p.59).
57
Basic Operation
p AF Area Selection Lever
The <p> lever can be tilted to the right. Use it to select the AF area
selection mode.
After pressing the <S> button,
tilt the <p>.
 Pressing the <S> button will make
the AF area selection mode and AF
point selectable for 6 sec. (9).
Then, when you tilt the <p> to the
right within that time, you can change
the AF area selection mode.
You can also press the <S> button and then press the <B> button to
select the AF area selection mode.
9 Multi-controller
The <9> consists of an eight-direction key and a button at the center.
 Use it to select the AF point, correct
the white balance, move the AF point
or magnifying frame during Live View
shooting, scroll around magnified
images during playback, operate the
Quick Control screen, etc.
 You can also use it to select and set
menu items.
 For menus and Quick Control, the
Multi-controller works only in the
vertical and horizontal directions
<V> <U>. It does not work in
diagonal directions.
58
Basic Operation
h Touch Pad
During movie shooting, the touch pad provides a quiet way to adjust the
shutter speed, aperture, exposure compensation, ISO speed, sound
recording level, and headphone volume (p.338).
This function works when [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h].
After pressing the <Q> button,
tap the <5> dial’s inner ring at
the top, bottom, left, or right.
R Multi Function Lock
By setting [83: Multi function lock] (p.442) and moving the <R>
switch to the right, you can prevent the Main Dial, Quick Control Dial,
Multi-controller, and AF area selection lever from moving and changing
a setting inadvertently.
<R> switch set to the left:
Lock released
<R> switch set to the right:
Lock engaged
If the <R> switch is set to the right and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. On the shooting settings display (p.60), [LOCK] will be displayed.
59
Basic Operation
U LCD Panel Illumination
Turn on (9) or off the LCD panel
illumination by pressing the <U> button.
During a bulb exposure, pressing the
shutter button completely will turn off the
LCD panel illumination.
Displaying Shooting Function Settings
After you press the <B> button a number of times, the shooting
function settings will be displayed.
With the shooting function settings displayed, you can turn the Mode
Dial to see the settings for each shooting mode (p.469).
Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting
function settings (p.61).
Press the <B> button again to turn off the display.
60
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
You can directly select and set the shooting functions displayed on the
LCD monitor. This is called Quick Control.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The Quick Control screen will appear.
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed.
 Turn the <5> or <6> dial to
change the setting.
 <A> mode
 <d/s/f/a/F> modes
the picture.
3 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed.
In the <A> mode, you can only select the recording function and card, and
set the image-recording quality, drive mode, and flash firing.
61
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Settable Functions on Quick Control Screen
Aperture (p.220)
Shutter speed (p.218)
AE lock* (p.229)
Highlight tone priority* (p.180)
Shooting mode* (p.29)
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting
(p.226/227)
Picture Style (p.160)
AF operation (p.86)
White balance (p.168)
Metering mode (p.224)
White balance correction /
White balance bracketing
(p.172/173)
ISO speed (p.154)
Flash exposure
compensation (p.257)
Custom Controls (p.445)/
Flash firing (A mode)
Image-recording quality
(p.149)
Recording function/Card selection
(p.146)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
(p.175)
Drive mode (p.141)
* Functions marked with an asterisk cannot be set with the Quick Control
screen.
62
Q Quick Control for Shooting Functions
Function Setting Screen
 <0>
 Select a function and press <0>.
The function setting screen will
appear.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to
change some of the settings. There
are also functions that are set by
pressing the button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to the previous screen.
 When you select <
> (p.445) and
press the <M> button, the
previous screen will reappear.
63
3 Menu Operations
You can set various settings with the menus such as the image-recording
quality, date/time, etc.
<M> button
<6> Main Dial
LCD monitor
<5> Quick Control Dial
<Q> button
<0> button
A Mode Menu Screen
* Certain menu tabs and menu items are not displayed in the <A> mode.
d/s/f/a/F Mode Menu Screen
3: Playback
2: AF
z: Shooting
Secondary
tabs
5: Set-up
8: Custom Functions
9: My Menu
Main tabs
Menu settings
Menu items
64
3 Menu Operations
Menu Setting Procedure
1
Display the menu screen.
 Press the <M> button to display
the menu screen.
a tab.
2 Select
 Each time you press the <Q> button,
the main tab will switch.
 Turn the <6> dial to select a
secondary tab.
 For example, the [z4] tab refers to
the screen displayed when the z
(Shooting) tab’s fourth dot “ ” from the
left is selected.
the desired item.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the item,
then press <0>.
the setting.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
desired setting.
 The current setting is indicated in
blue.
the setting.
5 Adjust
 Press <0> to set it.
the setting.
6 Exit
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu and return to shooting-ready.
65
3 Menu Operations
 The explanation of menu functions hereinafter assumes that you have
pressed the <M> button to display the menu screen.
 You can also use <9> to operate and set menu functions. (Except for
[31: Erase images] and [51: Format card].)
 To cancel the operation, press the <M> button.
 For details about each menu item, see page 484.
Dimmed Menu Items
Example: When Multi Shot
Noise Reduction is set
Dimmed menu items cannot be set. The
menu item is dimmed if another function
setting is overriding it.
You can see the overriding function by
selecting the dimmed menu item and
pressing <0>.
If you cancel the overriding function’s
setting, the dimmed menu item will
become settable.
Some dimmed menu items will not show the overriding function.
With [54: Clear all camera settings], you can reset the menu functions to
the default settings (p.70).
66
Before You Start
3 Formatting the Card
If the card is new or was previously formatted by another camera or
computer, format the card with this camera.
When the card is formatted, all images and data on the card
will be erased. Even protected images will be erased, so make
sure there is nothing you need to keep. If necessary, transfer
the images and data to a computer, etc., before formatting the
card.
1
Select [Format card].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Format
card], then press <0>.
the card.
2 Select
 [f] is the CF card, and [g] is the SD
card.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
[OK].
3 Select
 The card will be formatted.
 When [g] is selected, low-level
formatting is possible (p.68).
For low-level formatting, press the
<L> button to append [Low level
format] with a checkmark <X>, then
select [OK].
67
Before You Start
Format the card in the following cases:




The card is new.
The card was formatted by a different camera or a computer.
The card is full with images or data.
A card-related error is displayed (p.510).
Low-level Formatting
 Perform low-level formatting if the SD card’s reading or writing speed
seems slow or if you want to totally erase all data on the card.
 Since low-level formatting will erase all recordable sectors on the SD card,
the formatting will take slightly longer than normal formatting.
 You can stop the low-level formatting by selecting [Cancel]. Even in this
case, normal formatting will be completed and you can use the SD card as
usual.
 When the card is formatted or data is erased, only the file management
information is changed. The actual data is not completely erased. Be
aware of this when selling or discarding the card. When discarding the
card, execute low-level formatting or destroy the card physically to
prevent the personal data from being leaked.
 Before using a new Eye-Fi card (p.475), the software on the card
must be installed on your computer. Then format the card with the
camera.
 The card capacity displayed on the card format screen may be smaller
than the capacity indicated on the card.
 This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft.
68
Before You Start
3 Disabling the Beeper
You can prevent the beeper from sounding when focus is achieved or
during self-timer operation.
1
Select [Beep].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Beep],
then press <0>.
[Disable].
2 Select
 Select [Disable], then press <0>.
 The beeper will not sound.
3 Setting the Power-off Time/Auto Power Off
To save battery power, the camera turns off automatically after a set
time of idle operation elapses. The default setting is 1 min., but this
setting can be changed. If you do not want the camera to turn off
automatically, set this to [Disable]. After the power turns off, you can
turn on the camera again by pressing the shutter button or other
buttons.
1
Select [Auto power off].
 Under the [52] tab, select [Auto
power off], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Even if [Disable] is set, the LCD monitor will turn off automatically after 30
min. to save power. (The camera’s power does not turn off.)
69
Before You Start
3 Setting the Image Review Time
You can set how long the image is displayed on the LCD monitor just
after shooting. To keep the image displayed, set [Hold]. To not have the
image displayed, set [Off].
1
Select [Image review].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
review], then press <0>.
the desired time.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
If [Hold] is set, the image will be displayed until the auto power off time
elapses.
3 Reverting the Camera to the Default SettingsN
The camera’s shooting function settings and menu settings can be
reverted to their defaults.
1
Select [Clear all camera settings].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Clear all
camera settings], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 Clearing all the camera settings will
reset the camera to the default
settings on pages 71-73.
70
Before You Start
AF Settings
Shooting Function Settings
AF operation
AF area selection
mode
AF point selection
Registered AF point
Metering mode
ISO speed
ISO speed range
Auto ISO range
One-Shot AF
Single-point AF
(Manual Selection)
Center
Canceled
q (Evaluative metering)
Auto
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 16000
Minimum limit: 100
Maximum limit: 6400
Minimum shutter Auto
speed
Drive mode
u (Single shooting)
Exposure
Canceled
compensation/AEB
Flash exposure
Canceled
compensation
Red-eye reduction Disable
Multiple exposure Disable
HDR Mode
Disable HDR
Interval timer
Disable
Bulb timer
Disable
Anti-flicker shooting Disable
Mirror lockup
Disable
Viewfinder display
Viewfinder level Hide
VF grid display Disable
Show/hide in
Only Flicker
viewfinder
checkmarked
Custom Functions Unchanged
Flash control
Flash firing
Enable
E-TTL II
Evaluative flash
Flash metering metering
Flash sync. speed Auto
in Av mode
Case 1 - 6
AI Servo 1st
image priority
AI Servo 2nd
image priority
Lens electronic
MF
AF-assist beam firing
One-Shot AF
release priority
Lens drive when
AF impossible
Selectable AF
point
Select AF area
selection mode
AF area selection
method
Orientation linked
AF point
Initial AF point,
AI Servo AF
Automatic AF
point selection:
EOS iTR AF
Manual AF point
selection pattern
AF point display
during focus
VF display illumination
AF point during
AI Servo AF
AF status in
viewfinder
AF
Microadjustment
Case1/Parameter
settings of all
cases cleared
Equal priority
Equal priority
Enable after
One-Shot AF
Enable
Focus priority
Continue focus
search
65 points
All items
selected
M-Fn button
Same for both
vertical/horizontal
Auto
Enable
Stops at AF area
edges
Selected
(constant)
Auto
Non illuminated
Show in field of
view
Disable/
Adjustment
amount retained
71
Before You Start
Image Recording Settings
Camera Settings
Image quality
73
Auto power off
1 min.
Picture Style
Standard
Beep
Enable
Standard
Release shutter
without card
Enable
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Peripheral illumination Enable/Correction
correction
data retained
Image review time
2 sec.
Highlight alert
Disable
Chromatic aberration
correction
Enable/Correction
data retained
AF point display
Disable
Playback grid
Off
Distortion correction
Disable/Correction
data retained
Histogram display
Brightness
White balance
Q (Auto)
Custom White Balance Canceled
Magnification
(Approx.)
2x (magnify
from center)
White balance shift
Control over HDMI
Disable
Canceled
White balance
bracketing
Canceled
Color space
sRGB
Movie playback count Unchanged
Image jump w/6
e (10 images)
Auto rotate
OnzD
LCD brightness
Auto
Date/Time/Zone
Unchanged
Eye-Fi settings
Disable
Language
Unchanged
Highlight tone priority Disable
GPS and digital
compass settings
Disable
Record function
Standard
Video system
Unchanged
File numbering
Continuous
File name
Preset code
z button display All items
options
selected
Auto cleaning
Enable
m button function Rating
Dust Delete Data
Erased
Custom shooting mode Unchanged
Long exposure
noise reduction
Disable
High ISO speed
noise reduction
Standard
Copyright information Unchanged
Configure:
MY MENU*
Menu display
Wi-Fi Function
(only with W-E1)
72
Unchanged
Normal display
Unchanged
Before You Start
Live View Shooting Settings
Live View shooting
AF method
Continuous AF
Grid display
Aspect ratio
Enable
u+Tracking
Disable
Off
3:2
Exposure
simulation
Enable
Silent LV
shooting
Mode 1
Metering timer
8 sec.
Movie Shooting Settings
Movie Servo AF Enable
AF method
u+Tracking
Grid display
Off
Movie recording quality
MOV/MP4
MOV
Movie
NTSC: L6X
recording size PAL: L5X
24.00P
Disable
Sound recording Auto
Wind filter
Disable
Attenuator
Disable
Movie Servo AF speed
When active
Always on
AF speed
Standard
Movie Servo AF
0 (Standard)
tracking sensitivity
Silent LV shooting
Metering timer
Time code
Count up
Start time setting
Mode 1
8 sec.
Unchanged
Unchanged
Movie
Unchanged
recording count
Movie playback
Unchanged
count
HDMI
Drop frame
Silent control
V button
function
Unchanged
Unchanged
Disable h
/z
HDMI output +
LCD
No mirroring
HDMI frame rate
Auto
73
l Displaying the Grid
You can display a grid in the viewfinder to help you check the camera tilt
or compose the shot.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [VF grid display].
[Enable].
3 Select
 When you exit the menu, the grid will
appear in the viewfinder.
You can display a grid on the LCD monitor during Live View shooting and
before you start shooting a movie (p.295, 344).
74
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
You can display the electronic level on the LCD monitor and in the
viewfinder to help you correct camera tilt.
Displaying the Electronic Level on the LCD Monitor
1
Press the <B> button.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the screen display will
change.
 Display the electronic level.
 If the electronic level does not
appear, set [53: z button
display options] so that the
electronic level can be displayed
(p.468).
the camera’s tilt.
2 Check
 The horizontal and vertical tilt are
Vertical level Horizontal level
displayed in 1° increments.
 When the red line turns green, it
indicates that the tilt is almost
corrected.
 Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
 If the camera is very tilted, the electronic level’s margin of error will be larger.
During Live View shooting and before movie shooting (except with u+
Tracking), you can also display the electronic level as described above.
75
Q Displaying the Electronic Level
3 Displaying the Electronic Level in the Viewfinder
An electronic level can be displayed on the upper part of the viewfinder.
Since this can be displayed while you shoot, you can correct the
camera tilt while shooting.
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Viewfinder level].
3 Select [Show].
the shutter button halfway.
4 Press
 The electronic level will be displayed
in the viewfinder.
 This also works with vertical shooting.
1°
4° or greater
1°
7°
7.5° or greater
Even when the tilt is corrected, there may be a margin of error of approx.
±1°.
76
3 Setting the Viewfinder Information DisplayN
The shooting function settings (Shooting mode, White balance, Drive
mode, AF operation, Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker
detection) can be displayed in the viewfinder.
By default, only Flicker detection is checkmarked [X].
1
Select [Viewfinder display].
 Under the [52] tab, select
[Viewfinder display], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Show/hide in viewfinder].
[X] the information to
3 Checkmark
be displayed.
 Select the information to display and
press <0> to append a checkmark
<X>.
 Repeat this procedure to append a
checkmark [X] to all the information
to be displayed. Then select [OK].
 When you exit the menu, the
checkmarked information will appear
in the viewfinder (p.27).
If no card is inserted in the camera, the image-recording quality will not be
displayed in the viewfinder.
When you press the <n> or <o> button, operate the lens’s focus
mode switch, or when a lens equipped with electronic manual focusing is
used and the AF/MF switches as the lens’s focusing ring is turned (p.119),
the respective information will appear in the viewfinder regardless of
whether it is checkmarked.
77
Help
When [z Help] is displayed at the bottom of the menu screen, the
feature’s description (Help) can be displayed. The Help screen is
displayed only while you hold down the <B> button. If the Help fills
more than one screen, a scroll bar will appear on the right edge. To
scroll, hold down the <B> button and turn the <5> dial.
 Example: [21: Case2]
B

Scroll bar
 Example: [24: Orientation linked AF point]
B

 Example: [83: Multi function lock]
B

78
2
Basic Shooting
This chapter explains how to use the Mode Dial’s <A>
(Scene Intelligent Auto) mode for easy picture taking.
In the <A> mode, all you do is point and shoot and the
camera sets everything automatically (p.480). Also, to prevent
botched pictures due to mistaken operations, advanced
shooting function settings cannot be changed.
Scene Intelligent Auto
Auto Lighting Optimizer
In the <A> mode, the Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.175) will adjust
the image automatically to obtain the optimum brightness and
contrast. It is also enabled by default in the <d>, <s>, or
<f> mode.
79
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
<A> is a fully automatic mode. The camera analyzes the scene
and sets the optimum settings automatically. It also adjusts focus
automatically by detecting whether the subject is still or moving (p.83).
1
Area AF frame
Set the Mode Dial to <A>.
 Turn the Mode Dial while holding
down the lock release button at the
center.
the Area AF frame over the
2 Aim
subject.
 All the AF points will be used to focus,
and the camera will focus on the
closest object.
 Aiming the center of the Area AF
frame over the subject will make
focusing easier.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway. The
lens elements will shift to focus.
 During the autofocus operation,
<i> will be displayed.
 The AF point that achieves focus will
be displayed. At the same time, the
beeper will sound and the focus
indicator <o> will light up.
 In low light, the AF point(s) will light
up briefly in red.
 If necessary, the built-in flash will be
raised automatically.
Focus indicator
80
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely to
take the picture.
 The captured image will be displayed
for 2 sec. on the LCD monitor.
 After you finish shooting, push down
the built-in flash with your fingers.
The <A> mode makes the colors look more impressive in nature, outdoor,
and sunset scenes. If you did not obtain the desired color tones, change the
mode to <d>, <s>, <f>, or <a>, set a Picture Style other than
<D>, then shoot again (p.160).
FAQ
 The focus indicator <o> blinks and focus is not achieved.
Aim the Area AF frame over an area with good contrast, then press
the shutter button halfway (p.55). If you are too close to the subject,
move away and try again.
 When focus is achieved, the AF points do not light up in red.
The AF points light up in red in low-light conditions.
 Multiple AF points light up simultaneously.
Focus has been achieved at all those points. As long as the AF point
covering the desired subject lights up, you can take the picture.
 The beeper continues to beep softly. (The focus indicator <o>
does not light up.)
It indicates that the camera is focusing continuously on a moving
subject. (The focus indicator <o> does not light up.) You can take
sharp pictures of a moving subject.
Note that focus lock (p.83) will not work in this case.
81
A Fully Automatic Shooting (Scene Intelligent Auto)
 Pressing the shutter button halfway does not focus on the
subject.
If the focus mode switch on the lens is set to <MF> (manual focus),
set it to <AF> (autofocus).
 The flash fired even though it was daylight.
For a backlit subject, the flash may fire to help lighten the subject’s
dark areas. If you do not want the flash to fire, use the Quick Control
to set [Flash firing] to [b] (p.61).
 The flash fired and the picture came out extremely bright.
Move further away from the subject and shoot. When shooting flash
photography, if the subject is too close to the camera, the picture
may come out extremely bright (overexposure).
 In low light, the built-in flash fired a series of flashes.
Pressing the shutter button halfway may trigger the built-in flash to
fire a series of flashes to assist autofocusing. This is called the AFassist beam (p.89). Its effective range is approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
The built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is
normal and not a malfunction.
 When flash was used, the bottom part of the picture came out
unnaturally dark.
The shadow of the lens barrel was captured in the picture because
the subject was too close to the camera. Move further away from the
subject and shoot. If a hood is attached to the lens, remove it before
taking the flash picture.
82
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
Recomposing the Shot
Depending on the scene, position the subject toward the left or right to
create a balanced background and good perspective.
In the <A> mode, pressing the shutter button halfway to focus on a
still subject will lock the focus on that subject. Recompose the shot
while keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, and then press the
shutter button completely to take the picture. This is called “focus lock”.
Shooting a Moving Subject
In the <A> mode, if the subject moves (distance to camera changes)
while or after you focus, AI Servo AF will take effect to focus on the
subject continuously. (The beeper will continue beeping softly.) As long
as you keep the Area AF frame positioned over the subject while
pressing the shutter button halfway, the focusing will be continuous.
When you want to take the picture, press the shutter button completely.
83
A Full Auto Techniques (Scene Intelligent Auto)
A Live View Shooting
You can shoot while viewing the image on the LCD monitor. This is
called “Live View shooting”. For details, see page 285.
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image on
2 Display
the LCD monitor.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD
monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to end the
Live View shooting.
84
3
Setting the AF and
Drive Modes
The AF points in the viewfinder
are arranged to make AF shooting
suitable for a wide variety of
subjects and scenes.
You can also select the AF operation and drive mode
that best match the shooting conditions and subject.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in these modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
 In the <A> mode, the AF operation and AF area selection
mode are set automatically.
<AF> stands for autofocus. <MF> stands for manual focus.
85
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
You can select the AF operation characteristics to suit the shooting
conditions or subject. In the <A> mode, “AI Focus AF” is set
automatically.
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <AF>.
the <d> <s> <f> <a>
2 Set
<F> mode.
3 Press the <o> button. (9)
the AF operation.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or
through the viewfinder, turn the
<6> dial.
X : One-Shot AF
9 : AI Focus AF
Z : AI Servo AF
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, AF is also possible by
pressing the <p> button.
86
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
One-Shot AF for Still Subjects
Suited for still subjects. When you
press the shutter button halfway, the
camera will focus only once.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
that achieved focus will be displayed,
and the focus indicator <o> in the
viewfinder will also light up.
 With evaluative metering (p.224), the
AF point
Focus indicator
exposure setting will be set at the
same time as focus is achieved.
 While you hold down the shutter button halfway, the focus will be
locked. You can then recompose the shot if desired.
 If focus cannot be achieved, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder
will blink. If this occurs, the picture cannot be taken even if the shutter
button is pressed completely. Recompose the shot and try to focus again
or see “When Autofocus Fails” (p.139).
 If [z1: Beep] is set to [Disable], the beeper will not sound when focus
is achieved.
 After achieving focus with One-Shot AF, you can lock the focus on a
subject and recompose the shot. This is called “focus lock”. This is
convenient when you want to focus on a peripheral subject not covered
by the Area AF frame.
87
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AI Servo AF for Moving Subjects
This AF operation is suited for moving subjects when the focusing
distance keeps changing. While you hold down the shutter button
halfway, the camera will keep focusing on the subject continuously.
 The exposure is set at the moment the picture is taken.
 When the AF area selection mode (p.90) is set to 65-point automatic
selection AF, focus tracking will continue as long as the Area AF
frame covers the subject.
With AI Servo AF, the beeper will not sound even when focus is achieved.
Also, the focus indicator <o> in the viewfinder will not light up.
AI Focus AF for Switching the AF Operation Automatically
AI Focus AF switches the AF operation from One-Shot AF to AI
Servo AF automatically if a still subject starts moving.
 After the subject is focused in One-Shot AF, if the subject starts
moving, the camera will detect the movement, change the AF
operation automatically to AI Servo AF, and start tracking the moving
subject.
When focus is achieved with AI Focus AF with the Servo operation active,
the beeper will continue beeping softly. However, the focus indicator <o> in
the viewfinder will not light up. Note that focus will not be locked in this case.
88
f: Selecting the AF OperationN
AF Operation Indicator
When you press the shutter button
halfway and the camera is focusing with
AF, the <i> icon will appear on the
lower right of the viewfinder.
In the One-Shot AF mode, the icon also
appears if you press the shutter button
halfway after focus is achieved.
The AF operation indicator can be displayed outside the viewfinder’s image
area (p.132).
AF Points Lighting Up in Red
The AF points light up in red in low-light conditions. In the <d>, <s>,
<f>, <a>, or <F> mode, you can set whether to have the AF points
light up in red (p.131).
AF-Assist Beam with the Built-in Flash
Under low-light conditions, when you press the shutter button halfway,
the built-in flash may fire a brief burst of flashes. It illuminates the
subject to help autofocusing.
 In the <A> mode, if [Flash firing] is set to <b>, the built-in flash will
not emit the AF-assist beam.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted with AI Servo AF operation.
 The built-in flash will make a sound when firing continuously. This is
normal and not a malfunction.
 The effective range of the AF-assist beam emitted by the built-in flash is
approx. 4 meters/13.1 feet.
 In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, or <F> mode, press the <I> button
to raise the built-in flash. Then it will fire the AF-assist beam when
necessary.
89
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
The camera has 65 AF points for autofocusing. You can select the AF
area selection mode and AF point(s) suiting the scene or subject.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of
usable AF points and AF point patterns will differ. For details,
see “Lenses and Usable AF Points” on page 100.
AF Area Selection Mode
You can select one of seven AF area selection modes. For the setting
procedure, see page 92.
Single-point Spot AF
(Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing.
Single-point AF
(Manual selection)
Select one AF point to focus.
AF point expansion
(Manual selection )
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and four adjacent AF points <w> (above,
below, on the left, and on the right) are
used to focus.
90
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF point expansion (Manual
selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S>
and the surrounding AF points <w> are
used to focus.
Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of nine zones is used to focus.
Large Zone AF
(Manual selection of zone)
One of three zones (left, center, or right)
is used to focus.
65-point automatic selection
AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is
used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in the <A> mode.
91
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Area Selection Mode
1
Press the <S> button. (9)
the <p> or <B>
2 Operate
button.
 Look through the viewfinder and
operate the <p> or <B> button.
 Each time you tilt <p> to the right,
the AF area selection mode changes.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the AF area selection mode
changes.
 With [24: Select AF area selec. mode], you can limit the selectable
AF area selection modes (p.124).
 If you set [24: AF area selection method] to [S9Main Dial], you
can select the AF area selection mode by pressing the <S> button,
then turning the <6> dial (p.125).
92
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
Selecting the AF Point Manually
You can manually select the AF point or zone.
1
Press the <S> button.
 The AF points will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
 In AF point expansion modes,
adjacent AF points will also be
displayed.
 In the Zone AF mode, the selected
zone will be displayed.
an AF point.
2 Select
 The AF point selection will change in
the direction you tilt <9>. If you
press <9> straight down, the center
AF point (or center zone) will be
selected.
 You can also select a horizontal AF
point by turning the <6> dial and
select a vertical AF point by turning
the <5> dial.
 In the Zone AF mode, turning the
<6> or <5> dial will change the
zone in a looping sequence.
 When [24: Initial AF pt,
AI Servo AF] is set to [Initial
AF pt
selected] (p.127), you can use this method to manually select the AI
Servo’s AF starting position.
 When you press the <S> button, the LCD panel displays the following:
• 65-point automatic selection AF, Zone AF, Large Zone AF:
AF
• Single-point Spot AF, Single-point AF, and AF point expansion: SEL
(Center)/SEL AF (Off-center)
 With [25: Manual AF pt. selec. pattern], you can set either [Stops at
AF area edges] or [Continuous] (p.129).
93
S Selecting the AF Area and AF PointN
AF Point Display Indications
Pressing the <S> button lights up the AF points that are cross-type AF
points for high-precision autofocusing. The blinking AF points are
horizontal-line or vertical-line sensitive. For details, see pages 99-103.
Registering the AF point
You can register a frequently-used AF point to the camera.
When you use the button or lever set with the [83: Custom Controls]
(p.445) menu’s detailed settings screens for [Metering and AF start],
[Switch to registered AF point], [Selected AFpt z Cent/Reg AFpt],
[Direct AF point selection], or [Register/recall shooting func], you
can instantly switch from the current AF point to the registered AF point.
For details on registering the AF point, see page 450.
94
AF Area Selection ModesN
Single-point Spot AF (Manual selection)
For pinpoint focusing over a narrower area than
with single-point AF (manual selection). Select one
AF point < > to focus.
Effective for pinpoint focusing or focusing
overlapping subjects such as an animal in a cage.
Since Single-point Spot AF (manual selection)
covers a very small area, focusing may be difficult
during hand-held shooting or for a moving subject.
Single-point AF (Manual selection)
Select one AF point <S> to be used for focusing.
AF point expansion (Manual selection
)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and adjacent AF points <w>
(above, below, on the left and on the right) are used to focus. Effective
when it is difficult to track a moving subject with just one AF point.
With AI Servo AF, the initial manually-selected AF point <S> must
focus-track the subject first. However, it is superior to Zone AF in
focusing on the target subject.
With One-Shot AF, when focus is achieved with expanded AF points,
the expanded AF points <S> will also be displayed along with the
manually-selected AF point <S>.
95
AF Area Selection ModesN
AF point expansion (Manual selection, surrounding points)
The manually-selected AF point <S> and surrounding AF points <w>
are used to focus. The AF point expansion is larger than with AF point
expansion (manual selection ), so the focusing is executed over a
wider area. Effective when it is difficult to track a moving subject with
just one AF point.
AI Servo AF and One-Shot AF work in the same way as with AF point
expansion (manual selection ) mode (p.95).
Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing. All the AF
points in the selected zone are used for the automatic AF point
selection. It is superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in
achieving focus, and it is effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult than with single-point AF or AF
point expansion.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
96
AF Area Selection ModesN
Large Zone AF (Manual selection of zone)
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones (left, center, and right)
for focusing. Since the focusing area is larger than with Zone AF, it is
superior in focusing on the subject. Since auto selection AF is used, it is
superior to single-point AF or AF point expansion in achieving focus,
making it effective for moving subjects.
However, since it is inclined to focus on the nearest subject, focusing on
a specific target may be more difficult than with single-point AF.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as <S>.
65-point automatic selection AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used to focus. This mode is set
automatically in the <A> mode.
With One-Shot AF, pressing the shutter button
halfway will display the AF point(s) <S> that
achieved focus. If multiple AF points are displayed,
it means they all have achieved focus. This mode
tends to focus on the nearest subject.
With AI Servo AF, you can set the AI Servo AF’s
starting position with [Initial AF pt,
AI Servo
AF] (p.127). As long as the Area AF frame can
track the subject during shooting, focusing will
continue.
The AF point(s) achieving focus is displayed as
<S>.
97
AF Area Selection ModesN
 When AI Servo AF mode is set with 65-point automatic selection AF,
Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), or Zone AF (manual selection
of zone), the active AF point <S> will keep switching to track the
subject. However, under certain shooting conditions (such as when the
subject is small), it may not be able to track the subject. Also, in low
temperatures, the tracking response may become slower.
 With Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), focusing with the
Speedlite’s AF-assist beam may be difficult.
 If a peripheral AF point or a wide-angle lens is used, achieving focus may
be difficult with an EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s AF-assist beam.
In such a case, use an AF point closer to the center.
 When the AF point(s) light up, part or all of the viewfinder may light up in
red. This is a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).
 In low temperatures, the AF point’s display may be difficult to see. This is
a characteristic of AF point display (using liquid crystal).
 With [24: Orientation linked AF point], you can set the AF area
selection mode + AF point (or only the AF point) separately for the
horizontal and vertical orientations (p.125).
 With [24: Selectable AF point], you can change the number of
manually selectable AF points (p.123).
98
AF Sensor
The camera’s AF sensor has 65 AF points. The illustration below shows
the AF sensor pattern corresponding to each AF point. With f/2.8 or
larger maximum aperture lenses, high-precision AF is possible with the
center AF point.
Depending on the lens attached to the camera, the number of
usable AF points and AF pattern will differ. For details, see pages
100-107.
Diagram
Cross-type focusing: f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
Dual cross-type focusing:
f/2.8 right diagonal + f/2.8 left diagonal
f/5.6 vertical + f/5.6 horizontal
The focusing sensor is geared to obtain higher precision
focusing with f/2.8 or larger maximum aperture lenses. A
diagonal cross pattern makes it easier to focus on
subjects difficult for AF. It is provided at the center AF
point.
The focusing sensor is geared for f/5.6 or larger
maximum aperture lenses. Since it has a horizontal
pattern, it can detect vertical lines. It covers all 65 AF
points. The center AF point and the adjacent AF points at
the top and bottom are compatible with f/8 or larger
maximum-aperture lenses.
The focusing sensor is geared for f/5.6 or larger
maximum aperture lenses. Since it has a vertical pattern,
it can detect horizontal lines. It covers all 65 AF points.
The center AF point and the adjacent AF points on the
left and on the right are compatible with f/8 or larger
maximum-aperture lenses.
99
Lenses and Usable AF Points
 Although the camera has 65 AF points, the number of usable AF
points and focusing patterns will differ depending on the lens. The
lenses are thereby classified into seven groups from A to G.
 When using a lens in Groups E to G, fewer AF points will be usable.
 See which group each lens belongs to on pages 104-107. Check
which group the lens in use belongs to.
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points indicated by the
mark
will blink (The / AF points will stay lit). Regarding lighting up or
blinking of the AF points, see page 94.
 Regarding new lenses marketed after the sales start of EOS 7D Mark II
in the second half of 2014, check the Canon website to see which group
they belong to.
 Some lenses may not be available in certain countries or regions.
Group A
Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Dual cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and the focusing
precision is higher than with other AF
points.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
100
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group B
Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
Group C
Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
Group D
Autofocusing with 65 points is possible. All the AF area selection modes
are selectable.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
101
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group E
Autofocusing with only 45 points is possible. (Not possible with all 65
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 65-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to horizontal
lines.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
Group F
Autofocusing with only 45 points is possible. (Not possible with all 65
AF points.) All the AF area selection modes are selectable. During
automatic AF point selection, the outer frame marking the AF area
(Area AF frame) will be different from 65-point automatic selection AF.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF points sensitive to vertical lines
(AF points in the horizontal array at
the top and bottom) or horizontal
lines (AF points in a vertical array on
the left and right).
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
102
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Group G
AF is possible with the center AF point and the adjacent AF points
above, below, on the left, and on the right. Only the following AF area
selection modes are selectable: Single-point AF (manual selection),
Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), and AF point expansion
(manual selection ).
If an Extender is attached to the lens and the maximum aperture is f/8
(between f/5.6 and f/8), AF will be possible.
: Cross-type AF point. Subject
tracking is superior and highprecision focusing is achieved.
: AF point sensitive to vertical lines
(top and bottom AF points adjacent
to the center AF point) or horizontal
lines (left and right AF points
adjacent to the center AF point).
Not manually selectable. It works
only when “AF point expansion
(manual selection )” is selected.
: Disabled AF points (not displayed).
 If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/5.6 (maximum aperture
number is between f/5.6 and f/8), focus may not be achieved with AF
when shooting low-contrast or low-light subjects.
 When Extender EF2x is attached to the EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
lens, AF is not possible.
 If the maximum aperture is smaller than f/8 (maximum aperture number
exceeds f/8), AF is not possible during viewfinder shooting.
103
Lenses and Usable AF Points
Lens Group Designations
EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM
EF-S60mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S10-22mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF-S15-85mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S17-55mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF-S17-85mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 III
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-200mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM
EF14mm f/2.8L USM
EF14mm f/2.8L II USM
EF15mm f/2.8 Fisheye
EF20mm f/2.8 USM
EF24mm f/1.4L USM
EF24mm f/1.4L II USM
EF24mm f/2.8
EF24mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF28mm f/1.8 USM
EF28mm f/2.8
EF28mm f/2.8 IS USM
EF35mm f/1.4L USM
EF35mm f/1.4L II USM
EF35mm f/2
EF35mm f/2 IS USM
EF40mm f/2.8 STM
EF50mm f/1.0L USM
EF50mm f/1.2L USM
EF50mm f/1.4 USM
EF50mm f/1.8
EF50mm f/1.8 II
EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
104
A
B
E
C
B
A
B
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
C
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
B
EF50mm f/2.5 Compact Macro
+ LIFE SIZE Converter
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF85mm f/1.8 USM
EF100mm f/2 USM
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro
EF100mm f/2.8 Macro USM
EF100mm f/2.8L Macro IS USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
EF135mm f/2L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF135mm f/2L USM + Extender EF2x
EF135mm f/2.8 (Softfocus)
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
EF180mm f/3.5L Macro USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/1.8L USM + Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/2L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
B
A
A
A
A
B
E
B
A
A
B
A
B
F
A
A*
B*
A
A
B
A
B
B
A
B
B
A
B*
B*
A
B
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF300mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/4L USM
EF300mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF300mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF400mm f/4 DO IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
B
A
B
B
B
B
G (f/8)
B
B
G (f/8)
A
B*
B*
A
B*
B*
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
G (f/8)
B
B
G (f/8)
B
EF400mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L USM + Extender EF2x
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
EF800mm f/5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF8-15mm f/4L Fisheye USM
EF11-24mm f/4L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L II USM
EF16-35mm f/2.8L III USM
EF16-35mm f/4L IS USM
EF17-35mm f/2.8L USM
EF17-40mm f/4L USM
EF20-35mm f/2.8L
EF20-35mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF22-55mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF24-70mm f/2.8L USM
G (f/8)
B
B
G (f/8)
B
B
G (f/8)
B
G (f/8)*
B
B*
G (f/8)*
B
B
G (f/8)
B
B
G (f/8)
E
G (f/8)
E
G (f/8)*
B
C
A
A
A
B
A
B
A
C
F
A
105
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF24-70mm f/2.8L II USM
EF24-70mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-85mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS USM
EF24-105mm f/4L IS II USM
EF28-70mm f/2.8L USM
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF28-70mm f/3.5-4.5 II
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 II USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 III USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 IV USM
EF28-80mm f/3.5-5.6 V USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF28-90mm f/4-5.6 III
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF28-105mm f/3.5-4.5 II USM
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6
EF28-105mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6
EF28-200mm f/3.5-5.6 USM
EF28-300mm f/3.5-5.6L IS USM
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-70mm f/3.5-4.5A
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 PZ
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 II
EF35-80mm f/4-5.6 III
EF35-105mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6
EF35-105mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF35-135mm f/3.5-4.5
EF35-135mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF35-350mm f/3.5-5.6L USM
EF38-76mm f/4.5-5.6
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5
EF50-200mm f/3.5-4.5L
106
A
B
D
B
B
B
A
E
E
B
E
E
E
E
E
E
E
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
F
F
B
B
B
B
E
E
F
E
F
E
F
B
G
G
B
C
D
E
B
B
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF55-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/2.8L IS II USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/4L USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF70-200mm f/4L IS USM
+ Extender EF2x
EF70-210mm f/3.5-4.5 USM
EF70-210mm f/4
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6L IS USM
EF70-300mm f/4.5-5.6 DO IS USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 II USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 III USM
EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM
EF80-200mm f/2.8L
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF80-200mm f/4.5-5.6 II
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6
EF90-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
D
D
A
B*
B*
A
B
B
A
B
B
B
B
G (f/8)
B
B
G (f/8)
B
B
B
B
B
B
B
C
B
B
B
B
B
A
D
E
E
D
D
Lenses and Usable AF Points
EF100-200mm f/4.5A
EF100-300mm f/4.5-5.6 USM
EF100-300mm f/5.6
EF100-300mm f/5.6L
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS II USM
+ Extender EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x: With built-in Ext. 1.4x + Extender
EF1.4x
EF200-400mm f/4L IS USM Extender
1.4x + Extender EF2x
TS-E17mm f/4L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L
TS-E24mm f/3.5L II
TS-E45mm f/2.8
TS-E90mm f/2.8
B
C
B
B
B
G (f/8)
B
G (F8)
B
B
B
G (f/8)
G (f/8)
B
B
B
A
A
When using a lens and an Extender in the combination marked with *,
precise focus may not be achieved with AF. Refer to the instruction manual
of the lens or Extender used.
 Both “Extender EF1.4x” and “Extender EF2x” apply to all the I/II/III
models (under this grouping).
 If you use a TS-E lens, manual focusing will be required. The lens group
designation of TS-E lenses applies only when you do not use tilt or shift
function.
107
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
You can easily fine-tune AI Servo AF to suit a particular subject or
scene just by selecting an option from case 1 to case 6. This feature is
called the “AF Configuration Tool.”
1 Select the [21] tab.
a case.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select a case
icon, then press <0>.
 The selected case will be set. The
selected case is indicated in blue.
Case 1 to 6
As explained on pages 113 to 115, case 1 to 6 are six setting
combinations of “Tracking sensitivity”, “Acceleration/deceleration
tracking”, and “AF point auto switching”. Refer to the table below to
select the case applicable to the subject or scene.
Case
Icon
Description
Applicable Subjects
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose setting For any moving subject.
109
Case 2
Continue to track subjects,
ignoring possible obstacles
Tennis players, butterfly
swimmers, freestyle
skiers, etc.
109
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects
suddenly entering AF points
Starting line of a bicycle
race, alpine downhill
skiers, etc.
110
Case 4
For subjects that accelerate or Soccer, motor sports,
decelerate quickly
basketball, etc.
110
Case 5
For erratic subjects moving
quickly in any direction
111
Case 6
For subjects that change speed
Rhythm gymnastics, etc.
and move erratically
108
Figure skaters, etc.
112
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 1: Versatile multi purpose setting
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Standard setting suited for any moving
subject. Works with many subjects and
scenes.
Select [Case 2] to [Case 6] for the
following: When an obstacle cuts across
the AF points or the subject tends to
stray from the AF points, when you want
to focus on a subject appearing
suddenly, when the speed of a moving
subject changes suddenly, or when the
subject dramatically moves horizontally
or vertically.
Case 2: Continue to track subjects, ignoring possible obstacles
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Locked on: -1
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: 0
The camera will try to continue focusing
on the subject even if an obstacle enters
the AF points or if the subject strays from
the AF points. Effective when there may
be an obstacle blocking the subject or
when you do not want to focus on the
background.
If an obstacle gets in the way or if the subject moves away from the AF
points for a prolonged period and the default setting is unable to track the
target subject, setting [Tracking sensitivity] to [-2] may give better results
(p.113).
109
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 3: Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering AF points
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: Responsive: +1
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
Once an AF point starts tracking the
subject, this setting enables the camera
to consecutively focus on subjects at
different distances. If a new subject
appears in front of the target subject, the
camera will start focusing on the new
subject. Also effective when you want to
always focus on the closest subject.
If you want to quickly focus on a subject appearing suddenly, setting
[Tracking sensitivity] to [+2] may give better results (p.113).
Case 4: For subjects that accelerate or decelerate quickly
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly.
Effective for subjects having sudden
movements, sudden acceleration,
sudden deceleration, or sudden stops.
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: 0
If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in speed,
setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results (p.114).
110
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 5: For erratic subjects moving quickly in any direction
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: 0
• AF pt auto switching: +1
Even if the target subject moves
dramatically up, down, left, or right, the
AF point will switch automatically to
focus-track the subject. Effective for
shooting subjects that move dramatically
up, down, left, or right.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF
(manual selection of zone), or 65-point
automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual
selection) or Single-point AF (manual
selection) mode, the tracking action will
be the same as with Case 1.
If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right, setting
[AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.115).
111
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Case 6: For subjects that change speed and move erratically
Default settings
• Tracking sensitivity: 0
• Accel./decel. tracking: +1
• AF pt auto switching: +1
Geared for tracking moving subjects
whose speed can change dramatically
and suddenly. Also, if the target subject
moves dramatically up, down, left or right
and it is difficult to focus, the AF point
switches automatically to track the
subject.
It is recommended to use this setting
with the following modes; AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF
(manual selection of zone), or 65-point
automatic selection AF.
With Single-point Spot AF (manual
selection) or Single-point AF (manual
selection) mode, the tracking action will
be the same as with Case 4.
 If the subject is in motion, and prone to sudden, dramatic changes in
speed, setting [Accel./decel. tracking] to [+2] may give better results
(p.114).
 If the subject moves even more dramatically up, down, left, or right,
setting [AF pt auto switching] to [+2] may give better results (p.115).
112
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Parameters
 Tracking sensitivity
Sets the subject-tracking sensitivity
during AI Servo AF when an obstacle
enters the AF points or when the AF
points stray from the subject.
0
Default setting. Suitable for moving subjects in general.
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
The camera will try to continue focusing on the subject even if an
obstacle enters the AF points or if the subject strays from the AF
points. The -2 setting makes the camera track the target subject
longer than with the -1 setting.
However, if the camera focuses on a wrong subject, it may take
slightly longer to switch and focus on the target subject.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
The camera can focus consecutively on subjects at different
distances that are covered by the AF points. Also effective when you
want to always focus on the closest subject. The +2 setting is more
responsive when focusing on the next subject than +1.
However, the camera will be more prone to focus on the wrong
subject.
[Tracking sensitivity] is the feature named [AI Servo tracking sensitivity]
in the EOS-1D Mark III/IV, EOS-1Ds Mark III, and EOS 7D.
113
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
 Acceleration/deceleration tracking
This sets the tracking sensitivity for
moving subjects whose speed can
suddenly change dramatically by starting
or stopping suddenly, etc.
0
Suited for subjects that move at a steady speed (minimal change in
moving speed).
+2 / +1
Effective for subjects having sudden movements, sudden
acceleration/deceleration, or sudden stops. Even if the moving
subject’s speed suddenly changes dramatically, the camera
continues to focus on the target subject. For example, for an
approaching subject, the camera becomes less prone to focus
behind it to avoid subject blur. For a subject stopping suddenly, the
camera becomes less prone to focus in front of it. Setting +2 can
track dramatic changes in the moving subject’s speed better than
with +1.
However, since the camera will be sensitive even to the slight
movements of the subject, the focusing may momentarily become
unstable.
114
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
 AF point auto switching
This sets the switching sensitivity of the
AF points as they track the subject
moving dramatically up, down, left, or
right.
This setting takes effect when the AF
area selection mode is set to AF point
expansion (manual selection
), AF
point expansion (manual selection,
surrounding points), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF
(manual selection of zone), or 65-point
automatic selection AF.
0
Standard setting for gradual AF point switching.
+2 / +1
Even if the target subject moves dramatically up, down, left, or right
and moves away from the AF point, the camera switches its focus to
neighboring AF points to continue focusing on the subject. The
camera switches to the AF point deemed most likely to focus on the
subject based on the subject’s continual movement, contrast, etc.
Setting +2 makes the camera more prone to switch the AF point
than with +1.
However, with a wide-angle lens having a wide depth of field or if the
subject is too small in the frame, the camera may focus with the
wrong AF point.
115
3 Selecting AI Servo AF CharacteristicsN
Changing Cases’ Parameter Settings
You can manually adjust each case’s three parameters: 1. Tracking
sensitivity, 2. Acceleration/deceleration tracking, and 3. AF point auto
switching.
1
Select a case.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the icon
of the case you want to adjust.
the <c> button.
2 Press
 The selected parameter will have a
purple frame.
the parameter to adjust.
3 Select
 Select the parameter to adjust, then
press <0>.
 When Tracking sensitivity is selected,
the setting screen will appear.
the adjustment.
4 Make
 Adjust the setting, then press <0>.
 The adjustment is saved.
 The default setting is indicated by the
light gray [C] mark.
 To return to the screen in step 1,
press the <c> button.
 In step 2, if you press the <c> button and then press the <L>
button, you can revert the 1, 2 and 3 parameter settings above for each
case.
 You can also register the 1, 2, and 3 parameter settings to My Menu
(p.459). Doing so will change the selected case’s settings.
 When shooting with a case whose parameters you adjusted, select the
adjusted case and then take the picture.
116
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
With the [22] to [25] menu tabs, you
can set the AF functions to suit your
shooting style or subject.
22: AI Servo
AI Servo 1st image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
shutter release.
: Release priority
Pressing the shutter button takes the
picture immediately even if focus has
not been achieved. It is effective when
you want to give priority to capturing
the image rather than achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Pressing the shutter button does not take the picture until focus is
achieved. Effective when you want to achieve focus before capturing
the image.
117
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AI Servo 2nd image priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
during continuous shooting after the first shot with AI Servo AF.
: Equal priority
Equal priority is given to focusing and
continuous shooting speed. In low
light or with low-contrast subjects,
shooting speed may slow down.
: Shooting speed priority
Priority is given to the continuous shooting speed instead of
achieving focus.
: Focus priority
Priority is given to achieving focus instead of the continuous
shooting speed. The picture will not be taken until focus is achieved.
Under shooting conditions which activate anti-flicker shooting (p.185), even
if [Shooting speed priority] is set, the continuous shooting speed may
become slightly slower or the shooting interval may become irregular.
118
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
23: One Shot
Lens electronic MF
With the following USM and STM lenses equipped with an electronic
focusing ring, you can set whether to use electronic manual focusing.
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM EF300mm f/2.8L USM
EF50mm f/1.0 L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L USM
EF400mm f/2.8L II USM
EF85mm f/1.2L USM
EF85mm f/1.2L II USM
EF500mm f/4.5L USM
EF600mm f/4L USM
EF200mm f/1.8L USM
EF1200mm f/5.6L USM
EF28-80mm f/2.8-4L USM
EF70-300mm f/4-5.6 IS II USM
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF50mm f/1.8 STM
EF-S24mm f/2.8 STM
EF-S10-18mm f/4.5-5.6 IS STM EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS STM EF24-105mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM
EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM EF40mm f/2.8 STM
: Enable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, if you keep
pressing the shutter button halfway,
you can adjust the focus manually.
: Disable after One-Shot AF
After AF operates, manual focusing
adjustment is disabled.
OFF: Disable in AF mode
When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, manual focusing
is disabled.
119
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF-assist beam firing
Enables or disables the AF-assist beam from the built-in flash or EOSdedicated external Speedlite.
ON: Enable
The AF-assist beam is emitted when
necessary.
OFF: Disable
The AF-assist beam is not emitted.
Prevents the AF-assist beam from
disturbing others.
1: Enable external flash only
The AF-assist beam will be emitted when necessary only if an
external Speedlite is used. The camera’s built-in flash will not fire the
AF-assist beam.
IR: IR AF assist beam only
When an external Speedlite is attached, only infrared AF-assist
beam will be emitted. This prevents the AF-assist light from firing as
a burst of small flashes.
With an EX-series Speedlite equipped with an LED light, the LED
light will not automatically turn on for AF-assist.
If an external Speedlite’s [AF-assist beam firing] Custom Function is set to
[Disabled], the Speedlite will not emit the AF-assist beam regardless of this
setting.
120
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
One-Shot AF release priority
You can set the AF operation characteristics and shutter-release timing
for One-Shot AF.
: Focus priority
The picture will not be taken until
focus is achieved. Effective when you
want to achieve focus before
capturing the shot.
: Release priority
Priority is given to taking the picture
instead of achieving focus. This gives
priority to getting the shot rather than
achieving correct focus.
Note that the picture will be taken
even if focus has not been
achieved.
121
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
24
Lens drive when AF impossible
If focus cannot be achieved with autofocus, you can have the camera
keep searching for the correct focus or have it stop searching.
ON: Continue focus search
If focus cannot be achieved with
autofocus, the lens is driven to search
for the correct focus.
OFF: Stop focus search
If autofocus starts and the focus is far
off or if focus cannot be achieved, the
lens drive stops. This prevents the
lens from becoming grossly out of
focus due to focus searching.
Super telephoto lenses, etc., with a wide focusing drive range can become
grossly out of focus during focus search, taking more time to achieve focus
next time. Setting [Stop focus search] is recommended.
122
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Selectable AF point
You can change the number of manually selectable AF points. If 65point automatic selection AF is set, the Area AF frame (entire AF area)
will be used for AF regardless of the setting below.
: 65 points
All 65 AF points will be manually
selectable.
: 21 points
Twenty-one major AF points will be
manually selectable.
: 9 points
Nine major AF points will be manually
selectable.
With a lens from Groups E to G (p.102-103), the number of manually
selectable AF points will be fewer.
 Even with settings other than [65 points], AF point expansion (manual
selection ), AF point expansion (manual selection, surrounding points),
Zone AF (manual selection of zone) and Large Zone AF (manual
selection of zone) are still possible.
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points which are not manually
selectable will not be displayed in the viewfinder.
123
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Select AF area selection mode
You can limit the selectable AF area selection modes to suit your
shooting preferences. Select the desired selection mode and press
<0> to append a checkmark <X>. Then select [OK] to register the
setting.
: Manual select.:Spot AF
For pinpoint focusing with a narrower
area than single-point AF (manual
selection).
: Manual selection:1 pt AF
One of the AF points set by
[Selectable AF point] setting can be
selected.
: Expand AF area:
The camera will focus with the manually-selected AF point and the
adjacent AF points (above, below, on the left, and on the right).
: Expand AF area:Surround
The camera will focus with the manually-selected AF point and the
surrounding AF points.
: Manual select.:Zone AF
The AF area is divided into nine focusing zones for focusing.
: Manual select.:Large Zone AF
The AF area is divided into three focusing zones for focusing.
: Auto selection:65 pt AF
The Area AF frame (entire AF area) is used for focusing.
 The <X> mark cannot be deleted from [Manual selection:1 pt AF].
 If the attached lens belongs to group G (p.103), you can only select
[Manual select.:Spot AF], [Manual selection:1 pt AF], and [Expand
AF area: ].
124
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF area selection method
You can set the method for changing the AF area selection mode.
p/
: S 9 M-Fn button
After you press the <S> button,
operating the <p> or <B> button
changes the AF area selection mode.
p/
: S 9 Main Dial
After you press the <S> button,
operating the <p> or <6> dial
changes the AF area selection mode.
When [S 9 Main Dial] is set, use the <9> to move the AF point
horizontally.
Orientation linked AF point
You can set the AF point or the AF area selection mode + AF point
separately for vertical shooting and horizontal shooting.
: Same for both vert/horiz
The same AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or
zone) are used for both vertical
shooting and horizontal shooting.
125
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
: Separate AF pts: Area+pt
The AF area selection mode and AF point (or zone) can be set
separately for each camera orientation (1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with
the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical with the camera grip at the
bottom).
When you manually select the AF area selection mode and AF point (or
zone) for each of the three camera orientations, they will be set for the
respective orientation. Whenever you change the camera orientation
during shooting, the camera will switch to the AF area selection mode
and manually-selected AF point (or zone) set for that orientation.
: Separate AF pts: Pt only
The AF point can be set separately for each camera orientation
(1. Horizontal, 2. Vertical with the camera grip at the top, 3. Vertical
with the camera grip at the bottom). While using the same AF area
selection mode, the AF point will switch automatically for the
respective camera orientation.
When you manually select the AF point for each of the three camera
orientations, it will be recorded for the respective orientation. During
shooting, the manually-selected AF point will switch to match the
respective camera orientation. Even if you change the AF area
selection mode to Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround, the AF point set
for the respective orientation will be retained.
If you change the AF area selection mode to Zone AF (manual
selection of zone) or Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), the
zone will switch to match the respective camera orientation.
 If you clear the camera settings to their defaults (p.70), the setting will be
[Same for both vert/horiz]. Also, your settings for the three camera
orientations (1, 2 and 3) will be cleared and all three will revert to Singlepoint AF (Manual selection) with the center AF point selected.
 If you set this and later attach a lens from a different AF group (p.100103, particularly Group G), the setting may be cleared.
126
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Initial AF Point,
AI Servo AF
You can set the AI Servo AF’s starting AF point for when the AF area
selection mode is set to Auto selection: 65 pt AF.
: Initial
AF pt selected
AI Servo AF will start with the
manually-selected AF point when the
AF operation is set to AI Servo AF
and the AF area selection mode is set
to Auto selection: 65 pt AF.
: Manual
AF pt
If you switch from Manual select.:Spot AF, Manual selection:1 pt AF,
Expand AF area: , or Expand AF area:Surround to Auto selection:
65 pt AF, AI Servo AF will start with the AF point that was manually
selected before the switch. Convenient if you want AI Servo AF to
start with the AF point which was selected before the AF area
selection mode was switched to Auto selection: 65 pt AF.
After you set the AF area selection mode to Auto selection: 65 pt AF
with the [83: Custom Controls] menu’s [Metering and AF start]
(p.450), [Switch to registered AF func.] (p.452), or [Register/
recall shooting func] (p.457), you can press the assigned button
during Manual select: Spot AF, Manual selection: 1 pt AF, Expand
AF area: , or Expand AF area: Surround to switch to AI Servo AF
using Auto selection: 65 pt AF instead of the AF point used
immediately before.
AUTO: Auto
The AF point which AI Servo AF starts with is set automatically to
suit the shooting conditions.
When [Manual
AF pt] is set, AI Servo AF will start with the zone
that corresponds to the manually selected AF point, even if you switch AF
area selection mode to Zone AF (manual selection of zone) or Large Zone
AF (manual selection of zone).
127
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
EOS iTR* AF executes autofocus by recognizing faces and subject
colors. EOS iTR AF works when the AF area selection mode is set to
Zone AF (manual selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection
of zone), or 65-point automatic selection AF.
* intelligent Tracking and Recognition: The metering sensor recognizes the
subject and the AF points track it.
ON: Enable
The AF point is automatically
selected based not only on AF
information, but also faces and other
details.
In AI Servo AF mode, the camera remembers the color at the position
it focused on first, then continues to track and focus the subject by
switching AF points to track that color. This makes it easier to keep
track of the subject than when only AF information is available.
In One-Shot AF mode, EOS iTR AF makes focusing on people
easier, so you can prioritize composition.
OFF: Disable
AF points are automatically selected based only on AF information.
(The AF will not use information based on faces, subject colors and
other details.)
 If [Enable] is set, the camera will take longer to focus than when
[Disable] is set.
 When EOS iTR AF is operating, maximum continuous shooting speed
with <o> set will be approx. 9.5 shots/sec. Also, under low-light
conditions, the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
 Even if you set [Enable], expected result may not be obtained depending
on the shooting conditions and subject.
 Under light so low that the flash emits the AF-assist beam automatically,
AF points are selected automatically based only on AF information.
 Face detection may not work if the face is small or under low-light
conditions.
128
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
25
Manual AF point selection pattern
During manual AF point selection, the selection can either stop at the
outer edge or it can cycle around to the opposite side. This function
works in AF area selection modes other than Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone), and 65point automatic selection AF (works with AI Servo AF).
: Stops at AF area edges
Convenient if you often use an AF
point at the periphery.
: Continuous
Instead of stopping at the outer edge,
the selection of AF point continues to
the opposite side.
129
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF point display during focus
You can set whether or not to display the AF point(s) in the following
cases: 1. When selecting the AF point(s), 2. When the camera is ready
to shoot (before AF operation), 3. During AF operation, and 4. When
focus is achieved.
: Selected (constant)
The selected AF point(s) is always
displayed.
: All (constant)
All AF points are always displayed.
: Selected (pre-AF, focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1, 2, and 4.
: Selected (focused)
The selected AF point(s) is displayed for 1 and 4 and for when AF
starts.
OFF: Disable display
For 2, 3, and 4, the selected AF point(s) will not be displayed.
130
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
VF display illumination
You can set whether the AF points in the viewfinder are to light up in red
when focus is achieved.
AUTO: Auto
The AF points automatically light up
in red under low light.
ON: Enable
The AF points light up in red
regardless of the ambient light level.
OFF: Disable
The AF points do not light up in red.
With [Auto] or [Enable] set, you can set whether the AF point is to be
light up in red (blink) when you press the <Q> button during AI Servo
AF.
OFF: Non illuminated
The AF point will not light up during AI
Servo AF.
ON: Illuminated
AF points used for focusing light up in
red during AI Servo AF. They are also
illuminated during continuous
shooting.
This will not work if [VF display
illumination] is set to [Disable].
 When you press the <S> button, the AF points will light up in red
regardless of this setting.
 The electronic level and grid in the viewfinder and the information set
with [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.77) will also light up in red.
131
3 Customizing AF FunctionsN
AF status in viewfinder
The AF status icon indicating AF operation can be displayed in the
viewfinder’s field of view or outside the field of view.
: Show in field of view
The AF status icon <i> is
displayed in the lower right of the
viewfinder’s field of view.
: Show outside view
The <e> icon is displayed below
the focus indicator <o> outside the
viewfinder’s field of view.
The AF status icon is displayed while you press the shutter button halfway
after focus is achieved and while you hold down the <p> button.
AF Microadjustment
You can make fine adjustments for the AF’s point of focus. For details,
see “Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of Focus” on the next page.
132
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Fine adjustment of the AF’s point of focus is possible for viewfinder
shooting. This is called “AF Microadjustment”. Before making the
adjustment, read “Cautions for AF Microadjustment” on page 138.
Normally, this adjustment is not required. Perform this
adjustment only if necessary. Note that performing this
adjustment may prevent accurate focusing from being
achieved.
Adjust All by Same Amount
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until appropriate adjustment is made. During AF,
regardless of the lens used, the point of focus will always be shifted by
the adjustment amount.
1
Select [AF Microadjustment].
 Under the [25] tab, select [AF
Microadjustment], then press <0>.
2 Select [All by same amount].
the <B> button.
3 Press
 The [All by same amount] screen
will appear.
133
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
the adjustment.
4 Make
 Set the adjustment amount. The
adjustable range is ±20 steps.
 Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
 Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
 After making the adjustment, press
<0>.
 Select [All by same amount], then
press <0>.
the result of the
5 Check
adjustment.
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.354) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
If [All by same amount] is selected, separate AF adjustment will not be
possible for the wide-angle and telephoto ends of zoom lenses.
134
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Adjust by Lens
You can make the adjustment for each lens and register the adjustment
in the camera. You can register the adjustment for up to 40 lenses.
When you autofocus with a lens whose adjustment is registered, the
point of focus will always be shifted by the adjustment amount.
Set the adjustment manually by adjusting, shooting, and checking the
result. Repeat this until the desired adjustment is made. If you use a zoom
lens, make the adjustment for the wide-angle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
1
Select [Adjust by lens].
the <B> button.
2 Press
 The [Adjust by lens] screen will
appear.
and change the lens
3 Check
information.
Registered number
Check the lens information.
 Press the <B> button.
 The screen will show the lens name
and a 10-digit serial number. When
the serial number is displayed, select
[OK] and go to step 4.
 If the lens’s serial number cannot be
confirmed, “0000000000” will be
displayed. In this case, enter the
number by following the instructions
on the next page.
 Regarding the asterisk “ * ” displayed
in front of some lens serial numbers,
see the next page.
135
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Entering the Serial Number
 Select the digit to be entered, then
press <0> so that <r> appears.
 Enter the number, then press <0>.
 After entering all the digits, select
[OK].
Lens Serial Number
 In step 3, if “ * ” appears in front of the 10-digit lens serial
number, you can register only one unit of the same lens model.
Even if you enter the serial number, “ * ” will remain displayed.
 The lens serial number on the lens may differ from the serial
number displayed on the screen in step 3. This is not a
malfunction.
 If the lens serial number includes letters, enter only the numbers.
 If the lens serial number is eleven digits or longer, enter only the last
ten digits.
 The location of the serial number varies depending on the lens.
 Some lenses may not have a serial number inscribed. To register a
lens that has no serial number inscribed, enter any serial number.
 If [Adjust by lens] is selected and an Extender is used, the adjustment
will be registered for the lens and Extender combination.
 If 40 lenses have already been registered, a message will appear. After
you select a lens whose registration is to be erased (overwritten), you
can register another lens.
136
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
Single focal length lens
the adjustment.
4 Make
 For a zoom lens, select the wide-angle

Zoom lens





(W) or telephoto (T) end. Pressing
<0> will turn off the purple frame and
make the adjustment possible.
Set the adjustment amount, then
press <0>. The adjustable range is
±20 steps.
Setting it toward “-: ” will shift the
point of focus in front of the standard
point of focus.
Setting it toward “+: ” will shift the
point of focus to the rear of the
standard point of focus.
For a zoom lens, repeat this
procedure and adjust it for the wideangle (W) and telephoto (T) ends.
After completing the adjustment,
press the <M> button to return to
the screen in step 1.
Select [Adjust by lens], then press
<0>.
the result of the adjustment.
5 Check
 Take a picture and play back the
image (p.354) to check the
adjustment result.
 If the shooting result comes out with
focus in front of the targeted point,
adjust toward the “+: ” side. If it
comes out with focus behind the
targeted point, adjust toward the
“-: ” side.
 If necessary, repeat the adjustment.
137
3 Fine Adjustment of AF’s Point of FocusN
When shooting with the intermediate range (focal length) of a zoom lens, the
AF’s point of focus is corrected automatically relative to the adjustments
made for the wide-angle and telephoto ends. Even if only the wide-angle or
telephoto end is adjusted, a correction will be made automatically for the
intermediate range.
Clearing All AF Microadjustments
When [ Clear all] appears at the bottom of the screen, pressing the
<L> button will clear all the adjustments made for [All by same
amount] and [Adjust by lens].
Cautions for AF Microadjustment
 The AF’s point of focus will vary slightly depending on the subject
conditions, brightness, zoom position, and other shooting conditions.
Therefore, even if you perform AF Microadjustment, focus may still not
be achieved at the suitable position.
 The adjustment amount of one stop varies depending on the maximum
aperture of the lens. Keep adjusting, shooting, and checking the focus
repeatedly to adjust the AF’s point of focus.
 The adjustment will not be applied to AF during Live View shooting or
movie shooting.
 The adjustments will be retained even if you clear all the camera settings
(p.70). However, the setting itself will be [Disable].
Notes for AF Microadjustment
 It is best to make the adjustment at the actual location where you will
shoot. This will make the adjustment more precise.
 Using a tripod when making the adjustment is recommended.
 For making adjustments, shooting at the 73 image-recording quality is
recommended.
138
When Autofocus Fails
Autofocus can fail to achieve focus (viewfinder’s focus indicator <o>
blinks) with certain subjects such as the following:
Subjects Difficult to Focus
 Subjects with very low contrast
(Example: Blue skies, solid-color flat surfaces, etc.)
 Subjects in very low light
 Strongly backlit or reflective subjects
(Example: Cars with highly reflective bodies, etc.)
 Near and distant subjects framed close to an AF point
(Example: Animals in cages, etc.)
 Subjects such as dots of light framed close to an AF point
(Example: Night scenes, etc.)
 Repetitive patterns
(Example: Skyscraper windows, computer keyboards, etc.)
In such cases, focus by doing either of the following:
(1) With One-Shot AF, focus on an object at the same distance as the
subject and lock the focus, then recompose the shot (p.83).
(2) Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and focus manually
(p.140).
 Depending on the subject, focus may be achieved by slightly
recomposing the shot and performing AF operation again.
 Conditions that make focusing difficult with AF during Live View shooting
or movie shooting are listed on page 306.
139
When Autofocus Fails
MF: Manual Focus
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 <4 L> will be displayed on the
LCD panel.
Focusing ring
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Focus by turning the lens’s focusing
ring until the subject looks sharp in
the viewfinder.
 If you press the shutter button halfway while focusing manually, the focus
indicator <o> will light up when focus is achieved.
 With 65-point automatic selection AF, when the center AF point achieves
focus, the focus indicator <o> will light up.
140
o Selecting the Drive Mode
Single and continuous drive modes are provided. You can select the
drive mode suiting the scene or subject.
1
Press the <o> button. (9)
the drive mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or
viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
u : Single shooting
When you press the shutter button completely, only one shot will
be taken.
o: High-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, the camera
will shoot continuously at a maximum of approx. 10.0 shots/
sec.
i : Low-speed continuous shooting
While you hold down the shutter button completely, shots will be
taken at a speed of approx. 3.0 shots/sec.
B : Silent single shooting
Single shooting with less shooting sound than <u> during
viewfinder shooting.
M : Silent continuous shooting
Continuous shooting with less shooting sound than <i> during
viewfinder shooting. The continuous shooting speed will be
approx. 4.0 shots/sec.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, shooting will not be silent
even if <B> or <M> is set.
141
o Selecting the Drive Mode
Q : 10-sec. self-timer/remote control
k: 2-sec. self-timer/remote control
For self-timer shooting, see page 143. For remote control
shooting, see page 248.
 When EOS iTR AF is operating (p.128), maximum continuous shooting
speed with <o> will be approx. 9.5 shots/sec. Also, under low-light
conditions, the continuous shooting speed may decrease.
 If <B> or <M> is set, the time lag from when you press the shutter
button completely until the picture is shot will be slightly longer than
standard.
 If you perform high-speed continuous shooting in low temperatures when
the remaining battery capacity is low, the continuous shooting speed will
be slow.
 In AI Servo AF operation, the continuous shooting speed may become
slower depending on the subject and the lens used.
 o: The maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 10 shots/sec.
is attained under the following conditions*: 1/1000 sec. or faster shutter
speed, maximum aperture (varies depending on the lens), EOS iTR AF:
OFF, and Anti-flicker shooting: Disable. The continuous shooting speed
may decrease depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject
conditions, brightness, lens, flash use, temperature, remaining battery
capacity, etc.
* With the AF mode set to One-Shot AF and the Image Stabilizer turned off when
using the following lenses: EF300mm f/4L IS USM, EF28-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS
USM, EF75-300mm f/4-5.6 IS USM, EF100-400mm f/4.5-5.6L IS USM.
 If the [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] menu’s [Record func.] is set
to [Rec. separately] (p.146) and the recording quality setting for the CF
card [f] and SD card [g] is different, the maximum burst (p.151) will
decrease. When internal memory becomes full during continuous
shooting, the continuous shooting speed may drop during shooting since
shooting will be temporally disabled (p.153).
By setting [82: Continuous shooting speed] (p.439), you can manually
set the continuous shooting speed.
142
j Using the Self-timer
Use the self-timer when you want to be in the picture.
1 Press the <o> button. (9)
the self-timer.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or
viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
Q : 10-sec. self-timer
k : 2-sec. self-timer
the picture.
3 Take
 Look through the viewfinder, focus on
the subject, then press the shutter
button completely.
 You can check the self-timer
operation with the self-timer lamp,
beeper, and countdown display (in
seconds) on the LCD panel.
 Two seconds before the picture is
taken, the self-timer lamp will light up
and the beeper will sound faster.
If you do not look through the viewfinder when you press the shutter button,
attach the eyepiece cover (p.247). If stray light enters the viewfinder when
the picture is taken, it may throw off the exposure.
 The <k> enables you to shoot while not touching the camera
mounted on a tripod. This prevents camera shake while you shoot still
lifes or long exposures.
 After taking self-timer shots, playing back the image (p.354) to check
focus and exposure is recommended.
 When using the self-timer to shoot yourself, use focus lock (p.83) on an
object at the same distance as where you will stand.
 To cancel the self-timer after it starts, press the <o> button.
143
144
4
Image Settings
This chapter explains image-related function settings:
Image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, white
balance, Auto Lighting Optimizer, noise reduction,
highlight tone priority, lens aberration correction, antiflicker shooting, and other functions.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in these modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
145
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
If either a CF card or SD card is already inserted in the camera, you
can start recording captured images. When only one card is
inserted, you do not have to follow the procedures described on
pages 146-148.
If you insert both a CF card and SD card, you can select the recording
method and select which card to use for recording and playing back
images.
[f] indicates the CF card, and [g] the SD card.
Recording Method with Two Cards Inserted
1
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Record func.].
the recording method.
3 Select
 Select the recording method, then
press <0>.
146
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
 Standard
Images will be recorded to the card selected with [Record/play].
 Auto switch card
Same as with the [Standard] setting, but if the card becomes full,
the camera will automatically switch to the other card to record
images. When the card is automatically switched, a new folder will
be created.
 Rec. separately
You can set the image-recording quality for each card (p.149). Each
image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards at the imagerecording quality you set. You can freely set the image-recording
quality, such as to 73 and 1, or c and 41.
 Rec. to multiple
Each image is recorded to both the CF and SD cards simultaneously
at the same image size. You can also select RAW+JPEG.
 If [Rec. separately] is set and different recording qualities are set for the
CF card and SD card, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
decrease (p.151).
 Even if [Record func.] is set to [Rec. to multiple], movies cannot be
recorded to both the CF card and SD card at the same time. If [Rec.
separately] or [Rec. to multiple] is set, the movie will be recorded to the
card which is set for [Playback].
[Rec. separately] and [Rec. to multiple]
 The same file number is used for recording to both the CF card and SD
card.
 The LCD panel will display the number of possible shots of the card
having the lower number.
 If one of the cards becomes full, [Card* full] will be displayed and
shooting will be disabled. If this happens, either replace the card or set
[Record func.] to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], and select the card
with remaining capacity to continue shooting.
147
3 Selecting the Card for Recording and Playback
Selecting the CF or SD Card for Recording and Playback
If [Record func.] is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], select the
card for recording and playing images.
If [Record func.] is set to [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple],
select the card for playing images.
Standard / Auto switch card
Select [Record/play].
 Select [Record/play], then press
<0>.
f : Record images to and play
images back from the CF
card.
g : Record images to and play
images back from the SD
card.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
Rec. separately / Rec. to multiple
Select [Playback].
 Select [Playback], then press <0>.
f : Play back the CF card’s
images.
g : Play back the SD card’s
images.
 Select the card, then press <0>.
148
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
You can select the pixel count and the image quality. There are eight JPEG
image-recording quality settings: 73, 83, 74, 84, 7a, 8a, b, c.
There are three RAW image quality settings: 1, 41, 61 (p.152).
1
Standard / Auto switch
card / Rec. to multiple
Select [Image quality].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Image
quality], then press <0>.
the image-recording quality.
2 Select
 To select a RAW quality, turn the
<6> dial. To select a JPEG quality,
turn the <5> dial.
 On the upper right, the “**M
(megapixels) ****x****” number
indicates the recorded pixel count,
and [***] is the number of possible
shots (displayed up to 9999).
 Press <0> to set it.
Rec. separately
 Under [51: Record func+card/
folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to
[Rec. separately], select CF card
[f] or SD card [g], then press
<0>.
 Select the desired image-recording
quality, then press <0>.
149
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Image-recording Quality Setting Examples
73 only
1 only
1+73
61+84
 If [–] is set for both RAW and JPEG, 73 will be set.
 The number of possible shots will be displayed up to 1999 on the LCD
panel.
150
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
Guide to Image-Recording Quality Settings (Approx.)
Image
Quality
73
83
74
JPEG
84
7a
Pixels
Printing
Recorded
Size
20M
A2
8.9M
A3
File Size
(MB)
Possible
Shots
Maximum
Burst
6.6
1090
130 (1090)
3.5
2060
2060 (2060)
3.6
2000
2000 (2000)
1.8
3810
3810 (3810)
2.3
3060
3060 (3060)
1.2
5800
5800 (5800)
5.0M
A4
b*1
2.5M
9x13 cm
1.3
5240
5240 (5240)
c*2
0.3M
-
0.3
20330
20330 (20330)
1
8a
20M
A2
24.0
290
24 (31)
RAW 41
11M
A3
19.3
350
28 (31)
61
5.0M
A4
13.3
510
35 (35)
1
73
20M
20M
A2
A2
24.0+6.6
220
18 (19)
11M
20M
A3
A2
19.3+6.6
260
18 (19)
5.0M
20M
A4
A2
13.3+6.6
340
18 (19)
RAW
41
+
73
JPEG
61
73
*1: b is suitable for playing the images on a digital photo frame.
*2: c is suitable for emailing the image or using it on a website.
 b and c will be in 7 (Fine) quality.
 The file size, possible shots, and maximum burst during continuous shooting
are based on Canon’s testing standards (3:2 aspect ratio, ISO 100 and
Standard Picture Style) using an 8 GB CF card. These figures will vary by
the subject, card brand, aspect ratio, ISO speed, Picture Style, Custom
Functions, and other settings.
 The maximum burst applies to <o> high-speed continuous shooting.
Figures in parentheses apply to an Ultra DMA (UDMA) 7 CF card based on
Canon’s testing standards.
Even if you use a UDMA card, the maximum burst indicator will not change.
The maximum burst in parentheses in the table will apply instead.
151
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
 If you select both RAW and JPEG, the same image will be recorded
simultaneously to the card in both RAW and JPEG at the imagerecording qualities that were set. The two images will be recorded with
the same file numbers (file extension: .JPG for JPEG and .CR2 for RAW).
 The image-recording quality icons are as follows: 1 (RAW), 41
(Medium RAW), 61 (Small RAW), JPEG (JPEG), 7 (Fine), 8
(Normal), 3 (Large), 4 (Medium), and 6 (Small).
RAW Images
A RAW image is raw data output by the image sensor converted to
digital data. It is recorded to the card as is, and you can select the
quality as follows: 1, 41, or 61.
A 1 image can be processed with [31: RAW image processing]
(p.398) and saved as a JPEG image. (41 and 61 images cannot
be processed with the camera.) As the RAW image itself does not
change, you can process the RAW image according to different
processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images from it.
You can use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.534) to
process RAW images. You can make various adjustments as desired
and generate a JPEG, TIFF, etc., image incorporating those
adjustments.
RAW Image Processing Software
 To display RAW images on a computer, using Digital Photo Professional
(DPP, EOS software) is recommended.
 Previous versions of DPP may not be able to process RAW images
taken with this camera. If your computer has a previous version of DPP,
update it with the EOS Solution Disk (p.534). (The previous version will
be overwritten.)
 Commercially-available software may not be able to display RAW
images taken with this camera. For compatibility information, contact the
software manufacturer.
152
3 Setting the Image-Recording Quality
One-touch Image Quality Setting
With Custom Controls, you can assign the image-recording quality to
the <B> button or depth-of-field preview button so you can switch
to it momentarily. If you assign [One-touch image quality setting] or
[One-touch image quality (hold)] to the <B> button or depth-offield preview button, you can quickly switch to the desired imagerecording quality and shoot.
For details, see Custom Controls (p.445).
Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.] is set to [Rec.
separately], you cannot switch to the One-touch image quality setting.
Maximum Burst for Continuous Shooting
The approximate maximum burst is
displayed on the bottom right both in the
viewfinder and on the shooting function
settings screen.
If the maximum burst for continuous
shooting is 99 or higher, “99” will be
displayed.
The maximum burst is displayed even when a card is not inserted in the
camera. Make sure that a card is inserted before taking a picture.
If the maximum burst is displayed as “99”, it indicates that you can shoot 99
or more shots continuously. If the maximum burst decreases to 98 or lower
and the internal buffer memory becomes full, “buSY” will be displayed in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel. Shooting will then be disabled temporarily.
If you stop continuous shooting, the maximum burst will increase. After all
the captured images are written to the card, you can resume continuous
shooting and shoot up to the maximum burst listed on page 151.
153
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Set the ISO speed (image sensor’s sensitivity to light) to suit the
ambient light level. With the <A> mode selected, the ISO speed will
be set automatically (p.156).
Regarding the ISO speed during movie shooting, see pages 317 and
321.
1
Press the <m> button. (9)
the ISO speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or in
the viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
 ISO speed can be set within ISO 100
- ISO 16000 in 1/3-stop increments.
 “A” indicates Auto ISO. The ISO
speed will be set automatically
(p.156).
ISO Speed Guide
ISO speed
Shooting Situation
(No flash)
ISO 100 - ISO 400
Sunny outdoors
ISO 400 - ISO 1600
Overcast skies or
evening time
ISO 1600 - ISO 16000, H1, H2
Dark indoors or night
* High ISO speeds will result in grainier images.
154
Flash Range
The higher the ISO
speed, the farther the
flash range will be.
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
 As H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600) and H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200) are
expanded ISO speed settings, noise (dots of light, banding, etc.) and
irregular colors will be more noticeable, and the resolution lower than
usual.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.180), ISO 100/125/
160, H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600), and H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200)
cannot be selected.
 Shooting in high temperatures may result in images that look grainier.
Long exposures can also cause irregular colors in the image.
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 When shooting in conditions that produce an extreme amount of noise,
such as a combination of high ISO speed, high temperature, and long
exposure, images may not be recorded properly.
 If you use a high ISO speed and flash to shoot a close subject,
overexposure may result.
 If you set H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200) and shoot a movie, it will switch
to H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600) with manual-exposure movie shooting.
Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed will not
revert to H2.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], you can use [ISO speed range] to
expand the settable ISO speed range up to H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200)
(p.157).
 Even if [81: ISO speed setting increments] is set to [1-stop], you can
still select ISO 16000.
155
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to “A” (Auto), the
actual ISO speed to be set will be
displayed when you press the shutter
button halfway.
As indicated below, the ISO speed will
be set automatically to suit the shooting
mode.
Shooting Mode
ISO Speed Setting
A
d/s/f/a
Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 6400
F
ISO 400*1
With flash
ISO 400*1*2*3*4
Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 16000*1
*1: The actual ISO speed range depends on the [Minimum] and [Maximum]
settings set in [Auto ISO range].
*2: If fill flash will cause overexposure, ISO speed may be reduced, down to a
possible minimum of ISO 100 (except in the <a> and <F> modes).
*3: Except in the <A> mode.
*4: In the <d> mode, if the external Speedlite is set for bounce flash, ISO 400 ISO 1600 will be set automatically.
156
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Manually-Settable ISO Speed Range
You can set the manually-settable ISO speed range (minimum and
maximum limits). You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 to H1
(equivalent to ISO 25600), and the maximum limit within ISO 200 to H2
(equivalent to ISO 51200).
1
Select [ISO speed settings].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [ISO
speed settings], then press <0>.
2 Select [ISO speed range].
the minimum limit.
3 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
4 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
5 Select [OK].
157
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the ISO Speed Range for Auto ISO
You can set the automatic ISO speed range for Auto ISO within ISO 100
- ISO 16000. You can set the minimum limit within ISO 100 - ISO 12800,
and the maximum limit within ISO 200 - ISO 16000.
1
Select [Auto ISO range].
the minimum limit.
2 Set
 Select the minimum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
the maximum limit.
3 Set
 Select the maximum limit box, then
press <0>.
 Select the ISO speed, then press
<0>.
4 Select [OK].
The [Minimum] and [Maximum] settings will also apply to the ISO speed
safety shift’s minimum and maximum ISO speeds (p.436).
158
i: Setting the ISO SpeedN
3 Setting the Minimum Shutter Speed for Auto ISO
You can set the minimum shutter speed so that the shutter speed set
automatically will not be too slow when Auto ISO is set.
This is convenient in the <d> and <f> modes when you use a wideangle lens to shoot a moving subject or when you use a telephoto lens.
It helps to reduce camera shake and blurred subjects.
1
Automatically set
Manually set
Select [Min. shutter spd.].
the desired minimum shutter
2 Set
speed.
 Select [Auto] or [Manual].
 If you select [Auto], turn the <6>
dial to set the desired speed (slower
or faster) compared to the standard
speed, then press <0>.
 If you select [Manual], turn the <6>
dial to select the shutter speed, then
press <0>.
 If a correct exposure cannot be obtained with the maximum ISO speed
limit set with [Auto ISO range], a shutter speed slower than the [Min.
shutter spd.] will be set to obtain a standard exposure.
 This function will not be applied to flash and movie shooting.
When [Auto: 0] is set, the minimum shutter speed will be the reciprocal of
the lens focal length. A single step from [Slower] to [Faster] is equivalent to
a single shutter speed stop.
159
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
By selecting a Picture Style, you can obtain image characteristics
matching your photographic expression or the subject.
The Picture Style is set automatically to [D] (Auto) in the <A>
mode.
1
Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
3 Select
 The Picture Style will be set and the
camera will be ready to shoot.
You can also select the Picture Style with [z3: Picture Style].
160
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
Picture Style Characteristics
D Auto
The color tone will be adjusted automatically to suit the scene. The
colors will look vivid, especially for blue skies, greenery and sunsets,
and in nature, outdoor and sunset scenes.
If the desired color tone is not obtained with [Auto], use another Picture
Style.
P Standard
The image looks vivid, sharp, and crisp. This is a general-purpose
Picture Style suitable for most scenes.
Q Portrait
For nice skin tones. The image looks softer. Suited for close-up
portraits.
By changing the [Color tone] (p.163), you can adjust the skin tone.
R Landscape
For vivid blues and greens, and very sharp and crisp images.
Effective for impressive landscapes.
S Neutral
Suited for processing the image with a computer. For natural colors
and subdued images.
U Faithful
Suited for processing the image with a computer. The color of a
subject that is captured in sunlight at a color temperature of 5200K
will be adjusted to match the subject’s colorimetrical color. Images
will appear subdued.
161
A Selecting a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome
Creates black-and-white images.
Black-and-white images shot in JPEG cannot be reverted to color. If you
want to later shoot pictures in color, make sure the [Monochrome] setting is
canceled.
You can display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when
[Monochrome] is set (p.441).
W User Def. 1-3
You can register a basic style such as [Portrait], [Landscape], a
Picture Style file, etc., and adjust it as desired (p.166). Any User
Defined Picture Style that is not set will have the same settings as
the [Standard] Picture Style.
Symbols
The symbols of the Picture Style selection screen refer to parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. The numerals indicate the
parameter settings, such as for [Sharpness] and [Contrast], for each
Picture Style.
Symbols
g
162
Sharpness
h
Contrast
i
Saturation
j
Color tone
k
Filter effect (Monochrome)
l
Toning effect (Monochrome)
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
You can customize a Picture Style by adjusting individual parameters
such as [Sharpness] and [Contrast]. To see the resulting effects, take
test shots. To customize [Monochrome], see page 165.
1 Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
a Picture Style.
3 Select
 Select a Picture Style, then press
<B> button.
a parameter.
4 Select
 Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
163
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
the parameter.
5 Set
 Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
 Press the <M> button to save the
adjusted parameters. The Picture
Style selection screen will reappear.
 Any parameter settings different from
the default will be displayed in blue.
Parameter Settings and Effects
g Sharpness
0: Less sharp outline
h Contrast
-4: Low contrast
+7: Sharp outline
+4: High contrast
i Saturation
-4: Low saturation
+4: High saturation
j Color tone
-4: Reddish skin tone
+4: Yellowish skin tone
 By selecting [Default set.] in step 4, you can revert the respective
Picture Style to its default parameter settings.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, first select the adjusted
Picture Style, then shoot.
164
A Customizing a Picture StyleN
V Monochrome Adjustment
For Monochrome, you can also set [Filter effect] and [Toning effect] in
addition to [Sharpness] and [Contrast] explained on the preceding
pages.
kFilter effect
With a filter effect applied to a
monochrome image, you can make
white clouds or green trees stand out
more.
Filter
Sample Effects
N: None
Normal black-and-white image with no filter effects.
Ye: Yellow
The blue sky will look more natural, and the white clouds will look
crisper.
Or: Orange
The blue sky will look slightly darker. The sunset will look more
brilliant.
R: Red
The blue sky will look quite dark. Fall leaves will look crisper and
brighter.
G: Green
Skin tones and lips will appear muted. Green tree leaves will look
crisper and brighter.
Increasing the [Contrast] will make the filter effect more pronounced.
lToning effect
By applying a toning effect, you can
create a monochrome image in that
color. It can make the image look more
impressive.
The following can be selected: [N:None],
[S:Sepia], [B:Blue], [P:Purple] or
[G:Green].
165
A Registering a Picture StyleN
You can select a base Picture Style such as [Portrait] or [Landscape],
adjust its parameters as desired and register it under [User Def. 1],
[User Def. 2], or [User Def. 3].
You can create multiple Picture Styles with different settings for
parameters such as sharpness and contrast.
You can also adjust the parameters of a Picture Style that is registered
to the camera with EOS Utility (EOS software, p.534).
1 Press the <b> button.
[A].
2 Select
 The Picture Style selection screen will
appear.
[User Def. *].
3 Select
 Select [User Def. *], then press
<B> button.
<0>.
4 Press
 With [Picture Style] selected, press
<0>.
the base Picture Style.
5 Select
 Select the base Picture Style, then
press <0>.
 To adjust the parameters of a Picture
Style that is registered to the camera
with EOS Utility (EOS software), select
the Picture Style here.
166
A Registering a Picture StyleN
a parameter.
6 Select
 Select a parameter such as
[Sharpness], then press <0>.
the parameter.
7 Set
 Adjust the parameter as desired, then
press <0>.
For details, see “Customizing a
Picture Style” (p.163).
 Press the <M> button to register
the modified Picture Style. The
Picture Style selection screen will
then reappear.
 The base Picture Style will be
indicated on the right of [User Def. *].
 If a Picture Style has already been registered under [User Def. *],
changing the base Picture Style in step 5 will nullify the parameter
settings of the registered Picture Style.
 If you execute [Clear all camera settings] (p.70), all the [User Def. *]
settings will revert to their defaults. Any Picture Style registered via EOS
Utility (EOS software) will have only its modified parameters reverted to
the default setting.
 To shoot with the Picture Style you adjusted, select the registered [User
Def. *], then shoot.
 Regarding the procedure to register a Picture Style file to the camera,
refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
167
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White balance (WB) is for making the white areas look white. Normally,
the [Q] (Auto) setting will obtain the correct white balance. If naturallooking colors cannot be obtained with [Q], you can select the white
balance to match the light source or set it manually by shooting a white
object.
<A> is automatically set in the [Q] mode.
1
Press the <n> button. (9)
a white balance setting.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or
viewfinder, turn the <5> dial.
(Approx.)
Display
Mode
Color Temperature (K: Kelvin)
Q
Auto
W
Daylight
3000-7000
5200
E
Shade
7000
R
Cloudy, twilight, sunset
6000
Y
Tungsten light
3200
U
White fluorescent light
D
Flash use
4000
Automatically set*
O
Custom (p.169)
2000-10000
P
Color temperature (p.171)
2500-10000
* Applicable with Speedlites having a color temperature transmission function.
Otherwise, it will be fixed to approx. 6000 K.
You can also set this with [z2: White balance].
168
B: Setting the White BalanceN
White Balance
To the human eye, a white object looks white regardless of the type of
lighting. With a digital camera, the color temperature is adjusted with
software to make the white areas look white. This adjustment serves as
the basis for the color correction. With this function, pictures with natural
color shades can be taken.
O Custom White Balance
Custom white balance enables you to manually set the white balance
for a specific light source for better accuracy. Perform this procedure
under the actual light source to be used.
1
Shoot a white object.
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the entire dotted line box (shown in
the illustration) over a plain, white
object.
 Focus manually and shoot with the
standard exposure set for the white
object.
 You can use any white balance
setting.
[Custom White Balance].
2 Select
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Custom
White Balance], then press <0>.
 The custom white balance selection
screen will appear.
169
B: Setting the White BalanceN
the white balance data.
3 Import
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image captured in step 1, then press
<0>.
 On the dialog screen that appears,
select [OK] and the data will be
imported.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
4 Press the <n> button. (9)
the custom white balance.
5 Select
 Look at the LCD panel and turn the
<5> dial to select <O>.
 If the exposure obtained in step 1 differs greatly from the standard
exposure, a correct white balance may not be obtained.
 In step 3, the following images cannot be selected: Images captured
while the Picture Style was set to [Monochrome], multiple-exposure
images, and images shot with another camera.
 Instead of a white object, a gray chart or 18% gray reflector
(commercially available) can produce a more accurate white balance.
 The personal white balance registered with the EOS software will be
registered under <O>. If you perform step 3, the data for the registered
personal white balance will be erased.
170
B: Setting the White BalanceN
P Setting the Color Temperature
You can set the white balance’s color temperature numerically. This is
for advanced users.
1
Select [White balance].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [White
balance], then press <0>.
the color temperature.
2 Set
 Select [P].
 Turn the <6> dial to set the color
temperature, then press <0>.
 The color temperature can be set
from approx. 2500 K to 10000 K in
100 K increments.
 When setting the color temperature for an artificial light source, set white
balance correction (magenta or green) as necessary.
 If you set [P] to the reading taken with a commercially-available color
temperature meter, take test shots and adjust the setting to compensate
for the difference between the color temperature meter’s reading and the
camera’s color temperature reading.
171
u White Balance CorrectionN
You can correct the white balance that is set. This adjustment will have
the same effect as using a commercially-available color temperature
conversion filter or color compensating filter. Each color can be
corrected to one of nine levels.
This function is for advanced users who are familiar with using color
temperature conversion or color compensating filters.
White Balance Correction
1
Select [WB Shift/Bkt.].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [WB
Shift/Bkt.], then press <0>.
the white balance correction.
2 Set
 Use <9> to move the “ ” mark to the
Sample setting: A2, G1
appropriate position.
 B is for blue, A for amber, M for
magenta, and G for green. The
image’s color balance will be
corrected towards the selected color.
 On the right of the screen, “Shift”
indicates the direction and correction
amount, respectively.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting.
 During the white balance correction, <u> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 You can display <z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when
white balance correction is set (p.441).
 One level of the blue/amber correction is equivalent to approx. 5 mireds
of a color temperature conversion filter. (Mired: Measuring unit indicating
the density of a color temperature conversion filter.)
172
u White Balance CorrectionN
White Balance Auto Bracketing
With just one shot, three images with different color tones can be
recorded simultaneously. Based on the color temperature of the current
white balance setting, the image will be bracketed with a blue/amber
bias or magenta/green bias. This is called white balance bracketing
(WB-BKT). White balance bracketing is possible up to ±3 levels in
single-level increments.
Set the white balance bracketing
amount.
B/A bias ±3 levels
 In step 2 for “White Balance
Correction”, when you turn the <5>
dial, the “ ” mark on the screen will
change to “
” (3 points).
Turning the dial to the right sets the B/
A bracketing, and turning it to the left
sets the M/G bracketing.
 On the right, “Bracket” indicates the
bracketing direction and correction
amount.
 Pressing the <L> button will cancel
all the [WB Shift/Bkt.] settings.
 Press <0> to exit the setting.
Bracketing Sequence
The images will be bracketed in the following sequence: 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Blue (B) bias, and 3. Amber (A) bias, or 1. Standard
white balance, 2. Magenta (M) bias, and 3. Green (G) bias.
173
u White Balance CorrectionN
 During WB bracketing, the maximum burst for continuous shooting will
be lower and the number of possible shots will also decrease to one-third
the normal number.
 Since three images are recorded for one shot, it takes longer to record
the image to the card.
 You can also set white balance correction and AEB together with white
balance bracketing. If you set AEB in combination with white balance
bracketing, a total of nine images will be recorded for a single shot.
 When white balance bracketing is set, the white balance icon will blink.
 You can change the number of shots for white balance bracketing
(p.435).
 “Bkt.” stands for bracketing.
174
3 Auto Correction of Brightness and ContrastN
If the image comes out dark or the contrast is low, the brightness and
contrast can be corrected automatically. This function is called Auto
Lighting Optimizer. The default setting is [Standard]. With JPEG
images, the correction is applied when the image is captured.
[Standard] is automatically set in the <A> mode.
1
Select [Auto Lighting Optimizer].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Auto
Lighting Optimizer], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
brightness and contrast corrected if
necessary.
 Depending on the shooting conditions, noise may increase.
 If the Auto Lighting Optimizer is too strong and the image is too bright,
set [Low] or [Disable].
 If a setting other than [Disable] is set and you use exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation to darken the exposure,
the image may still come out bright. If you want a darker exposure, set
this function to [Disable].
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the Auto Lighting
Optimizer will be set automatically to [Disable].
In step 2, if you press the <B> button and uncheck <X> the [Disabled
in M or B modes] setting, the [Auto Lighting Optimizer] can also be set in
the <a> and <F> modes.
175
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
High ISO Speed Noise Reduction
This function reduces the noise generated in the image. Although noise
reduction is applied at all ISO speeds, it is particularly effective at high
ISO speeds. At low ISO speeds, the noise in the darker parts of the
image (shadow areas) is further reduced.
1
Select [High ISO speed NR].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [High ISO
speed NR], then press <0>.
the level.
2 Set
 Select the desired noise reduction
level, then press <0>.
 M: Multi Shot Noise Reduction
This applies noise reduction with higher image quality than [High].
For a single photo, four shots are taken continuously and aligned
and merged automatically into a single JPEG image.
If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, you
cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
When Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set, you can display <z> in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.441).
176
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Cautions for Setting Multi Shot Noise Reduction
 If there is significant misalignment in the image due to camera shake, the
noise reduction effect may be minimal.
 If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the moving subject may leave
afterimages.
 The image alignment may not function properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 If the subject’s brightness changes as the four consecutive shots are
taken, irregular exposure in the image may result.
 Recording the image to the card will take longer than with normal
shooting. During the processing of the images, “buSY” will be displayed
in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you cannot take another
picture until the processing is completed.
 You cannot use AEB and WB bracketing.
 The [Distortion] setting will be set automatically to [Disable].
 If [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], [z3: Multiple exposure], [z3:
HDR Mode], AEB, or WB bracketing is set, [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] cannot be set.
 Flash shooting is not possible. The AF-assist beam will be emitted
according to the [23: AF-assist beam firing] setting.
 You cannot set [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] for bulb exposures and
movie shooting.
 The setting will automatically switch to [Standard] if you do any of the
following: Turn the power switch to <2>, change the battery, replace
the card, select the <A> or <F> shooting mode, set or switch the
image-recording quality to RAW or RAW+JPEG, or switch to movie
shooting.
177
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Noise reduction is possible with images exposed for 1 sec. or longer.
1
Select [Long exp. noise
reduction].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Long
exp. noise reduction], then press
<0>.
the desired setting.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 Auto
For exposures of 1 sec. or longer, noise reduction is performed
automatically if noise typical of long exposures is detected. This
[Auto] setting is effective in most cases.
 Enable
Noise reduction is performed for all exposures of 1 sec. or longer.
The [Enable] setting may reduce noise that cannot be detected with
the [Auto] setting.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with noise
reduction applied.
178
3 Setting Noise ReductionN
 With [Auto] and [Enable], the noise reduction process after the picture is
taken may take the same amount of time as that for the exposure. During
noise reduction, shooting is still possible as long as the maximum burst
indicator in the viewfinder shows “1” or higher.
 Images taken at ISO 1600 or higher may look grainier with the [Enable]
setting than with the [Disable] or [Auto] setting.
 With [Enable], if a long exposure is shot with the Live View image
displayed, “BUSY” will be displayed during the noise reduction process.
The Live View display will not appear until the noise reduction is
completed. (You cannot take another picture.)
179
3 Highlight Tone PriorityN
You can reduce overexposed highlight areas.
1
Select [Highlight tone priority].
 Under the [z3] tab, select
[Highlight tone priority], then press
<0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Highlight details are improved. The
dynamic range is expanded from the
standard 18% gray to bright
highlights. The gradation between the
grays and highlights becomes
smoother.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with
highlight tone priority applied.
When [Enable] is set, noise may increase slightly.
With [Enable], the settable range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000. Also, the
<A> icon will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel when
highlight tone priority is enabled.
180
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations
Peripheral light fall-off is a phenomenon that makes the image corners
look darker due to the lens characteristics. Color fringing along subject
outlines is called chromatic aberration. And image distortion due to lens
characteristics is called distortion. These lens aberrations and light falloff can be corrected. By default, Peripheral illumination and Chromatic
aberration correction are set to [Enable], and Distortion correction is set
to [Disable].
If [Cannot correct - no data] is displayed, see “Lens Correction Data”
on page 183.
Peripheral Illumination Correction
1
Select [Lens aberration
correction].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Lens
aberration correction], then press
<0>.
the setting.
2 Select
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Peripheral illumin.], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
peripheral illumination corrected.
Depending on shooting conditions, noise may appear on the image
periphery.
 The correction amount applied will be lower than the maximum
correction amount settable with Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.534).
 The higher the ISO speed, the lower the correction amount will be.
181
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations
Chromatic Aberration Correction
1
Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Chromatic aberration], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
chromatic aberration corrected.
Distortion Correction
1
Select the setting.
 Check that [Correction data
available] is displayed for the
attached lens.
 Select [Distortion], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the picture.
2 Take
 The image will be recorded with the
distortion corrected.
182
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations
 When distortion correction is enabled, the camera records an image
range narrower than that seen through the viewfinder. (Image periphery
will be slightly cropped and resolution slightly lowered.)
 If you set [Distortion] to [Enable], the maximum burst (p.153) during
continuous shooting will decrease.
 Distortion will not be corrected if you shoot a movie or set the HDR
mode, multiple exposures, or Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
 Using distortion correction during Live View shooting will slightly affect
the angle of view.
 When you magnify the image during Live View shooting, distortion
correction is not applied to the image displayed. Therefore, if the image
periphery is magnified, a part of the image range that will not be recorded
in the actual image may be displayed.
 Dust Delete Data (p.407) will not be appended to images recorded with
distortion correction enabled. Also, the AF point(s) will not be displayed
(p.359) when you play back the image.
Lens Correction Data
The camera already contains data for lens peripheral illumination
correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction for
approx. 30 lenses. If you select [Enable], the peripheral illumination
correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion correction will
be applied automatically for any lens whose correction data is
registered in the camera.
With EOS Utility (EOS software), you can check the lenses of which
correction data is registered in the camera. You can also register the
correction data for unregistered lenses. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
183
3 Correction of Lens Peripheral Illumination and Aberrations
Cautions for Lens Correction
 Peripheral illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and
distortion correction cannot be applied to JPEG images already taken.
 When using a non-Canon lens, setting the corrections to [Disable] is
recommended, even if [Correction data available] is displayed.
 If you use magnified view during Live View shooting, the peripheral
illumination correction, chromatic aberration correction, and distortion
correction will not be reflected in the image shown on the screen.
 The correction amount will be less if the lens used does not have
distance information.
Notes for Lens Correction
 If the effect of the correction is not visible, magnify the image after
shooting and check it again.
 Corrections can be applied even when an Extender or Life-size
Converter is attached.
 If the correction data for the attached lens is not registered to the
camera, the result will be the same as when the correction is set to
[Disable].
184
3 Reducing FlickerN
If you shoot an image with a fast shutter speed under a light source
such as fluorescent light, the blinking of the light source causes flicker
and the image may be vertically unevenly exposed. If continuous
shooting is used under these conditions, uneven exposures or colors
across the images may result.
With anti-flicker shooting, the camera detects the frequency of the light
source’s blinking and takes the picture when the flicker’s effect on the
exposure or color is minimal.
1
Select [Anti-flicker shoot.].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Antiflicker shoot.], then press <0>.
2 Select [Enable].
the picture.
3 Take
 The image will be taken with reduced
unevenness of exposure or color
caused by the flicker.
 When [Enable] is set and you shoot under a flickering light source, the
shutter-release time lag may become slightly longer. Also, the
continuous shooting speed may become slightly slower, and the
shooting interval may become irregular.
 This function does not work with Live View shooting and movie shooting.
 In the <d> or <f> mode, if the shutter speed changes during
continuous shooting or if you shoot multiple shots of the same scene at
different shutter speeds, the color tone may be inconsistent. To avoid
inconsistent color tones, use the <s> or <a> mode at a fixed shutter
speed.
 The color tone of images shot when [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to
[Enable] may look different from when [Disable] is set.
 Flicker at a frequency other than 100 Hz or 120 Hz cannot be detected.
Also, if the light’s flicker frequency changes during continuous shooting,
effects of the flicker cannot be reduced.
185
3 Reducing FlickerN
 If the subject is against a dark background or if there is a bright light in
the image, flicker may not be detected.
 Under certain special types of lighting, the camera may not be able to
reduce the effects of the flicker even while <G> is displayed.
 Depending on the light source, flicker may not be detected properly.
 If you recompose a shot, <G> may appear and disappear
intermittently.
 Depending on the light sources or shooting conditions, expected result
may not be obtained even if you use this function.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 If <G> is not displayed in the viewfinder, checkmark [Flicker
detection] in [Show/hide in viewfinder] (p.77). When the camera
reduces the effects of the flicker when you shoot, <G> will light.
Under a light source which does not flicker, or if no flicker is detected,
<G> will not be displayed.
 If [Flicker detection] is checkmarked and [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] is
set to [Disable], metering under flickering light source will cause
<G> to blink in the viewfinder as a warning. Setting [Enable]
before shooting is recommended.
 In the <A> mode, the effects of flickering light will be reduced when you
shoot, but <G> will not be displayed.
 Anti-flicker shooting also works with flash. However, the expected result
may not be obtained during wireless flash shooting.
186
3 Setting the Color SpaceN
The range of reproducible colors is called “color space”. With this
camera, you can set the color space for captured images to sRGB or
Adobe RGB. For normal shooting, sRGB is recommended.
The color space is set automatically to [sRGB] in the <A> mode.
1
Select [Color space].
 Under the [z2] tab, select [Color
space], then press <0>.
the desired color space.
2 Set
 Select [sRGB] or [Adobe RGB], then
press <0>.
Adobe RGB
This color space is mainly used for commercial printing and other
industrial uses. This setting is not recommended if you are not familiar
with image processing, Adobe RGB, and Design rule for Camera File
System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). The image will look very subdued in a
sRGB computer environment and with printers not compatible with
Design rule for Camera File System 2.0 (Exif 2.21 or higher). Postprocessing of the image with computer software will therefore be
required.
 If the captured still photo was shot in the Adobe RGB color space, the
first character in the file name will be an underscore “_”.
 The ICC profile is not appended. For explanations about the ICC profile,
refer to the Digital Photo Professional Instruction Manual.
187
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
You can freely create and select the folder where the captured images
are to be saved.
This operation is optional since a folder will be created automatically for
saving captured images.
Creating a Folder
1
Select [Record func+card/folder
sel.].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Record
func+card/folder sel.], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Folder].
3 Select [Create folder].
[OK].
4 Select
 A new folder with the folder number
increased by one is created.
188
3 Creating and Selecting a Folder
Selecting a Folder
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
 Select a folder on the folder selection
screen, then press <0>.
 The folder where the captured
images will be saved is selected.
 Subsequently captured images will
be recorded into the selected folder.
Folder name
Highest file number
Folders
As with “100EOS7D” for example, the folder name starts with three digits
(the folder number) followed by five alphanumeric characters. A folder can
contain up to 9999 images (file number 0001 - 9999). When a folder
becomes full, a new folder with the folder number increased by one is
created automatically. Also, if manual reset (p.194) is executed, a new
folder will be created automatically. Folders numbered from 100 to 999 can
be created.
Creating Folders with a Computer
With the card open on the screen, create a new folder named “DCIM”. Open
the DCIM folder and create as many folders as necessary to save and
organize your images. The folder name must follow the format
“100ABC_D”. The first three digits are the folder number, from 100 to 999.
The last five characters can be any combination of upper- and lower-case
letters from A to Z, numerals, and the underscore “_”. The space cannot be
used. Also note that two folder names cannot share the same three-digit
folder number (for example, “100ABC_D” and “100W_XYZ”), even if the
remaining five characters in each name are different.
189
3 Changing the File Name
The file name has four alphanumeric
characters followed by a four-digit image (Example) BE3B0001.JPG
number (p.193) and extension. The first
four alphanumeric characters are set upon factory shipment and unique
to the camera. However, you can change them.
With “User setting1”, you can change and register the four characters
as desired. With “User setting2”, if you register three characters, the
fourth character from the left will be appended automatically to indicate
the image size.
Registering or Changing the File Name
1
Select [File name].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
name], then press <0>.
2 Select [Change User setting*].
any alphanumeric
3 Enter
characters.
 For User setting1, enter four
characters. For User setting2, enter
three characters.
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
 Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
190
3 Changing the File Name
 Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the correct number of
characters, press the <M> button,
then select [OK].
 The registered file name will be
saved.
the registered file name.
5 Select
 Select [File name], then press <0>.
Settings
 Select the registered file name, then
press <0>.
 If User setting2 is registered, select
“*** (the 3 characters registered) +
image size”.
191
3 Changing the File Name
The first character cannot be an underscore “_”.
User setting2
When you select the “*** + image size” registered with User setting2 and
take pictures, the image-recording quality character will be automatically
appended as the file name’s fourth character from the left. The meaning of
the image-recording quality characters is as follows:
“***L” = 73 / 83 / 1
“***M” = 74 / 84 / 41
“***S” = 7a / 8a / 61
“***T” = b
“***U” = c
When the image is transferred to a computer, the automatically appended
fourth character will be included. You can then see the image size without
having to open the image. RAW or JPEG images can be distinguished with
the extension.
 The extension will be “.JPG” for JPEG images, “.CR2” for RAW images,
and “.MOV” or “.MP4” for movies.
 When you shoot a movie with User setting2, the file name’s fourth
character will be an underscore “_”.
192
3 File Numbering Methods
The four-digit file number is like the frame
(Example) BE3B0001.JPG
number on a roll of film. The captured
images are assigned a sequential file
number from 0001 to 9999 and saved in one folder. You can change
how the file number is assigned.
1
Select [File numbering].
 Under the [51] tab, select [File
numbering], then press <0>.
the file numbering method.
2 Select
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Continuous
Continues the file numbering sequence even after the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
Even after you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target
card (such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence up to
9999 for the images saved. This is convenient when you want to save
images numbered anywhere between 0001 to 9999 on multiple cards or
in multiple folders into one folder on your computer.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to use continuous file numbering, it is recommended
that you use a newly-formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card A (f)
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card A
Card B (g)
100
0051
0052
0051
101
0052
Next sequential file number
193
3 File Numbering Methods
Auto Reset
Restarts the file numbering from 0001 each time the card is
replaced or a new folder is created.
When you replace the card, create a folder, or switch the target card
(such as f9g), the file numbering continues in sequence from 0001
for the images saved. This is convenient if you want to organize images
according to cards or folders.
If the replacement card or existing folder already contains images
recorded previously, the file numbering of the new images may continue
from the file numbering of the existing images on the card or in the
folder. If you want to save images with the file numbering starting from
0001, use a newly formatted card each time.
File numbering after
replacing the card
Card A (f)
File numbering after
creating a folder
Card A
Card B (g)
100
0051
0001
0051
101
0001
File numbering is reset
Manual Reset
Resets the file numbering to 0001 or to start from file number 0001
in a new folder.
When you reset the file numbering manually, a new folder is created
automatically and the file numbering of images saved to that folder
starts from 0001.
This is convenient if you want to use different folders for the images
taken yesterday and the ones taken today, for example. After the
manual reset, the file numbering returns to continuous or auto reset.
(There will be no manual reset confirmation screen.)
If the file number in folder 999 reaches 9999, shooting will not be possible
even if the card still has storage capacity. The LCD monitor will display a
message telling you to replace the card. Replace it with a new card.
194
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
When you set the copyright information, it will be recorded to the image
as Exif information.
1
Select [Copyright information].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Copyright
information], then press <0>.
the option to be set.
2 Select
 Select [Enter author’s name] or
[Enter copyright details], then press
<0>.
text.
3 Enter
 Press the <Q> button. The text




palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
You can enter up to 63 characters.
To delete a character, press the <L>
button.
To cancel the text entry, press the
<B> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation screen.
the setting.
4 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The information is saved.
195
3 Setting Copyright InformationN
Checking the Copyright Information
When you select [Display copyright
info.] in step 2, you can check the
[Author] and [Copyright] information
that you entered.
Deleting the Copyright Information
When you select [Delete copyright information] in step 2 on the
preceding page, you can delete the [Author] and [Copyright]
information.
If the entry for “Author” or “Copyright” is long, it may not be displayed
entirely when you select [Display copyright info.].
You can also set or check the copyright information with EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.534).
196
5
GPS Settings
This chapter explains the camera’s built-in GPS
settings. The EOS 7D Mark II (G) can receive satellite
navigation signals from GPS satellites (USA),
GLONASS satellites (Russia), and the Quasi-Zenith
Satellite System (QZSS) “Michibiki” (Japan).
 The GPS function is set to [Disable] by default.
 This manual uses the term “GPS” to refer to the satellite
navigation function.
When [GPS] is set to [Enable] (p.201), the camera
will continue to receive GPS signals at regular
intervals even after the power is turned off. The
battery will thereby drain faster and the number of
possible shots will decrease. If you will not use
GPS, setting [GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.
When using GPS function, be sure to check the region of use and
use the function in accordance with the laws and regulations of
the country or region. Be particularly careful when using GPS
outside your home country.
197
GPS Features
Geotagging Images
 Geotag information*1 (latitude,
longitude, elevation) and coordinated
universal time*2 can be appended to
images.
 Using the digital compass (based on
magnetic north), the shooting
direction can be appended to images.
 These information can be used to
show the shooting location and
shooting direction on a map displayed
on a computer.
*1: Certain travel conditions or GPS settings may cause inaccurate geotag
information to be added to images.
*2: Coordinated Universal Time, abbreviated UTC, is essentially the same as
Greenwich Mean Time.
Logging the Route Traveled
You can use the GPS logging function to automatically record the
camera’s location information at set intervals. This geotag information
can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer.
* Certain traveling conditions, locations, or GPS settings may cause inaccurate
geotag information to be added to images.
Setting the Camera Time
The camera time can be set using GPS signals.
198
GPS Features
Viewing Images and Information on a Virtual Map
Shooting locations and the route traveled can be viewed on a map
displayed on a computer, using the Map Utility (EOS software, p.534).
Map data ©2014 ZENRIN -
199
GPS Precautions
9Countries and Regions Permitting GPS Function Use
Use of GPS function is restricted in some countries and regions, and
illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations. To
avoid violating GPS function regulations, visit the Canon website to
check where use is allowed.
Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from
GPS function use in other countries and regions.
9Model Number
EOS 7D Mark II (G): DS126461
(including GPS module model: CH9-1352)
 In certain countries and regions, the use of GPS function may be
restricted. Therefore, be sure to use GPS function in accordance
with the laws and regulations of your country or region. Be
particularly careful when using GPS function outside your home
country.
 Be careful about using GPS function where the operation of
electronic devices is restricted.
 Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in
your geotagged pictures or movies. Be careful when sharing these
geotagged images, movies or GPS log files with others, such as
when posting them online where many people can view them.
 GPS signal reception may take a longer time in some cases.
Hereby, Canon Inc., declares that this CH9-1352 is in compliance with the
essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 1999/5/EC.
Please contact the following address for the original Declaration of Conformity:
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
CANON INC.
30-2, Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
200
Acquiring GPS Signals
To acquire GPS signals, take the camera outside where the sky is
unobstructed. Face the top of the camera toward the sky while keeping
your hands, etc., away from the camera top.
When the signal acquisition conditions are good, it will take the camera
approx. 30 sec. to 60 sec. to catch the GPS satellite signals after you
set [GPS] to [Enable]. Check that [r] is displayed on the LCD panel,
then shoot.
1
Select [GPS/digital compass
settings].
 Under the [52] tab, select [GPS/
digital compass settings], then
press <0>.
2 Set [GPS] to [Enable].
GPS Acquisition Status
GPS acquisition status is indicated by
the [r] icon on the LCD panel and on
the shooting function settings screen.
Constant r: Signal acquired
Blinking r: Signal not acquired yet
When you shoot while [r] is
displayed, the image will be geotagged.
201
Acquiring GPS Signals
 If [Enable] is selected, <r> will still be displayed on the LCD panel
even when you turn the camera’s power switch to <2>. Also, since
the camera will receive GPS signals at regular intervals, the battery will
drain quickly and the number of possible shots will decrease. If you will
not use the camera for a prolonged period, set to [Disable].
 The GPS antenna is built-in around the hot shoe. Although the GPS
signal can be acquired while an external Speedlite is attached to the hot
shoe, the acquisition sensitivity will slightly decrease.
 GPS Receiver GP-E2 (sold separately) cannot be used.
Poor GPS Coverage
Under the following conditions, the GPS satellite signal will not be properly
acquired. As a result, the geotag information may not be recorded or
inaccurate geotag information may be recorded.
 Indoors, underground, in tunnels or forests, between buildings, or in
valleys.
 Near high-voltage power lines or mobile phones operating on the 1.5
GHz band.
 The camera is left inside a bag, etc.
 When traveling a long distance.
 When traveling through different environments.
 Since GPS satellites move as time passes, satellite movement can
interfere with geotagging and cause missing or inaccurate geotag
information even in conditions other than the above. Additionally, the
geotag information may also include the route travelled even if the
camera was used only at one location.
The camera can receive GPS signals even in the vertical orientation.
202
Acquiring GPS Signals
Viewing GPS Information
1
Select [Set up].
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Enable].
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
[GPS information display].
2 Select
 Detailed GPS information is
displayed.
the picture.
3 Take
 Shots taken after GPS signal
acquisition are geotagged.
Generally, elevation is not as accurate as latitude and longitude due to the
nature of GPS.
 The <A> icon indicates signal conditions. When <C> is displayed,
elevation can also be recorded. However, elevation cannot be recorded
when <B> is displayed.
 UTC (Coordinated Universal Time) is essentially the same as Greenwich
Mean Time.
 In the sample screen, the NE45° direction indicates northeast 45°.
203
Acquiring GPS Signals
Geotagging Information
Play back the images and press the <B> button to display the
shooting information screen (p.357). Then tilt <9> up or down to check
the geotag information.
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
North
0°
UTC (Coordinated Universal Time)
Direction (Based on magnetic north,
p.206)
West
270°
East
90°
South
180°
 When you shoot a movie, the GPS information at the time when shooting
begins is recorded. Note that signal reception conditions are not
recorded.
 Shooting locations can be viewed on a map displayed on a computer,
using the Map Utility (EOS software, p.534).
204
Setting the Positioning Interval
The interval (time) to update the geotag information can be set.
Although updating the geotag information at shorter intervals will make
it more accurate, it will reduce the number of possible shots.
1
Select [Set up].
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Enable].
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
2 Select [Position update interval].
the desired update interval.
3 Set
 Select the desired update interval,
then press <0>.
 The shorter the interval, the lower the number of possible shots will be.
 If you are in a location where the GPS acquisition condition is not good,
the number of possible shots will decrease.
 The nature of GPS may cause some inconsistency in positioning
intervals.
205
Using the Digital Compass
Camera orientation information (the direction the camera is facing) can be
appended to the image.
1
Select [Set up].
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Enable].
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
[Digital compass] to [Enable].
2 Set
 Select [Digital compass], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If the [Calibrate digital compass]
screen appears, perform steps 2 and
3 on page 208.
Compass Display During Shooting
The camera’s current orientation can be displayed on the LCD monitor.
 When you press the <B> button
to display the digital compass, the
direction will be displayed on the
bottom of the screen.
 During Live View shooting and movie
shooting, you can confirm the
direction using the arrow icon at the
location circled in this sample screen.
 During continuous shooting, if you change the camera direction or tilt the
camera up or down, the correct direction information may not be
recorded.
 The direction information is not recorded to the log file (p.211).
206
Using the Digital Compass
Since the digital compass uses geomagnetism for direction sensing, correct
directions may not be obtained or calibration may not be possible in the
following environments.
• In or near buildings (including office buildings, residences built using
reinforced concrete or masonry, and underground shopping malls),
vehicles (including cars, trains, planes, and boats), or metal structures
such as elevators
• Near metals (including steel desks and furnishings), permanent
magnets (including magnetic jewelry), or home electronics (including
televisions, computers, speakers, or mobile phones)
• Near high-voltage lines (including transmission towers), overhead
power lines (including those powering trains), or metal facilities
(including footbridges and guardrails)
• At high latitudes
Calibrating the Digital Compass
While you are using the GPS function, if the [Calibrate digital
compass] screen appears or if the direction indicated looks
questionable, calibrate the digital compass as follows. The digital
compass should be calibrated at the actual shooting location.
1
Select [Calibrate digital
compass].
 Check that [Digital compass] is set
to [Enable].
 Select [Calibrate digital compass],
then press <0>.
 The camera will be ready for
calibration.
207
Using the Digital Compass
the camera.
2 Move
(1) Swing the camera to the left and right
by at least 180°.
(2) Tilt the camera up and down by at
least 180°.
(3) Turn the camera by at least 180°.
 Be careful not to drop the camera.
 Steps (1), (2), and (3) can be
performed in any order. Keep moving
the camera until the calibration is
completed.
 If the compass is not calibrated after
you perform this, turn your body to
the right or left and move the camera
again.
the calibration.
3 Exit
 When the calibration is completed, a
screen indicating completion will be
displayed.
 Calibration will be completed
normally even if the completion
message appears while you are still
moving the camera in step 2.
For safety reasons, detaching the lens from the camera is recommended
before you perform the calibration.
208
Setting Time from GPS on the Camera
The time information obtained from GPS signals can be set in the
camera. The margin of error is approx. ±1 sec.
1
Select [Set up].
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Enable].
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
2 Select [Auto time setting].
the desired setting.
3 Select
 Select [Auto update] or [Set now],
then press <0>.
 [Auto update] updates the time when
the camera is turned on and a GPS
signal is received.
 If signals from at least five GPS satellites cannot be acquired, the time
cannot be auto updated. [Set now] will be grayed out and not selectable.
 Even if [Set now] is selected, updating the time may not be possible due
to an unfavorable timing of the GPS signal acquisition.
 When [Auto time setting] is set to [Auto update], the date or time
cannot be manually set with [Date/Time/Zone] under the [52] tab.
 If you use Wireless Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2/sold separately) and do
not want to change the time after performing [Sync time between
cameras], set [Auto time setting] to [Disable] in step 2.
209
Logging the Route Traveled
Map data ©2014 ZENRIN -
1
When using the GPS logging function,
the geotag information of the route the
camera traveled is automatically
recorded in the camera’s internal
memory.
Shooting locations and the route
traveled can be viewed on a map
displayed on a computer using the Map
Utility (EOS software, p.534).
Note that the GPS logging function will
continue to log information even when
the camera’s power is off, including
auto power off.
Select [Set up].
 Check that [GPS] is set to [Enable].
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
2 Select [GPS Logger].
[Log GPS position] to
3 Set
[Enable].
 Select [Log GPS position], then
press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 When the GPS logging function is enabled, the [
] icon will appear on
the shooting function settings screen (p.201).
 When you set the power switch to <2> or when auto power off takes
effect, <
> will be displayed on the LCD panel.
210
Logging the Route Traveled
Geotag Information Logs
Geotag information for the route the camera traveled is recorded at the
intervals set with [Position update interval] (p.205). The log data is
saved in the camera’s internal memory by date. The table below shows
how many days’ worth of data can be saved.
Log Data Capacity by Positioning Interval
(Approx.)
Update Interval
Log Data
Update Interval
Log Data
Every 1 sec.
4.1 days
Every 30 sec.
100 days
Every 5 sec.
20 days
Every 1 min.
100 days
Every 10 sec.
41 days
Every 2 min.
100 days
Every 15 sec.
61 days
Every 5 min.
100 days
* Assuming 8 hr. of data logged per day.
 The log data saved in the internal memory can be transferred as a
log file to a card (p.212).
 One log file is created for each day. The log file name has the date
(YYYYMMDD) and a number, for example, 14103100. If the time
zone changes (p.47), a new log file will be created.
 If the camera’s internal memory becomes full, the oldest log data will
be overwritten with the newest log data.
Battery Consumption During Logging
When [GPS] is set to [Enable], the camera will continue to receive GPS
signals at set intervals even while the camera’s power is switched off.
This will drain the battery faster, reducing the number of shots that can
be taken. Additionally, when [Log GPS position] is set to [Enable],
shorter update intervals will drain the battery more quickly.
When you are not traveling or when GPS signals are weak, setting
[GPS] to [Disable] is recommended.
211
Logging the Route Traveled
Downloading Log Data to a Computer
The log data in the camera’s internal memory can be downloaded to a
computer with EOS Utility (EOS software) or downloaded from a card
after transferring the data to the card.
When you use Map Utility (EOS software, p.534) to open a log file
saved on your computer, the camera’s travel route will be displayed on
a map.
Importing the log data using EOS software
With the camera connected to a computer via the provided interface
cable, you can download the log data to the computer with EOS Utility
(EOS software). For details, refer to the EOS Utility Instruction Manual.
Transferring the log data to a card for downloading
 When [Transfer log data to card] is
selected, you can transfer the log
data in the internal memory as log
files to a CF card [f] or SD card [g].
Note that when log files are
transferred to a card, that log data is
permanently deleted from the
camera’s internal memory.
 The log files imported to the card will be stored in the “GPS” folder in
the “MISC” folder. The extension is “.LOG”.
 Selecting [Delete log data] will completely delete the log data saved
in the internal memory. Deleting data may take approx. one minute.
212
Logging the Route Traveled
 Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).
 The GPS antenna is located at the top of the camera’s body. For this
reason, even when carrying the camera, such as in a bag, try to keep the
top of the camera facing upwards, and do not place anything on top of it.
 Set the camera time and date as accurately as possible. Also, set correct
time zone and daylight saving time for the shooting location.
 Since the geotag information, date, and time are constantly recorded
even when the camera is turned off, the battery will keep draining. When
you use the camera again, the battery level may already be low. If
necessary, recharge the battery or prepare a charged, spare battery
(sold separately).
213
214
6
Advanced Operations
In the <d> <s> <f> <a>
<F> shooting modes, you can
select the shutter speed,
aperture, and other camera
settings to change the
exposure and obtain the
desired result.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in these modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
 After you press the shutter button halfway and let go, the
exposure values will remain displayed in the viewfinder and
on the LCD panel for 4 sec. (0).
 For the functions settable in each shooting mode, see page
480.
Set the <R> switch to the left.
215
d: Program AE
The camera automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture to suit
the subject’s brightness. This is called Program AE.
* <d> stands for Program.
* AE stands for Auto Exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <d>.
on the subject.
2 Focus
 Look through the viewfinder and aim
the AF point over the subject. Then
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the focus
indicator <o> in the viewfinder will
light up (in One-Shot AF mode).
 The shutter speed and aperture will
be set automatically and displayed in
the viewfinder and on the LCD panel.
the display.
3 Check
 A standard exposure will be obtained
as long as the shutter speed and
aperture displays do not blink.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
216
d: Program AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed and the lower f/number
blink, it indicates underexposure.
Increase the ISO speed or use flash.
 If the “8000” shutter speed and the higher
f/number blink, it indicates overexposure.
Lower the ISO speed or use an ND filter (sold
separately) to reduce the amount of light entering
the lens.
Differences Between <d> and <A> Modes
In the <A> mode, many functions, such as the AF operation and metering
mode, are set automatically to prevent spoiled shots. The functions you can
set are limited. With <d> mode, only the shutter speed and aperture are set
automatically. You can freely set the AF operation, metering mode, and
other functions (p.480).
Program Shift
 In the Program AE mode, you can freely change the shutter speed and
aperture combination (Program) set automatically by the camera while
maintaining the same exposure. This is called Program shift.
 To shift the program, press the shutter button halfway, then turn the
<6> dial until the desired shutter speed or aperture is displayed.
 Program shift will be canceled automatically when the metering timer
(0) ends (exposure setting display turns off).
 Program shift cannot be used with flash.
217
s: Shutter-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the shutter speed and the camera automatically
sets the aperture to obtain the standard exposure matching the
brightness of the subject. This is called shutter-priority AE. A faster
shutter speed can freeze the action of a moving subject. A slower
shutter speed can create a blurred effect, giving the impression of
motion.
* <s> stands for Time value.
Blurred motion
(Slow shutter speed: 1/30 sec.)
1
Frozen action
(Fast shutter speed: 1/2000 sec.)
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the desired shutter speed.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or
through the viewfinder, turn the
<6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The aperture is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the aperture is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
218
s: Shutter-Priority AE
 If the lower f/number blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a slower shutter speed
until the aperture stops blinking or set a higher
ISO speed.
 If the higher f/number blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a faster shutter speed
until the aperture stops blinking or set a lower ISO
speed.
Shutter Speed Display
The shutter speeds from “8000” to “4” indicate the denominator of the
fractional shutter speed. For example, “125” indicates 1/125 sec., “0"5”
indicates 0.5 sec. and “15"” is 15 sec.
219
f: Aperture-Priority AE
In this mode, you set the desired aperture and the camera sets the
shutter speed automatically to obtain the standard exposure suiting the
subject brightness. This is called aperture-priority AE. A higher
f/number (smaller aperture hole) will make more of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus. On the other hand, a lower
f/number (larger aperture hole) will make less of the foreground and
background fall within acceptable focus.
* <f> stands for Aperture value (aperture opening).
Blurred background
(With a low aperture f/number: f/5.6)
1
Sharp foreground and background
(With a high aperture f/number: f/32)
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or
viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The shutter speed is set automatically.
the viewfinder display and
4 Check
shoot.
 As long as the shutter speed is not
blinking, a standard exposure will be
obtained.
220
f: Aperture-Priority AE
 If the “30"” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
underexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a larger aperture (lower
f/number) until the shutter speed blinking stops or
set a higher ISO speed.
 If the “8000” shutter speed blinks, it indicates
overexposure.
Turn the <6> dial to set a smaller aperture
(higher aperture f/number) until the shutter speed
blinking stops or set a lower ISO speed.
Aperture Display
The higher the f/number, the smaller the aperture opening will be. The
f/number displayed will differ depending on the lens. If no lens is attached to
the camera, “00” will be displayed for the aperture.
Depth-of-Field PreviewN
The aperture opening (diaphragm) changes only at the moment when
the picture is taken. Otherwise, the aperture remains fully open.
Therefore, when you look at the scene through the viewfinder or on the
LCD monitor, the depth of field will look narrow.
Press the depth-of-field preview button
to stop down the lens to the current
aperture setting and check the depth of
field (range of acceptable focus).
 A higher f/number will make more of the foreground and background fall
within acceptable focus. However, the viewfinder will look darker.
 While looking at the Live View image (p.286), you can change the
aperture and press the depth-of-field preview button to see how the
depth of field changes.
 The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while the depth-of-field preview
button is pressed.
221
a: Manual Exposure
In this mode, you set both the shutter speed and aperture as desired. To
determine the exposure, refer to the exposure level indicator in the
viewfinder or use a commercially-available exposure meter. This
method is called manual exposure.
* <a> stands for Manual.
Shutter speed
Aperture
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
2 Set the ISO speed (p.154).
the shutter speed and aperture.
3 Set
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
on the subject.
4 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel.
 On the viewfinder’s right side, the
exposure level indicator < > shows
how far off the current exposure level is
from the standard exposure level < >.
Bright (+)
Dark (-)
Standard exposure
index < >
222
the exposure and take the
5 Set
picture.
 Check the exposure level indicator and set
the desired shutter speed and aperture.
 If the exposure level exceeds ±3
stops from the standard exposure,
the end of the exposure level
indicator will display < > or < >.
a: Manual Exposure
Exposure Compensation with Auto ISO
If the ISO speed is set to A (AUTO), you can set exposure
compensation (p.226) as follows.
• [z2: Expo.comp./AEB]
• Under [83: Custom Controls], use [s: Expo comp (hold btn,
turn
)] (p.455) or [p: Expo comp (hold down lever, turn
)]
(p.455).
• Quick Control (p.61)
Set the exposure compensation amount while checking the exposure
level indicator on the lower part of the viewfinder or on the LCD panel.
 If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed setting will change to suit the shutter
speed and aperture in order to obtain a standard exposure. Therefore,
you may not obtain the desired exposure effect. In such a case, set the
exposure compensation.
 If flash is used when Auto ISO is set, exposure compensation will not be
applied even if an exposure compensation amount is set.
 Under [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], if the checkmark <X> for
[Disabled in M or B modes] is removed, Auto Lighting Optimizer can be
set even in the <a> mode (p.175).
 When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator compared to
when you pressed the <A> button.
 If exposure compensation (p.226) was applied in <d>, <s>, or <f>
mode, and then the shooting mode is switched to <a> with Auto ISO
set, the exposure compensation amount already set will be maintained.
 With Auto ISO set and [81: ISO speed setting increments] set to [1/2stop], any 1/2-stop exposure compensation will be implemented with the
ISO speed (1/3 stop) and shutter speed. However, the shutter speed
displayed will not change.
223
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
You can select one of four methods to measure the subject brightness.
In the <A> mode, evaluative metering is set automatically.
1
Press the <n> button. (9)
the metering mode.
2 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or
viewfinder, turn the <6> dial.
q:Evaluative metering
w:Partial metering
r:Spot metering
e:Center-weighted average
metering
q Evaluative metering
This is a general-purpose metering mode suited
even for backlit subjects. The camera sets the
exposure automatically to suit the scene.
w Partial metering
Effective when the background is much brighter
than the subject due to backlighting, etc. Partial
metering covers approx. 6% of the viewfinder area
at the center.
224
q Selecting the Metering ModeN
r Spot metering
This is for metering a specific spot of the subject or
scene. Spot metering covers approx. 1.8% of the
viewfinder area at the center. The spot metering
circle will be displayed in the viewfinder.
e Center-weighted average metering
The metering is weighted at the center and then
averaged for the entire scene.
 With q (Evaluative metering), the exposure setting will be locked when
you press the shutter button halfway and focus is achieved. In the w
(Partial metering), r (Spot metering), and e (Center-weighted
average metering) modes, the exposure is set at the moment the photo
is taken. (Pressing the shutter button halfway does not lock the
exposure.)
 When <r> (Spot metering) is set, you can display <z> in the
viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.441).
225
O Setting Exposure CompensationN
Exposure compensation can brighten (increased exposure) or darken
(decreased exposure) the standard exposure set by the camera.
Exposure compensation can be set in the <d>, <s>, and <f> shooting
modes. Although you can set the exposure compensation up to ±5 stops in 1/3stop increments, the exposure compensation indicator in the viewfinder and on the
LCD panel can only display the setting up to ±3 stops. If you want to set the
exposure compensation setting beyond ±3 stops, use the Quick Control (p.61) or
follow the instructions for [z2: Expo.comp./AEB] on the next page.
If the <a> mode with the Auto ISO set, see page 223 to set the
exposure compensation.
1
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Check the exposure.
 Press the shutter button halfway (0)
and check the exposure level indicator.
the exposure compensation amount.
2 Set
 While looking at the viewfinder or
LCD panel, turn the <5> dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <5> dial.
Decreased exposure for a darker image
the picture.
3 Take
 To cancel exposure compensation,
set the exposure level indicator <h/N>
to the standard exposure index (<a>
or <C>).
If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.175) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased exposure
compensation for a darker image is set.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 After setting the exposure compensation amount, you can prevent the
exposure compensation amount from changing accidentally by setting
the <R> switch to the right.
 If the exposure compensation amount exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the
exposure level indicator will display <J/ > or <I/ >.
226
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
By changing the shutter speed or aperture automatically, the camera
brackets the exposure up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments for three
successive shots. This is called AEB.
* AEB stands for Auto Exposure Bracketing.
1
Select [Expo.comp./AEB].
 Under the [z2] tab, select
[Expo.comp./AEB], then press
<0>.
the AEB range.
2 Set
 Turn the <6> dial to set the AEB
AEB range
range. If you turn <5>, you can set
the exposure compensation.
 Press <0> to set it.
 When you exit the menu, <h> and
the AEB range will be displayed on
the LCD panel.
the picture.
3 Take
 Three bracketed shots will be taken
according to the drive mode set in this
sequence: Standard exposure,
decreased exposure, and increased
exposure.
 AEB will not be automatically
canceled. To cancel AEB, follow step
2 to turn off the AEB range display.
Standard Decreased Increased
exposure exposure exposure
227
h Auto Exposure Bracketing (AEB)N
 During AEB, <A> in the viewfinder and <h> on the LCD panel will
blink.
 If the drive mode is set to <u> or <B>, press the shutter button three
times for each shot. When <o>, <i>, or <M> is set and you hold
down the shutter button completely, the three bracketed shots will be
taken continuously and the camera will automatically stop shooting.
When <Q> or <k> is set, the three bracketed shots will be taken
continuously after a 10-sec. or 2-sec. delay.
 You can set AEB in combination with exposure compensation.
 If the AEB range exceeds ±3 stops, the end of the exposure level
indicator will display <J/ > or <I/ >.
 AEB cannot be used with flash, bulb exposures, or when [Multi Shot
Noise Reduction] or [HDR Mode] is set.
 AEB will be canceled automatically when you set the power switch to
<2> or when the flash is ready to fire.
228
A AE LockN
Use AE lock when the area of focus is to be different from the exposure
metering area or when you want to take multiple shots at the same exposure
setting. Press the <A> button to lock the exposure, then recompose and
take the shot. This is called AE lock. It is effective for backlit subjects, etc.
1
Focus on the subject.
 Press the shutter button halfway.
 The exposure setting will be displayed.
the <A> button. (0)
2 Press
 The <A> icon lights up in the
viewfinder to indicate that the
exposure setting is locked (AE lock).
 Each time you press the <A> button,
the current exposure setting is locked.
and take the picture.
3 Recompose
 The exposure level indicator on the
right of the viewfinder will show the
AE lock exposure level and the
current exposure level in real-time.
 If you want to maintain the AE lock
while taking more shots, hold down
the <A> button and press the shutter
button to take another shot.
AE Lock Effects
Metering Mode
(p.224)
q*
wre
AF Point Selection Method (p.93)
Automatic Selection
Manual Selection
AE lock is applied at the AF
AE lock is applied at the
point that achieved focus.
selected AF point.
AE lock is applied at the center AF point.
* When the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <MF>, AE lock is applied at the
center AF point.
AE lock is not possible with bulb exposures.
229
F: Bulb Exposures
In this mode, the shutter stays open as long as you hold down the
shutter button completely, and closes when you let go of the shutter
button. This is called bulb exposure. Use bulb exposures for night
scenes, fireworks, the heavens, and other subjects requiring long
exposures.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <F>.
the desired aperture.
2 Set
 While looking at the LCD panel or the
viewfinder, turn the <6> or <5>
dial.
Elapsed exposure time
the picture.
3 Take
 The exposure will continue for as long
as you keep the shutter button
pressed completely.
 The elapsed exposure time will be
displayed on the LCD panel.
 Long exposures produce more noise than usual.
 If Auto ISO is set, the ISO speed will be ISO 400 (p.156).
 For a bulb exposure, if you use both the self-timer and mirror lockup
instead of the bulb timer, keep pressing the shutter button completely
(self-timer delay time + bulb exposure time). If you let go of the shutter
button during the self-timer countdown, there will be a shutter-release
sound, but no picture will be taken. If you use the bulb timer under the
same shooting conditions, you need not hold down the shutter button
completely.
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
230
F: Bulb Exposures
 With [z3: Long exp. noise reduction], you can reduce the noise
generated during long exposures (p.178).
 For bulb exposures, using a tripod and bulb timer is recommended.
Using mirror lockup (p.246) with bulb exposures is also possible.
 You can also shoot bulb exposures by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.248).
 You can also use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.248) for
bulb exposures. When you press the remote controller’s transmit button,
the bulb exposure will start immediately or 2 sec. later. Press the button
again to stop the bulb exposure.
J Bulb TimerN
You can preset the bulb exposure’s exposure time. With the bulb timer,
you need not hold down the shutter button during the bulb exposure.
This reduces camera shake.
The bulb timer can be set only in the <F> (Bulb) shooting mode. It
cannot be set (or will not function) in any other shooting mode.
1
Select [Bulb timer].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Bulb
timer], then press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <B>
button.
231
F: Bulb Exposures
the desired exposure time.
3 Set
 Select the hour, minute, or second.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
[OK].
4 Select
 The set time will be displayed on the
menu screen.
 <J> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
Elapsed exposure time
the picture.
5 Take
 Press the shutter button completely,
and the bulb exposure will start and
continue until the set time elapses.
 To cancel the timer setting, set
[Disable] in step 2.
Bulb timer
 If you press the shutter button completely while the bulb timer is
operating, the bulb exposure will stop.
 Doing any of the following will cancel the bulb timer (reverts to
[Disable]): Set the power switch to <2>, display the movie shooting
screen, or change the shooting mode from <F>.
232
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Highlight detail and shadow detail are retained for a high dynamic range
of tones even with high-contrast scenes. HDR shooting is effective for
landscape and still-life shots.
With HDR shooting, three images of different exposures (standard
exposure, underexposure, and overexposure) are captured for
each shot and then merged together automatically. The HDR
image is recorded as a JPEG image.
* HDR stands for High Dynamic Range.
1 Press the <b> button.
the HDR mode.
2 Select
 Select [w], then press <0>.
 The HDR mode screen will appear.
[Adjust dyn range].
3 Set
 Select the desired dynamic range
setting, then press <0>.
 Selecting [Auto] will have the
dynamic range set automatically
depending on the image’s overall
tonal range.
 The higher the number, the wider the
dynamic range will be.
 To exit HDR shooting, select [Disable
HDR].
[Effect].
4 Set
 Select the desired effect, then press
<0>.
 You can also set HDR shooting with [z3: HDR Mode].
233
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
Effects
 Natural
For images preserving a wide tonal range where the highlight and
shadow details would otherwise be lost.
 Art standard
While the highlight and shadow details will be better preserved than
with [Natural], the contrast will be lower, and the gradation flatter to
have the picture look like a painting. The subject outlines will have
bright (or dark) edges.
 Art vivid
The colors are more saturated than with [Art standard], and the low
contrast and flat gradation create a graphic art effect.
 Art bold
The colors are the most saturated, making the subject pop out, and
the picture look like an oil painting.
 Art embossed
The color saturation, brightness, contrast and gradation are
decreased to make the picture look flat. The picture looks faded and
old. The subject outlines will have bright (or dark) edges.
Art standard
Art vivid
Art bold
Saturation
Standard
High
Higher
Low
Bold outline
Standard
Weak
Strong
Stronger
Brightness
Standard
Standard
Standard
Dark
Flat
Flat
Flat
Flatter
Tone
Art embossed
Each effect will be applied based on the characteristics of the Picture Style
currently set (p.160).
234
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
[Continuous HDR].
5 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or [Every
shot], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], HDR shooting will
be canceled automatically after the
shooting ends.
 With [Every shot], HDR shooting
continues until the setting in step 3 is
set to [Disable HDR].
[Auto Image Align].
6 Set
 For handheld shooting, select
[Enable]. When using a tripod, select
[Disable], then press <0>.
the images to be saved.
7 Set
 To save all three images and the
merged HDR image, select [All
images], then press <0>.
 To save only the HDR image, select
[HDR img only], then press <0>.
235
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
the picture.
8 Take
 HDR shooting is possible with
viewfinder shooting and Live View
shooting.
 <w> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
 When you press the shutter button
completely, three consecutive images
will be captured, and the HDR image
will be recorded to the card.
 If the image-recording quality is set to RAW, the HDR image will be
recorded in 73 quality. If the image-recording quality is set to
RAW+JPEG, the HDR image will be recorded in the JPEG quality set.
 HDR shooting is not possible with ISO expansion (H1, H2). HDR
shooting is possible within ISO 100 - ISO 16000.
 The flash will not fire during HDR shooting.
 During HDR shooting, the settings of [Distortion], [z2: Auto Lighting
Optimizer], [z3: Highlight tone priority], and [z5: Expo.
simulation] will be automatically switched to [Disable].
 AEB cannot be set.
 If you shoot a moving subject, the subject’s movement may leave
afterimages.
 In HDR shooting, 3 images are captured with different shutter speeds set
automatically. Therefore, even in <s> and <a> shooting modes, the
shutter speed will be shifted based on the shutter speed you set.
 To prevent camera shake, a high ISO speed may be set.
236
w: HDR (High Dynamic Range) ShootingN
 When shooting HDR images with [Auto Image Align] set to [Enable],
AF point display information (p.359) and Dust Delete Data (p.407) will
not be appended to the image.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Enable], image periphery will be slightly cropped and resolution will
be slightly lowered. Also, if the images cannot be aligned properly due to
camera shake, etc., auto image alignment may not take effect. Note that
when shooting with excessively bright or dark exposure settings, auto
image alignment may not work properly.
 If you perform handheld HDR shooting while [Auto Image Align] is set
to [Disable], the 3 images may not be properly aligned and the HDR
effect may be minimal. Using a tripod is recommended.
 Auto image alignment may not work properly with repetitive patterns
(lattice, stripes, etc.) or flat, single-tone images.
 The color gradation of the sky or white walls may not be reproduced
correctly. Irregular colors, irregular exposure or noise may appear.
 HDR shooting under fluorescent or LED lighting may result in unnatural
color reproduction of the illuminated areas.
 With HDR shooting, the three images will be merged after you take a
picture. Therefore, it will take a longer time to record the HDR image to
the card than with normal shooting. During the processing of the images,
“buSY” will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel, and you
cannot take another picture until the processing is completed.
 If you change the shooting mode or switch to movie shooting after setting
HDR shooting, HDR shooting setting may be cleared ([Adjust dyn
range] setting may be switched to [Disable HDR]).
237
P Multiple ExposuresN
You can shoot two to nine exposures to be merged into one image. If
you shoot multiple-exposure images with Live View shooting (p.285),
you can see how the single exposures are being merged while
shooting.
1 Press the <b> button.
Multiple exposure.
2 Select
 Select [P], then press <0>.
 The multiple exposure setting screen
will appear.
[Multiple exposure].
3 Set
 Select [On:Func/Ctrl] or
[On:ContShtng], then press <0>.
 To exit shooting multiple exposures,
select [Disable].
 On: Func/Ctrl (Function and control priority)
Convenient when you want to shoot multiple exposures while
checking the result as you proceed. During continuous shooting, the
continuous shooting speed will decrease greatly.
 On: ContShtng (Continuous shooting priority)
Geared for continuous multiple-exposure shooting of a moving
subject. Continuous shooting is possible, but the following
operations are disabled during shooting: menu viewing, Live View
display, image review after image capture, image playback, and
undo last image (p.244).
Also, only the multiple-exposure image will be saved. (The single
exposures merged in the multiple-exposure image will not be
saved.)
You can also set multiple exposure with [z3: Multiple exposure].
238
P Multiple ExposuresN
[Multi-expos ctrl].
4 Set
 Select the desired multiple-exposure
control method, then press <0>.
 Additive
The exposure of each single exposure is added cumulatively. Based
on the [No. of exposures], set a negative exposure compensation.
Refer to the basic guide below to set a negative exposure
compensation.
Exposure Compensation Setting Guide for Multiple Exposures
Two exposures: -1 stop, three exposures: -1.5 stop, four exposures:
-2 stops
 Average
Based on the [No. of exposures], negative exposure compensation
is set automatically as you shoot multiple exposures. If you shoot
multiple exposures of the same scene, the exposure of the subject’s
background will be automatically controlled to obtain a standard
exposure.
 Bright/Dark
The brightness (or darkness) of the base image and the images to
be added are compared at the same position, and then the bright (or
dark) part will be left in the picture. Depending on the overlapping
colors, the colors may be mixed depending on the brightness (or
darkness) ratio of the compared images.
the [No. of exposures].
5 Set
 Select the number of exposures, then
press <0>.
 You can set it from 2 to 9 exposures.
239
P Multiple ExposuresN
the images to be saved.
6 Set
 To save all the single exposures and
the merged multiple-exposure image,
select [All images], then press <0>.
 To save only the merged multipleexposure image, select [Result
only], then press <0>.
[Continue Mult-exp].
7 Set
 Select either [1 shot only] or
[Continuously], then press <0>.
 With [1 shot only], multiple-exposure
shooting will be canceled
automatically after the shooting ends.
 With [Continuously], multipleexposure shooting continues until the
setting in step 3 is set to [Disable].
the first exposure.
8 Take
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
Remaining number of exposures
240
captured image will be displayed.
 The <P> icon will blink.
 The number of remaining exposures
is displayed in brackets [ ] in the
viewfinder or on the screen.
 Pressing the <x> button enables
you to view the captured image
(p.244).
P Multiple ExposuresN
subsequent exposures.
9 Shoot
 When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, the
merged multiple-exposure image will
be displayed.
 With Live View shooting, the multipleexposure images merged so far will
be displayed. By pressing the
<B> button, you can display only
the Live View image.
 After you shoot the set number of
exposures, multiple-exposure
shooting will exit. With continuous
shooting, after you finish shooting the
set number of exposures while
holding down the shutter button, the
shooting will stop.
 The image-recording quality, ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed
noise reduction and color space, etc. set for the first single exposure will
also be set for the subsequent exposures.
 [z5: Aspect ratio] will be fixed at 3:2.
 During multiple exposure shooting, the settings of [z1: Lens
aberration correction], [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer], and [z3:
Highlight tone priority] will be automatically switched to [Disable].
 If [z3: Picture Style] is set to [Auto], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
 If [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive] are both set, the image displayed during
shooting may look noisy. However, when you finish shooting the set
number of exposures, noise reduction will be applied and the final
multiple-exposure image will be less noisy.
 If you perform Live View shooting while [On:ContShtng] is set, the Live
View function will stop automatically after the first shot is taken. From the
second shot onward, shoot while looking through the viewfinder.
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set, you can press the <x> button to view the
multiple exposures taken so far or delete the last single exposure (p.244).
241
P Multiple ExposuresN
 With multiple exposures, the more exposures there are, the more
noticeable the noise, irregular colors, and banding will be. Also, as noise
increases with higher ISO speeds, shooting at low ISO speeds is
recommended.
 If [Additive] is set, the image processing after taking the multiple
exposures will take time. (The access lamp will light up for longer than
usual.)
 If you perform Live View shooting while [On:Func/Ctrl] and [Additive]
are both set, the Live View function will stop automatically when the
multiple-exposure shooting ends.
 In step 9, the brightness and noise of the multiple-exposure image
displayed during Live View shooting will be different from the final
multiple-exposure image recorded.
 If [On:ContShtng] is set, let go of the shutter button after shooting the
set number of exposures.
 Doing any of the following will cancel the multiple-exposure shooting: Set
the power switch to <2>, replace the battery, replace the card, or
switch to movie shooting.
 If you switch the shooting mode to <A> or <w/x/y> while shooting,
multiple-exposure shooting will end.
 If you connect the camera to a computer or printer, multiple-exposure
shooting will not be possible. If you connect the camera to a computer or
printer during shooting, multiple-exposure shooting will stop.
242
P Multiple ExposuresN
Merging Multiple Exposures with an Image Recorded on the Card
You can select an image recorded on the card as the first single
exposure. The original of the selected image will remain intact.
You can only select 1 images. You cannot select 41/61 or
JPEG images.
1
Select [Select image for multi. expo.].
 The images on the card will be
displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be used as the first single
exposure, then press <0>.
 Select [OK].
 The file number of the selected image
will be displayed at the bottom of the
screen.
the picture.
3 Take
 When you select the first image, the
number of remaining exposures as set
with [No. of exposures] will decrease
by 1. For example, if [No. of
exposures] is 3, you can shoot two
exposures.
 The following cannot be selected as the first single exposure: Images
shot with [z3: Highlight tone priority] set to [Enable], images whose
[Aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [3:2] (p.295), and images
having cropping information (p.443).
 [Disable] will be applied for [z1: Lens aberration correction] and
[z3: Highlight tone priority] regardless of the settings of the RAW
image selected as the first single exposure.
 The ISO speed, Picture Style, high ISO speed noise reduction, and color space,
etc. set for the first 1 image will also apply for the subsequent images.
 If [z3: Picture Style] is Auto for the RAW image selected as the first
single exposure, Standard will be applied for shooting.
 You cannot select an image taken with another camera.
243
P Multiple ExposuresN
 You can also select a 1 multiple-exposure image as the first single
exposure.
 If you select [Deselect img], the selected image will be canceled.
Checking and Deleting Multiple Exposures During Shooting
When [On:Func/Ctrl] is set and you
have not finished shooting the set
number of exposures, you can press the
<x> button to view the merged
multiple-exposure image so far. You can
check how it looks and the exposure.
(Not possible when [On:ContShtng] is
set.)
If you press the <L> button, the
operations possible during multipleexposure shooting will be displayed.
Operation
Description
q Undo last image
Deletes the last image you shot (shoot another
image). The number of remaining exposures
will increase by 1.
W Save and exit
If [Save source imgs: All images] is set, all of
the single exposures and the merged multipleexposure image will be saved before exiting.
If [Save source imgs: Result only] is set, only
the multiple-exposure image merged so far will
be saved before exiting.
r Exit without saving
None of the images will be saved before
exiting.
2 Return to previous screen
The screen before you pressed the <L> button
will reappear.
During multiple-exposure shooting, you can only play back multipleexposure images.
244
P Multiple ExposuresN
FAQ
 Are there any restrictions on the image-recording quality?
All JPEG image-recording quality settings can be selected. If 41
or 61 is set, the merged multiple-exposure will be a 1 image.
Image-Recording
Quality Setting
Single Exposures
Merged MultipleExposure
JPEG
JPEG
JPEG
1
1
1
41/61
41/61
1
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
1+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
41/61+JPEG
1+JPEG
 Can I merge images recorded on the card?
With [Select image for multi. expo.], you can select the first single
exposure from the images recorded on the card (p.243). Note that
you cannot merge multiple images already recorded on the card.
 Are multiple exposures possible with Live View shooting?
With [On:Func/Ctrl] set, you can shoot multiple exposures with Live
View shooting (p.285). Note that [z5: Aspect ratio] will be fixed at
[3:2].
 What file numbers are used for saving merged multiple-exposures?
If all images are set to be saved, the merged multiple-exposure
image file number will be the serial number coming after the file
number of the final single exposure used to create the merged
multiple-exposure image.
 Will auto power off take effect during multiple-exposure shooting?
As long as [52: Auto power off] is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the power will turn off automatically after 30 min. of nonoperation. If the auto power off takes effect, multiple-exposure
shooting will end, and multiple-exposure settings will be canceled.
Before starting the multiple-exposure shooting, the auto power off
will take effect as set with the camera, and multiple-exposure
settings will be canceled.
245
2 Mirror LockupN
Although using the self-timer or a remote switch can prevent camera
shake, using mirror lockup to prevent camera vibrations (mirror shock)
can also help when you use a super telephoto lens or shoot close ups
(macro photography).
1
Set [Mirror lockup] to [Enable].
 Under the [z4] tab, select [Mirror
lockup], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
on the subject, then press
2 Focus
the shutter button completely.
 The mirror will swing up.
3
Press the shutter button
completely again.
 The picture is taken and the mirror
goes back down.
 In very bright light, such as at the beach or a ski slope on a sunny day,
take the picture promptly after mirror lockup.
 Do not point the camera toward the sun. The sun’s heat can scorch and
damage the shutter curtains.
 During mirror lockup, shooting function settings and menu operations,
etc. are disabled.
246
Using the Eyepiece Cover
 Even if the drive mode is set to continuous shooting, only one shot can be taken.
 You can also use the self-timer or bulb timer with mirror lockup.
 If 30 seconds elapse after the mirror has locked up, it will go back down
automatically. Pressing the shutter button completely locks up the mirror
again.
 For mirror lockup, using a tripod and Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold
separately) or Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) is
recommended (p.248).
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.248). Setting the
remote controller to a 2-sec. delay is recommended.
Using the Eyepiece Cover
When you use the self-timer, bulb, or a remote switch and do not look
through the viewfinder, stray light entering the viewfinder can cause the
picture to look dark. To prevent this, use the eyepiece cover (p.33)
attached to the camera strap.
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, attaching the eyepiece
cover is unnecessary.
1
Detach the eyecup.
 While grasping both sides of the
eyecup, slide it upward to detach it.
the eyepiece cover.
2 Attach
 Slide the eyepiece cover down into
the eyepiece groove to attach it.
 After you finish shooting, detach the
eyepiece cover and attach the
eyecup.
247
F Using a Remote Switch
You can connect the Remote Switch RS-80N3 (sold separately) or
Timer Remote Controller TC-80N3 (sold separately) or any EOS
accessory equipped with an N3-type terminal to the camera for
shooting (p.478).
To operate the accessory, refer to its instruction manual.
1 Open the terminal cover.
the plug to the remote
2 Connect
control terminal.
 Connect the plug as shown in the
illustration.
 To disconnect the plug, grasp the
silver part and pull.
R Remote Control Shooting
With Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately), you
can shoot remotely up to approx. 5 meters/16.4 feet
from the camera. You can either shoot immediately or
use a 2-sec. delay.
You can also use Remote Controller RC-1 and RC-5.
1 Focus on the subject.
the lens’s focus mode switch
2 Set
to <MF>.
 You can also shoot with <f>.
3 Press the <o> button. (9)
248
R Remote Control Shooting
the self-timer.
4 Select
 While looking at the LCD panel or
through the viewfinder, turn the <5>
dial to select <Q> or <k>.
the remote controller’s
5 Press
transmit button.
Remote
control
sensor
 Point the remote controller toward the
camera’s remote control sensor, and
press the transmit button.
 The self-timer lamp lights up and the
picture is taken.
 Fluorescent or LED lighting may cause camera misoperation by
triggering the shutter inadvertently. Try to keep the camera away from
such light sources.
 If you point a remote controller for a TV set toward the camera and
operate it, it may cause camera misoperation by triggering the shutter
inadvertently.
Remote control shooting is also possible with devices such as an EX-series
Speedlite equipped with a remote-release function.
249
H Interval Timer Shooting
With the interval timer, you can set the shooting interval and the number
of shots. The camera will repeat taking one shot with the set interval
until the set number of shots are taken.
1
Select [Interval timer].
 Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
<A>), select [Interval timer], then
press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 Select [Enable], then press <B>
button.
the interval and number of
3 Set
shots.
 Select the hour, minute, second, or
number of shots.
 Press <0> so <r> is displayed.
 Set the desired number, then press
<0> (Returns to <s>).
 Interval
Settable from [00:00:01] to [99:59:59].
 No. of shots
Settable from [01] to [99]. If you set [00], the camera will keep
shooting until you stop the interval timer.
250
H Interval Timer Shooting
No. of shots
Interval
Interval timer
[OK].
4 Select
 The interval timer settings will be
displayed on the menu screen.
 <H> will be displayed on the LCD
panel.
the picture.
5 Take
 Shooting will start according to the
interval timer settings.
 During interval timer shooting,
<H> will blink.
 After the set number of shots are
taken, the interval timer shooting will
stop and be automatically canceled.
 Using a tripod is recommended.
 Taking test shots is recommended.
 After the interval timer shooting starts, you can still press the shutter
button completely to take a picture as usual. However, from 5 sec. before
the next interval timer shooting, the shooting function settings, menu
operation, image playback, and other operations will be suspended, and
the camera will be ready to shoot.
 If a picture is taken or an image is being processed as the next interval
timer shooting, that interval timer shooting will be canceled. This will
make the number of interval timer images captured lower than the set
number of shots.
 Interval timer shooting can be combined with AEB, WB bracketing,
multiple exposures, and HDR mode.
 You can stop the interval timer shooting by selecting [Disable] or turning
the power switch to <2>.
251
H Interval Timer Shooting
 If the lens’s focus mode switch is set to <AF>, the camera will not shoot
when focus is not achieved. Setting it to <MF> and focus manually first is
recommended.
 Live View shooting, movie shooting, bulb exposures, or mirror lockup
cannot be performed with interval timer shooting.
 During interval timer shooting, auto power off will not take effect. For
prolonged interval timer shooting, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold
separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) to power the
camera is recommended.
 If a long exposure or shutter speed longer than the shooting interval is
set, the camera cannot shoot at the set interval. The camera will thereby
shoot fewer shots than the number set for interval timer shooting. Also,
the number of shots may decrease when the shutter speed and the
shooting interval are almost the same or close.
 If card recording time is longer than the set shooting interval, due to card
performance or shooting settings, etc., the camera may not shoot at the
set shooting interval.
 If you use flash with interval timer shooting, set an interval longer than
the flash’s recycling time. Otherwise, if the interval is too short, the flash
may not fire.
 If the shooting interval is too short, the camera may not take a picture or
capture an image without autofocusing.
 Interval timer shooting will be canceled and reset to [Disable] if you do
any of the following: Set the power switch to <2>, display the Live
View or movie shooting screen, set the shooting mode to <F> or a
Custom shooting mode, or use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.534).
 After interval timer shooting starts, you cannot use remote control
shooting (p.248) or remote-release shooting with an EOS-dedicated,
external Speedlite.
 During interval timer shooting, if your eye will not remain on the
viewfinder eyepiece, attach the eyepiece cover (p.247). Stray light
entering the viewfinder can throw off the exposure.
252
7
Flash Photography
This chapter explains how to shoot with the built-in flash
and external Speedlites (EX-series, sold separately),
how to set flash settings with the camera’s menu
screen, and how to use the built-in flash for wireless
flash shooting.
 Flash cannot be used with movie shooting. It will not fire.
 AEB cannot be used with flash.
253
D Using the Built-in Flash
In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F>
modes, just press the <D> button to raise
the built-in flash for flash photography.
Before shooting, check that [D] is
displayed in the viewfinder. After shooting,
push the built-in flash back down with your
fingers until it clicks into place.
In the <A> mode, the built-in flash will be raised and fire automatically
in low-light or backlit conditions. You can also enable or disable the
flash firing.
The table below shows the shutter speed and aperture settings that will
be used with flash.
Shooting Mode
Shutter Speed
Aperture
A
Automatically set
Automatically set
d
Automatically set
(1/250 sec. - 1/60 sec.)
Automatically set
Automatically set
s
Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
f
Automatically set
(1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
Manually set
a
Manually set (1/250 sec. - 30 sec.)
Manually set
F
Exposure continues while you hold
down the shutter button or while
the bulb timer is operating.
Manually set
Flash Photography in the <f> Mode
To obtain a correct flash exposure, the flash output will be set automatically
(autoflash exposure) to match the manually-set aperture. The shutter speed will
be set automatically between 1/250 sec. - 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness.
In low light, the main subject is exposed with the automatic flash, and the
background is exposed with a slow shutter speed set automatically. Both the
subject and background look properly exposed (automatic slow-speed flash
sync). If you are handholding the camera, keep it steady to prevent camera
shake. Using a tripod is recommended.
To prevent a slow shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash
sync. speed in Av mode] to [1/250-1/60 sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)]
(p.263).
254
D Using the Built-in Flash
Effective Range of Built-in Flash
(Approx. in meters/feet)
ISO Speed
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM
EF-S15-85mm f/3-5.6 IS USM
Wide Angle: f/3.5
Telephoto: f/5.6
ISO 100
1-3.1 / 3.3-10.3
1-2.0 / 3.3-6.4
ISO 200
1-4.4 / 3.3-14.6
1-2.8 / 3.3-9.1
ISO 400
1-6.3 / 3.3-20.6
1-3.9 / 3.3-12.9
1-5.6 / 3.3-18.2
ISO 800
1.1-8.9 / 3.6-29.2
ISO 1600
1.6-12.6 / 5.2-41.2
1-7.9 / 3.3-25.8
ISO 3200
2.2-17.8 / 7.3-58.3
1.4-11.1 / 4.6-36.5
2.0-15.7 / 6.4-51.6
ISO 6400
3.1-25.1 / 10.3-82.5
ISO 12800
4.4-35.6 / 14.6-116.7
2.8-22.2 / 9.1-72.9
ISO 16000
5.0-39.9 / 16.4-130.9
3.1-24.9 / 10.2-81.8
H1
(equivalent to ISO 25600)
6.3-50.3 / 20.6-165.0
3.9-31.4 / 12.9-103.1
H2
(equivalent to ISO 51200)
8.9-71.1 / 29.2-233.3
5.6-44.4 / 18.2-145.8
 When you use the built-in flash, detach any lens hood and keep at least
1 meter/3.3 feet away from the subject.
 If a lens hood is attached or if the subject is too close, the built-in flash
will be obstructed and the bottom of the picture may look dark.
 Do not perform flash photography when the built-in flash is held down
with your finger or not fully raised for some other reason.
If you use a super telephoto lens or large-aperture lens and the bottom of
the picture looks dark, using an external Speedlite (sold separately, p.259) is
recommended.
255
D Using the Built-in Flash
3 Red-eye Reduction
Using the red-eye reduction lamp when taking a flash picture can
reduce red eye.
1
Select [Red-eye reduc.].
 Under the [z4] tab (the [z2] tab in
<A>), select [Red-eye reduc.], then
press <0>.
[Enable].
2 Select
 For flash photography, when you
press the shutter button halfway, the
red-eye reduction lamp will be
emitted.
 The red-eye reduction feature is most effective when the subject looks at
the red-eye reduction lamp, the room is well lit, and you are close to the
subject.
 When you press the shutter button halfway, the scale
display on the bottom of the viewfinder will shrink and
turn off. For best results, take the picture after this
scale display turns off.
 The effectiveness of red-eye reduction varies depending on the subject.
256
D Using the Built-in Flash
y Flash Exposure CompensationN
Set flash exposure compensation if the flash exposure of the subject
does not come out as desired. You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop increments.
1
Press the <m> button. (9)
the exposure compensation
2 Set
amount.
Increased exposure for a brighter image
Decreased exposure for a darker image
 While looking at the LCD panel or
through the viewfinder, turn the <5>
dial.
 To make the flash exposure brighter,
turn the <5> dial to the right
(increased exposure). To make the
flash exposure darker, turn the <5>
dial to the left (decreased exposure).
 After shooting, set the exposure
compensation amount back to zero.
 If [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] (p.175) is set to any setting other than
[Disable], the image may still look bright even if a decreased flash
exposure compensation is set.
 If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite (sold
separately, p.259), you cannot set the flash exposure compensation with
the camera. If it is set with both the camera and Speedlite, the
Speedlite’s setting overrides the camera’s.
 The exposure compensation amount will remain in effect even after you
set the power switch to <2>.
 You can also set flash exposure compensation with [Built-in flash
settings] under [z1: Flash control] (p.262).
 The camera can also be used to set the EOS-dedicated, external Speedlite’s
flash exposure compensation in the same way as with the built-in flash.
257
D Using the Built-in Flash
A FE LockN
FE (flash exposure) lock obtains and locks the appropriate flash
exposure for the desired part of the image.
1
Press the <D> button.
 The built-in flash will be raised.
 Press the shutter button halfway and
look through the viewfinder to check
that the <D> icon is lit.
2 Focus on the subject.
the <B> button. (8)
3 Press
 Aim the viewfinder center over the
subject where you want to lock the
flash exposure, then press the
<B> button.
 The flash will fire a preflash and the
required flash output is calculated
and retained in memory.
 In the viewfinder, “FEL” is displayed for
a moment and <d> will light up. Also,
the flash exposure level indicator will
be displayed as shown on the left.
 Each time you press the <B> button,
a preflash is fired and the flash output is
calculated and retained in memory.
the picture.
4 Take
 Compose the shot and press the
shutter button completely.
 The flash is fired when the picture is taken.
 If the subject is too far away and beyond the effective flash range, the <D>
icon will blink. Move closer to the subject and repeat steps 2 to 4.
 FE lock is not possible with Live View shooting.
258
D Using an External Speedlite
EOS-dedicated, EX-series Speedlites
Flash photography with EX-series Speedlite (sold separately) is as easy
as with built-in flash.
For detailed instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s
instruction manual. This camera is a Type-A camera that can use all
the features of EX-series Speedlites.
To set the flash functions and flash Custom Functions with the camera’s
menu, see pages 262-271.
Shoe-mount Speedlites
Macro Lites
 Flash exposure compensation
Set this in the same way as for the built-in flash. See page 257.
 FE lock
The setting procedure is basically the same as for the built-in flash.
See page 258.
If it is difficult to achieve focus with autofocus, the EOS-dedicated, external
Speedlite will automatically emit the AF-assist beam as necessary.
259
D Using an External Speedlite
Canon Speedlites Other Than the EX-series
 With an EZ/E/EG/ML/TL-series Speedlite set to A-TTL or TTL
autoflash mode, the flash can be fired at full output only.
Set the camera’s shooting mode to <a> (manual exposure) or
<f> (aperture-priority AE) and adjust the aperture setting before
shooting.
 When using a Speedlite that has manual flash mode, shoot in the
manual flash mode.
Non-Canon Flash Units
Sync Speed
The camera can synchronize with non-Canon compact flash units at
1/250 sec. and slower speeds. With large studio flash units, be sure to
test the flash synchronization before shooting with the sync speed set
within approx. 1/60 sec. to 1/30 sec. The flash duration of such units is
longer than that of compact flash units and varies depending on the
model.
PC Terminal
 The camera’s PC terminal can be
used with flash units having a sync
cord. The PC terminal is threaded to
prevent inadvertent disconnection.
 The camera’s PC terminal has no
polarity. You can connect any sync
cord regardless of its polarity.
Cautions for Live View Shooting
If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.297). The flash will not fire if it is set to
[Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
260
D Using an External Speedlite
 If the camera is used with a flash unit or flash accessory dedicated to
another camera brand, the camera may not operate properly and
malfunction may result.
 Do not connect to the camera’s PC terminal any flash unit with an output
voltage of 250 V or more.
 Do not attach a high-voltage flash unit on the camera’s hot shoe. It may
not fire.
A flash unit attached to the camera’s hot shoe and a flash unit connected to
the PC terminal can both be used at the same time.
261
3 Setting the FlashN
With the built-in flash or an EX-series, external Speedlite compatible
with flash function settings, you can use the camera’s menu screen to
set flash functions and the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions.
If you use an external Speedlite, attach the Speedlite to the camera
and turn on the Speedlite before setting the flash functions. For
details on the external Speedlite’s flash functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s instruction manual.
1
Select [Flash control].
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control], then press <0>.
 The Flash control screen will appear.
the desired item.
2 Select
 Select the item to be set, then press
<0>.
Flash Firing
To enable flash photography, set
[Enable]. To enable only the AF-assist
beam, set [Disable].
E-TTL II Flash Metering
For normal flash exposures, set it to
[Evaluative]. If [Average] is set, the
flash exposure will be averaged for the
entire metered area. Depending on the
scene, flash exposure compensation
may be necessary. This setting is for
advanced users.
262
3 Setting the FlashN
Flash Synchronization Speed in Av Mode
You can set the flash sync speed for
flash photography in the aperture-priority
AE (f) mode.

: Auto
The flash sync speed is set automatically within a range of 1/250
sec. to 30 sec. to suit the scene’s brightness. With an external
Speedlite, high-speed sync is also possible.

: 1/250-1/60sec. auto
Prevents a slow shutter speed from being set in low-light conditions.
It is effective for preventing subject blur and camera shake.
However, while the subject will be properly exposed with the flash,
the background may come out dark.

: 1/250 sec. (fixed)
The flash sync speed is fixed at 1/250 sec. This more effectively
prevents subject blur and camera shake than with [1/250-1/60sec.
auto]. However, in low light, the subject’s background will come out
darker than with [1/250-1/60sec. auto].
If [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] is set, high-speed sync is not
possible in the <f> mode with the external Speedlite.
263
3 Setting the FlashN
Displaying the Flash Function Setting Screen Directly
When you use the built-in flash or an
external, EX-series Speedlite compatible
with flash function settings, you can
press the <D> button to directly display
the [Built-in flash settings] or [External
flash func. setting] screen without first
displaying the menu screen.
 With built-in flash
Press the <D> button twice.
 Press the button again, and the builtin flash will be raised.
 Press the button again to display the
[Built-in flash settings] screen.
 With external Speedlite
Press the <D> button.
 With the external Speedlite turned on,
press the <D> button to display the
[External flash func. setting]
screen.
 When you press the <D> button to display the flash function setting
screen, you cannot set [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], or [Flash sync.
speed in Av mode]. Set these functions with [z1: Flash control]
instead.
 If [Flash firing] is set to [Disable] and you press the <D> button, the
[Flash control] screen will appear (p.262).
264
3 Setting the FlashN
Built-in Flash Settings
 Flash mode
Normally, set this to [E-TTL II]. This
enables autoexposure shooting with the
built-in flash.
To set the flash output level manually,
select [Manual flash].
Select [2flash output], then set the
flash output level to within 1/1 - 1/128
(1/3-stop increments) before shooting.
This mode is for advanced users.
With [MULTI flash] selected, you can
use a slow shutter speed to capture
multiple moments of a moving subject in
one image.
First set the [2flash output],
[Frequency], and [Flash count], then
shoot. This mode is for advanced users.
 To prevent the flash from damage due to overheating, do not use MULTI
flash more than ten consecutive times. If you use MULTI flash 10 times,
allow the flash to rest for at least 10 min. before firing the flash again.
 Flash will be output at 1/128 - 1/4 for MULTI flash.
265
3 Setting the FlashN
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [1st curtain] so that
the flash fires immediately after the
exposure starts.
If [2nd curtain] is set, the flash will fire right before the shutter closes.
When this is combined with a slow shutter speed, you can create a trail
of light such as from car headlights at night with a more natural feel.
With second-curtain synchronization, two flashes will be fired: once
when you press the shutter button completely, and once immediately
before the exposure ends.
 2 Flash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
 Wireless functions
With wireless flash photography (via
optical transmission), you can use the
built-in flash to wirelessly control external
Speedlites.
For details, see “Using Wireless Flash”
on page 272.
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [2nd curtain] is set.
266
3 Setting the FlashN
External Flash Function Settings
The screen display and setting options will vary depending on the
external Speedlite model, current flash mode, Speedlite’s Custom
Function settings, etc.
To see which functions your Speedlite (sold separately) provides, refer
to the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Sample display
Wireless functions/
Flash ratio control
Flash mode
Shutter
synchronization
Flash zoom
(Flash coverage)
Flash exposure
bracketing
Flash exposure
compensation
 Flash mode
You can select the flash mode to suit your desired flash shooting.
[E-TTL II flash metering] is the standard
mode of EX-series Speedlites for
automatic flash shooting.
[Manual flash] is for setting the
Speedlite’s [Flash output level]
yourself.
Regarding other flash modes, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the functions.
267
3 Setting the FlashN
 Wireless functions / Flash ratio control
Wireless (multiple) flash shooting is
possible with radio or optical
transmission.
For details on wireless flash, refer to the
instruction manual of a Speedlite
compatible with the wireless flash
shooting.
With a macro flash (MR-14EX II, etc.)
compatible with external flash function
settings, you can set the flash ratio
between flash tubes or flash heads A
and B, or use wireless flash with slave
units.
For details on flash ratio control, refer to
the macro flash’s instruction manual.
 Flash zoom (Flash coverage)
With Speedlites having a zooming flash
head, you can set the flash coverage.
Normally, set this to [AUTO] so that the
camera will automatically set the flash
coverage to match the lens focal length.
268
3 Setting the FlashN
 Shutter synchronization
Normally, set this to [First-curtain
synchronization] so that the flash fires
immediately after the exposure starts.
If [Second-curtain synchronization] is set, the flash will fire right
before the shutter closes. When this is combined with a slow shutter
speed, you can create a trail of light such as from car headlights at night
with a more natural feel. With second-curtain synchronization, two
flashes will be fired: once when you press the shutter button completely,
and once immediately before the exposure ends.
If [High-speed synchronization] is set, the flash can be used at all
shutter speeds. This is especially effective for portraits using fill flash
when you want to give priority to the aperture setting.
 Flash exposure compensation
You can set flash exposure
compensation up to ±3 stops in 1/3-stop
increments.
For details, refer to the Speedlite’s
instruction manual.
 Flash exposure bracketing
While the flash output is changed
automatically, three shots are taken.
For details, refer to the instruction
manual of a Speedlite equipped with
flash exposure bracketing.
269
3 Setting the FlashN
When using second-curtain synchronization, set the shutter speed to 1/25
sec. or slower. If the shutter speed is 1/30 sec. or faster, first-curtain
synchronization will be applied automatically even if [Second-curtain
synchronization] is set.
 With an EX-series Speedlite not compatible with flash function settings,
you can only set the following: [Flash firing], [E-TTL II meter.], and
[Flash exposure compensation] under [External flash func. setting].
([Shutter synchronization] can also be set with certain EX-series
Speedlites.)
 If flash exposure compensation is set with an external Speedlite, you
cannot set the flash exposure compensation with the camera. If it is set
with both the camera and external Speedlite, the Speedlite’s setting
overrides the camera’s.
270
3 Setting the FlashN
External Speedlite Custom Function Settings
For details on the external Speedlite’s Custom Functions, refer to the
Speedlite’s (sold separately) instruction manual.
1
Select [External flash C.Fn
setting].
the desired functions.
2 Set
 Select the number, then press <0>.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
With an EX-series Speedlite, if the [Flash metering mode] Custom
Function is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the Speedlite will always
fire at full output.
Clear Settings
1 Select [Clear settings].
the settings to be cleared.
2 Select
 Select [Clear built-in flash set.],
[Clear external flash set.], or [Clear
ext. flash C.Fn set.], then press
<0>.
 On the confirmation dialog, select
[OK]. Then the flash settings or
Custom Function settings will all be
cleared.
The Speedlite’s Personal Function (P.Fn) cannot be set or canceled with the
camera’s [Flash control] screen. Set it with the Speedlite.
271
Using Wireless FlashN
The camera’s built-in flash can work as a master unit for Canon EXseries, external Speedlites having a wireless slave feature. It can
wirelessly trigger the Speedlite(s) to fire via optical transmission.
Be sure to read about wireless flash photography (optical transmission)
in the Speedlite’s instruction manual.
Slave Unit Settings and Position
Regarding your Speedlite (slave unit), refer to its instruction manual and
set it as follows. The settings other than the ones below for the slave
unit’s control are all set with the camera. Different types of slave units
can be used and controlled together.
(1) Set the external Speedlite as a slave unit.
(2) Set the external Speedlite’s transmission channel to the same
channel as set on the camera.*1
(3) For flash ratio control, set the slave unit’s firing group.
(4) Position the camera and slave unit(s) within the range shown
below.
(5) Face the slave unit’s wireless sensor toward the camera.*2
Example of Wireless Flash Set-up
Approx. 10 m
(32.8 ft.)
Indoors
Outdoors
Approx. 7 m
(23.0 ft.)
Approx. 80°
Approx. 5 m
(16.4 ft.)
272
Approx. 7 m
(23.0 ft.)
Using Wireless FlashN
*1: If the Speedlite does not have a transmission channel setting function, it
operates regardless of the channel set on the camera.
*2: In small rooms, the slave unit may work even if its wireless sensor does not
face the camera. The camera’s wireless signals can bounce off the walls and
be received by the slave unit. When using an EX-series Speedlite with fixed
flash head and wireless sensor, make sure it fires when you take pictures.
 Canceling the slave unit’s auto power off
To cancel the slave unit’s auto power off, press the camera’s
<B> button.
The camera’s master unit function cannot be used for wireless flash
shooting with radio transmission.
273
Using Wireless FlashN
Wireless Flash Shooting Configurations
The table below shows the possible configurations for wireless flash
shooting. Choose the configuration suiting the subject, shooting
conditions, the number of external Speedlites you use, etc.
External Speedlite
Setting
Built-in
A:B
C
Page
Quantity Flash Flash exp. Flash
Ratio
comp.
Wireless
Functions
Firing
Group
1 All
Single
-
-
-
p.275
0
Single
-
-
Used
p.277
0:3
-
Multiple
-
-
-
p.278
0
1 All
Multiple
Fully
Automatic Multiple
(E-TTL II Multiple
autoflash)
Multiple
Set
-
-
p.279
0
1(A:B)
Set
Set
-
p.280
0
1(A:B C)
-
-
Used
Set
-
Used
p.281
0+3
Multiple
Set
Set
Used
• Flash exposure compensation
• FE lock
0+3 1 All and 2
p.282
External Speedlite
Setting
A, B, C
Flash
Output
Built-in
Flash
Single/
Multiple
-
-
0
1 All
Multiple
Set
-
0
1(A:B:C)
Single/
Multiple
-
Used
0+3 1 All and 2
Multiple
Set
Used
0+3 1(A:B:C)2
Quantity
Manual
Flash
1(A:B)2
0+3 1(A:B C)2
Page
p.283
Wireless
Functions
Firing
Group
Even if the built-in flash is disabled in the camera settings, it will still
fire in order to control the slave unit via optical transmission. The flash
fired to control the slave unit may therefore appear in the picture depending
on the shooting conditions.
274
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite
This shows the most basic setup for
fully-automatic wireless flash shooting
with one external Speedlite.
Steps 1 to 4 and 6 apply to all wireless
flash shooting. Therefore, these steps
are omitted in other wireless flash
setups explained on the pages
hereafter.
On the menu screens, the <0/1>
icons refer to the external Speedlite, and
the <3/2> icons refer to the built-in
flash.
1
Press the <I> button to raise the
built-in flash.
 For wireless flash shooting, be sure
to raise the built-in flash.
[Flash control].
2 Select
 Under the [z1] tab, select [Flash
control].
3 Select [Built-in flash settings].
275
Using Wireless FlashN
4 Set [Flash mode] to [E-TTL II].
5 Set [Wireless func.] to [0].
[Channel].
6 Set
 Set the channel (1-4) to the same one
as the slave unit.
[Firing group] to [1All].
7 Set
 The slave unit may be set to any firing
group (A, B, or C).
a test flash.
8 Fire
 Check that the slave unit is ready to
fire, then while the [Built-in flash
settings] screen is displayed, press
the <B> button.
 The slave unit will fire.
the picture.
9 Take
 Set the camera and take the picture
in the same way as with normal flash
shooting.
 To terminate wireless flash shooting,
set [Wireless func.] to [Disable].
 Setting [E-TTL II meter.] to [Evaluative] is recommended.
 Wireless MULTI flash shooting is not possible.
276
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with One External Speedlite and
the Built-in Flash
This is fully automatic wireless flash
shooting with one external Speedlite and
the built-in flash.
You can change the flash ratio between
the external Speedlite and built-in flash
to adjust how the shadows look on the
subject.
1
Set [Wireless func.] to [0:3].
the desired flash ratio and
2 Set
take the picture.
 Select [1:2] and set the flash ratio
within 8:1 to 1:1. Setting a flash ratio
to the right of 1:1 is not possible.
 If the built-in flash does not fire sufficient light, set a higher ISO speed
(p.154).
 The 8:1 to 1:1 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 stops (1/2-stop
increments).
277
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with Multiple External Speedlites
Multiple Speedlite slave units can be treated as one flash unit or
separated into slave groups whose flash ratio can be set.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups with multiple
Speedlites.
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
Wireless func. :0
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
 [1All] Using multiple slave Speedlites as one flash unit
Convenient when you need a large flash
output. All the slave units will fire at the
same output and be controlled to obtain
a standard exposure.
No matter which firing group (A, B, or C)
the slave units belong to, they will all fire
as one group.
1 Set [Firing group] to [1All].
2 Take the picture.
278
Using Wireless FlashN
 [1(A:B)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups
A
You can divide the slave units into
groups A and B, and change the flash
ratio to obtain the desired lighting effect.
Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual and set one slave unit to firing
group A and the other to firing group B.
Position the Speedlites as shown in the
illustration.
B
1
Set [Firing group] to [1(A:B)].
the A:B flash ratio and shoot.
2 Set
 Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
The 8:1 to 1:1 to 1:8 flash ratio is equivalent to 3:1 to 1:1 to 1:3 stops (1/2stop increments).
279
Using Wireless FlashN
 [1(A:B C)] Multiple slave units in multiple groups
This is a variant of the [1(A:B)] setup.
This setup has group C eliminating the
C
background shadows created by groups
A and B.
Refer to the Speedlite’s instruction
manual and set three slave units to firing
A
B
group A, B, and C, respectively. Position
the Speedlites as shown in the
illustration.
1
Set [Firing group] to [1(A:B C)].
the A:B flash ratio and the
2 Set
flash exposure compensation
amount for C, then shoot.
 Select [A:B fire ratio] and set the
flash ratio.
 Select [Grp.C exp. comp.] and set
the flash exposure compensation
amount.
 If [Firing group] is set to [1(A:B)], the slave units in firing group C will
not fire.
 If firing group C is pointed toward the main subject, overexposure may
result.
280
Using Wireless FlashN
Fully Automatic Shooting with the Built-in Flash and
Multiple External Speedlites
The built-in flash can also be added to wireless flash shooting explained
on pages 278-280.
The basic settings are shown below. By changing the [Firing group]
setting, you can shoot with various wireless flash setups of multiple
Speedlites complemented with the built-in flash.
1
Basic settings:
Flash mode
: E-TTL II
Wireless func. :0+3
Channel
: (Same as slave units)
[Firing group].
2 Set
 Select one of the following: [1All
and2], [1(A:B)2], or [1(A:B
C)2].
 With [1(A:B)2], set the A:B flash
ratio and shoot.
 With [1(A:B C)2], set the A:B flash
ratio and flash exposure compensation
amount for C, then shoot.
C
A
[1All and2]
B
[1(A:B)2]
A
B
[1(A:B C)2]
281
Using Wireless FlashN
Creative Wireless Flash Shooting
 Flash exposure compensation
When [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], flash exposure
compensation can be set. The flash exposure compensation
settings that can be set (see below) vary depending on the
[Wireless func.] and [Firing group] settings.
Flash exposure compensation
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash and all the
external Speedlites.
2 exp. comp.
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to the built-in flash.
1 exp. comp.
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to all the external Speedlites.
A, B exp. comp.
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to both groups A and B.
Grp.C exp. comp.
The flash exposure compensation is
applied to group C.
 FE lock
If [Flash mode] is set to [E-TTL II], you can press the <B>
button to perform FE lock (p.258).
282
Using Wireless FlashN
Manual Setting of the Flash Output for Wireless Flash Shooting
When [Flash mode] is set to [Manual flash], flash exposure can be set
manually. The flash output settings that can be set ([1 flash output],
[Group A output], etc.) vary depending on the [Wireless func.] setting
(see below).
Wireless func.: 0
 Firing group: 1All
The manual flash output setting is
applied to all the external Speedlites.
 Firing group: 1(A:B:C)
You can divide the slave units into
Groups A, B, and C and set the flash
output separately for each group.
Wireless func.: 0+3
 Firing group: 1All and2
You can set the flash output
separately for the external
Speedlite(s) and built-in flash.
 Firing group: 1(A:B:C)2
You can divide the slave units into
Groups A, B, and C and set the flash
output separately for each group. You
can also set the flash output for the
built-in flash.
Built-in flash will be output at 1/4 - 1/128 when 0+3 is set.
283
284
8
Shooting with the LCD Monitor
(Live View Shooting)
You can shoot while viewing the
picture on the camera’s LCD
monitor. This is called “Live View
shooting”.
Live View shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <A>.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot while viewing the
LCD monitor, camera shake can cause blurred images.
Using a tripod is recommended.
Remote Live View Shooting
With EOS Utility (EOS software, p.534) installed on your computer,
you can connect the camera to the computer and shoot remotely
while viewing the computer screen. For details, refer to the EOS
Utility Instruction Manual.
285
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
1
Set the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch to <A>.
the Live View image.
2 Display
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The Live View image will closely
match the brightness level of the
actual image you capture.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method (p.299).
the picture.
4 Take
 Press the shutter button completely.
 The picture is taken and the captured
image is displayed on the LCD monitor.
 When the playback display ends, the
camera will return to Live View
shooting automatically.
 Press the <0> button to exit the
Live View shooting.
 The image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the image-recording
quality is set to JPEG 73).
 In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> shooting mode, you can check the
depth of field by pressing the depth-of-field preview button.
 During continuous shooting, the exposure set for the first shot will also
be applied to subsequent shots.
 You can also use a remote controller (sold separately, p.248) for Live View shooting.
286
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Enabling Live View Shooting
Set [z5: Live View shoot.] (the [z3]
tab in <A>) to [Enable].
Number of Possible Shots with Live View Shooting
Temperature
Room Temperature
(23°C / 73°F)
Low Temperatures
(0°C / 32°F)
No Flash
Approx. 270 shots
Approx. 260 shots
50% Flash Use
Approx. 250 shots
Approx. 240 shots
 The figures above are based on a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N and
CIPA (Camera & Imaging Products Association) testing standards.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, continuous Live View shooting is
possible for approx. 2 hr. 20 min. at room temperature (23°C / 73°F), or for
approx. 2 hr. 10 min. at low temperatures (0°C / 32°F).
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 General Live View Shooting Cautions are on pages 310-311.
 You can also focus by pressing the <p> button.
 When flash is used, there will be two shutter sounds, but only one shot
will be taken. Also, the time it takes to take the picture after you press the
shutter button completely will be slightly longer than with viewfinder
shooting.
 If the camera is not operated for a prolonged period, the power will turn
off automatically after the time set in [52: Auto power off] (p.69). If [52:
Auto power off] is set to [Disable], Live View shooting will end
automatically after 30 min. (camera power remains on).
 With the HDMI cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
Live View image on a TV screen (p.385). Note that no sound will be
output. If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [53:
Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the
video standard of your TV set).
287
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will
change.
Maximum burst
Possible shots
Battery check
Temperature warning
Number of remaining multiple exposures
HDR shooting/
Multiple exposures/
Multi Shot
Noise Reduction
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Histogram display
Card for recording/
playback
Shooting mode
Image-recording
quality
AF method
Drive mode
White balance/
White balance
correction
Metering mode/
Flash firing
(A mode)
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
AE lock
Wi-Fi function*
Exposure simulation
Shutter speed
AEB/FEB
Signal strength*
ISO speed
Flash ready/Flash off
Aperture
Flash exposure compensation
Exposure compensation
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Highlight tone priority
GPS connection indicator
Digital compass
Exposure level indicator
* Refer to the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual.
288
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
 The histogram can be displayed when [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable]
(p.296) is set.
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button
(p.75). Note that if the AF method is set to [u+Tracking] or the camera
is connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable, the electronic level cannot
be displayed.
 When <g> is displayed in white, it indicates that the Live View image
brightness is close to what the captured image will look like.
 If <g> is blinking, it indicates that the Live View image is displayed at
a brightness that differs from the actual shooting result because of lowor bright-light conditions. However, the actual image recorded will reflect
the exposure setting. Note that the noise may be more noticeable than
the actual image recorded.
 If Multi Shot Noise Reduction, bulb exposure, or flash is used, the
<g> icon and histogram will be grayed out (for your reference). The
histogram may not be properly displayed in low- or bright-light
conditions.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems
or very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
289
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
Scene Icons
In the <A> shooting mode, the camera detects the scene type and
sets everything automatically to suit the scene. The detected scene
type is indicated on the upper left of the screen. For certain scenes or
shooting conditions, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Portrait*1
Movement
Background
Non-portrait
Nature and
Outdoor
Scene
Close*2
Movement
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky
Included
Light blue
Backlit
*3
Sunset
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark
With
Tripod
Dark blue
*4*5
*3
*4*5
*3
*1:Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2:Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3:The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
*4:Displayed when all the following conditions apply: The shooting scene is dark, it
is a night scene, and the camera is mounted on a tripod.
290
A Shooting with the LCD Monitor
*5:Displayed with any of the lenses below:
• EF-S18-55mm f/3.5-5.6 IS II
• EF-S55-250mm f/4-5.6 IS II
• EF300mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF400mm f/2.8L IS II USM
• EF500mm f/4L IS II USM
• EF600mm f/4L IS II USM
• Image Stabilizer lenses marketed in 2012 or later.
*4+*5:If the conditions in both *4 and *5 are met, the shutter speed will slow down.
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the Live View image,
so you can see what the captured image will look like.
The Live View image will automatically show the effects of the settings
listed below.
Final Image Simulation During Live View Shooting
 Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.











White balance
White balance correction
Metering mode
Exposure (with [z5: Expo. simulation: Enable] set)
Depth of field (with depth-of-field preview button ON)
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Highlight tone priority
Aspect ratio (image area confirmation)
Cautions for distortion correction during Live View shooting are on page
183.
291
Shooting Function Settings
B/q/R/f/y/i/A Settings
While the Live View image is displayed, if you press the <n>,
<o>, <m>, or <b> button, the setting screen will appear on
the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to set the
respective shooting function.
 By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set WB shift and WB bracketing.
When you set w (Partial metering) or r (Spot metering), a metering circle
will be displayed in the center.
292
Shooting Function Settings
Q Quick Control
In the <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> modes, the AF method, Drive
mode, Metering mode, Recording/playing back card and image
quality, White balance, Picture Style, and Auto Lighting Optimizer can
be set.
In the <A> mode, you can set the items in bold and the flash
firing.
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
1
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
 To set the RAW image-recording
quality, press <0>.
 To select the card for recording/
playing back, WB Shift/Bracketing, or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
 Press <0> to finalize the setting and
return to Live View shooting.
293
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <A>, the Live
View shooting menu options will appear
under the [z5] and [z6] tabs (the
[z3] tab in <A>).
The settable functions on this menu screen apply only to Live View
shooting. They do not work with viewfinder shooting (settings
become invalid).
 Live View shooting
You can set Live View shooting to [Enable] or [Disable].
 AF method
You can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single]. See pages 299-307 for the AF method.
 Continuous AF
The default setting is [Disable].
The camera attains rough focus on the subject continuously. This
makes it quicker to achieve focus when you press the shutter button
halfway. If [Enable] is set, the lens will operate constantly and
consume more battery power. This will reduce the number of
possible shots due to shorter battery life.
If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during
Continuous AF, first stop Live View shooting.
294
3 Menu Function Settings
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
 Aspect ratioN
The image’s aspect ratio can be set to [3:2], [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1].
The area surrounding the Live View image is masked in black when
one of the following aspect ratios is set: [4:3] [16:9] [1:1].
JPEG images will be saved with the set aspect ratio. RAW images
will always be saved with the [3:2] aspect ratio. Since aspect ratio
information is appended to the RAW image, the image can be
generated in the set aspect ratio when you process the RAW image
with the camera or Digital Photo Professional (p.534). When you
display RAW images on the camera, aspect ratio lines will be
displayed to show the image area.
Image
Quality
3
4
a
b
c
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
4864x3648
5472x3072*
3648x3648
5472x3648
(20.0 megapixels) (17.7 megapixels) (16.8 megapixels) (13.3 megapixels)
3648x2432
3248x2432*
3648x2048*
2432x2432
(8.9 megapixels) (7.9 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels) (5.9 megapixels)
2736x1824
2432x1824
2736x1536*
1824x1824
(5.0 megapixels) (4.4 megapixels) (4.2 megapixels) (3.3 megapixels)
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
295
3 Menu Function Settings
 The image-recording quality settings marked with an asterisk do not
match the respective aspect ratio exactly.
 The recorded image areas of the aspect ratios marked with an asterisk
may be slightly different from what are displayed. Check the captured
images on the LCD monitor when shooting.
 If you use a different camera to directly print images shot with this
camera in the 1:1 aspect ratio, the images may not be correctly printed.
 Exposure simulationN
Exposure simulation simulates and displays how the brightness of
the actual image (exposure) will look.
• Enable (g)
The displayed image brightness will be close to the actual
brightness (exposure) of the resulting image. If you set exposure
compensation, the image brightness will change accordingly.
• During e (E/g)
Normally, the image is displayed at the standard brightness to
make the Live View image easy to see. The image will be
displayed close to the actual brightness (exposure) of the resulting
image only while you hold down the depth-of-field preview button.
• Disable (E)
The image is displayed at the standard brightness to make the Live
View image easy to see. Even if you set exposure compensation,
the image is displayed at the standard brightness.
296
3 Menu Function Settings
z6 N
 Silent LV shootingN
• Mode 1
You can suppress the camera noise when shooting. Continuous
shooting is also possible. If <o> is set, you can shoot at a
maximum continuous shooting speed of approx. 10.0 fps.
• Mode 2
When the shutter button is pressed completely, only one shot will
be taken. While you keep holding down the shutter button, the
camera operation will be suspended. Then when you return to the
shutter button’s halfway position, the camera operation will
resume. The shooting noise is thereby minimized. Even if
continuous shooting is set, only a single shot will be taken.
• Disable
Be sure to set it to [Disable] if you use a TS-E lens (other than
those listed in
below) for shifting or tilting the lens or if you
use an Extension Tube. If [Mode 1] or [Mode 2] is set, the standard
exposure may not be obtained, or an irregular exposure may
result.
 If you use [Mode 1] with continuous shooting, the [Disable] setting will
be applied to the second and subsequent shots.
 When shooting with flash, the [Disable] setting will be applied regardless
of the [Silent LV shoot.] setting. (Silent shooting cannot be performed.)
 When using a non-Canon flash unit, set it to [Disable]. The flash will not
fire if it is set to [Mode 1] or [Mode 2].
 If [Mode 2] is set and you use a Remote Controller (p.248), the operation
will be the same as with [Mode 1].
With the TS-E17mm f/4L or TS-E24mm f/3.5L II lens, you can use [Mode 1]
or [Mode 2].
297
3 Menu Function Settings
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
Performing any of the following operations will stop Live View shooting. To
start Live View shooting again, press the <0> button.
• Selecting [z3: Dust Delete Data], [53: Sensor cleaning], [54: Clear
all camera settings], or [54: firmware ver.].
298
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Changes in AF Speed Depending On the AF Control Method
During Live View shooting and movie shooting, the AF control method used
(phase-difference detection with the image sensor or contrast detection) will
switch automatically depending on the lens and function used, such as
magnified view. This can greatly affect the AF speed and the camera may
take a longer time to focus (phase-difference detection generally allows
faster AF focusing). For details, refer to the Canon website.
Selecting the AF Method
You can select an AF method to suit the shooting conditions and your
subject. The following AF methods are provided: [u(face)+Tracking]
(p.300), [FlexiZone - Multi] (p.302), and [FlexiZone - Single] (p.304).
If you want to achieve precise focus, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF>, magnify the image, and focus manually (p.308).
Select the AF method.
 Under the [z5] tab (the [z3] tab in
<A>), select [AF method].
 Select the desired AF method, then
press <0>.
 When the Live View image is
displayed, you can press the
<o> button to select the AF
method.
299
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
u(face)+Tracking: c
The camera detects and focuses on human faces. If a face moves, the
AF point <p> also moves to track the face.
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
an AF point.
2 Select
 When a face is detected, the <p>
frame will appear over the face to be
focused on.
 If multiple faces are detected, <q>
will be displayed. Use <9> to move
the <q> frame over the face you
want to focus on.
 If no faces are detected, the camera
will switch to FlexiZone - Multi for
automatic selection (p.302).
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Press the shutter button halfway to
focus.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
300
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.286).
 Focusing on a subject other than a human face
Press <9> or <0>, and the AF frame < > will appear in the
center. Then use <9> to move the AF frame over the desired
subject. Once the AF frame achieves focus, it will track the subject
even if the subject moves or if you change the composition.
 If the subject’s face is significantly out of focus, face detection will not be
possible. You can prevent this by setting [z5: Continuous AF] to
[Enable].
 An object other than a human face may be detected as a face.
 Face detection will not work if the face is very small or large in the
picture, too bright or too dark, or partially hidden.
 The <p> may cover only part of the face.
 Since AF is not possible with a face detected near the edge of the
picture, the <p> will be grayed out. If you press the shutter button
halfway in this situation, the subject will be focused on in FlexiZone Multi method with automatic selection.
 The shape of the AF frame < > varies depending on the size and shape
of the subject.
301
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Multi: o
You can focus over a wide area with up to 31 AF points (automatic
selection). This wide area can also be divided into 9 zones for focusing
(zone selection).
1
Display the Live View image.
 Press the <0> button.
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
Area frame
the AF point.N
2 Select
 Pressing <9> or <0> will toggle
Zone frame
between automatic selection and
zone selection. In the <A> mode,
automatic selection is set
automatically.
 Use <9> to select the zone. To
return to the center zone, press <9>
or <0> again.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the area
frame will turn orange.
302
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.286).
 If the camera does not focus on the desired target subject with automatic
AF point selection, select a zone or switch the AF method to [FlexiZone
- Single] and refocus.
 Depending on the [z5: Aspect ratio], the number of AF points varies.
At [3:2], there are 31 AF points. At [4:3] and [1:1], there are 25 AF points.
And at [16:9], 21 AF points. Also, at [16:9], there are three zones.
 For movie shooting, there are 21 AF points (or 25 AF points if [640x480]
is set) and three zones (or nine zones if [640x480] is set).
303
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
FlexiZone - Single: d
The camera focuses with a single AF point. This is effective when you
want to focus on a particular subject.
the Live View image.
1 Display
 Press the <0> button.
AF point
 The Live View image will appear on
the LCD monitor.
 The AF point < > will appear.
 During movie shooting, if [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable], the AF
point will be displayed in a larger size.
the AF point.
2 Move
 Use <9> to move the AF point to
where you want to focus. (It cannot
be moved to the edge of the screen.)
 Pressing <9> or <0> will return
the AF point to the screen’s center.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Aim the AF point over the subject and
press the shutter button halfway.
 When focus is achieved, the AF point
will turn green and the beeper will
sound.
 If focus is not achieved, the AF point
will turn orange.
the picture.
4 Take
 Check the focus and exposure, then
press the shutter button completely to
take the picture (p.286).
304
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Notes for AF
AF Operation
 Even when focus is achieved, pressing the shutter button halfway
will focus again.
 The image brightness may change during and after the AF
operation.
 If the light source changes while the Live View image is displayed,
the screen may flicker and focusing may be difficult. If this happens,
exit Live View shooting and execute AF under the actual light
source.
 If [u+Tracking] is set, magnified view is not possible.
 When [FlexiZone - Multi] is set and you press the <u> button, the
center of the selected zone (or image center with automatic
selection) will be magnified.
 When [FlexiZone - Single] is set and you press the <u> button,
the area covered by the AF point will be magnified. If you press the
shutter button halfway, focusing will be performed while displaying
the magnified view. If focusing is difficult in magnified view, return to
the normal display and use AF. Note that the AF speed may differ
between the normal and magnified views.
 If you magnify the view after focusing with [FlexiZone - Multi] or
[FlexiZone - Single] in the normal view, precise focus may not be
achieved.
 When in magnified view, contrast-detection AF will be applied regardless
of the lens used. The AF speed will therefore become slow.
 When in magnified view, Continuous AF (p.294) will not be executed.
 In magnified view, the image will be displayed without distortion
correction applied.
305
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
 Subject with low-contrast such as the blue sky, solid-color flat
surfaces or when highlight or shadow details are lost.
 Subjects in low light.
 Stripes and other patterns where there is contrast only in the
horizontal direction.
 Subjects with repetitive patterns (skyscraper windows, computer
keyboards, etc.).
 Fine lines and subject outlines.
 Under a light source whose brightness, color, or pattern keeps
changing.
 Night scenes or dots of light.
 Under fluorescent or LED lighting when the image flickers.
 Extremely small subjects.
 Subjects at the edge of the picture.
 Subjects strongly reflecting light.
 Near and distant subjects covered by an AF point (such as an
animal in a cage).
 Subjects that keep moving within the AF point and cannot keep still
due to camera shake or subject blur.
 A subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
 Performing AF while the subject is very far out of focus.
 Soft focus effect is applied with a soft focus lens.
 A special effect filter is used.
 Noise (spots, banding, etc.) appears on the screen during AF.
306
Using AF to Focus (AF Method)
 If you cannot achieve focus with AF, set the lens’s focus mode switch to
<MF> and focus manually.
 If you shoot the subject at the periphery and it is slightly out of focus, aim
the center AF point or zone over the subject to focus on, focus again,
and then take the picture.
 The AF-assist beam will not be emitted. However, if an EX-series
Speedlite (sold separately) equipped with an LED light is used, the LED
light will turn on for AF-assist when necessary.
 During magnified view, camera shake may make it harder to achieve
focus. Using a tripod is recommended.
307
MF: Focusing Manually
You can magnify the image and focus precisely with MF (manual focus).
1
Set the lens’s focus mode switch
to <MF>.
 Turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus
roughly.
the magnifying frame.
2 Display
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnifying frame will appear.
Magnifying frame
the magnifying frame.
3 Move
 Use <9> to move the magnifying
frame to the position where you want
to focus.
 Pressing <9> will return the
magnifying frame to the screen’s
center.
the image.
4 Magnify
 Each time you press the <u> button,
the magnification within the frame will
change as follows:
Normal view 9 1x 9 5x 9 10x
AE lock
Magnified area position
Magnification (Approx.)
308
 While in magnified view, you can use
<9> to scroll around the magnified
image.
MF: Focusing Manually
manually.
5 Focus
 While looking at the magnified image,
turn the lens’s focusing ring to focus.
 After achieving focus, press the <u>
button to return to the normal view.
the picture.
6 Take
 Check the exposure, then press the
shutter button completely to take the
picture (p.286).
309
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Image Quality
 When you shoot at high ISO speeds, noise (such as dots of light and
banding) may become noticeable.
 Shooting in high temperatures may cause noise and irregular colors in
the image.
 If Live View shooting is used continuously for a prolonged period, the
camera’s internal temperature may rise, and image quality may
deteriorate. Always exit Live View shooting when you are not shooting.
 If you shoot a long exposure while the camera’s internal temperature is
high, image quality may deteriorate. Exit Live View shooting and wait a
few minutes before shooting again.
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged Live
View shooting or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red
<E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you temporarily exit Live View
shooting and allow the camera to cool down before shooting again.
 The red <E> icon indicates that the Live View shooting will soon stop
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Exit the Live View shooting or
turn off the power and let the camera rest for a while.
 Using Live View shooting at a high temperature for a prolonged period
will cause the <s> or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not
shooting, turn off the camera.
 If the camera’s internal temperature is high, the quality of images shot
with high ISO speed or long exposure may deteriorate even before the
white <s> icon is displayed.
Shooting Results
 In magnified view, the shutter speed and aperture will be displayed in
red. If you take the picture in magnified view, the exposure may not come
out as desired. Return to the normal view before taking the picture.
 Even if you take the picture in magnified view, the image will be captured
in the normal view range.
310
General Live View Shooting Cautions
Live View Image
 Under low- or bright-light conditions, the Live View image may not reflect
the brightness of the captured image.
 Even if a low ISO speed is set, noise may be noticeable in the displayed
Live View image under low light. However, when you shoot, the image
recorded will have minimal noise. (The image quality of the Live View
image is different from that of the recorded image.)
 If the light source (illumination) within the image changes, the screen
may flicker. If this happens, exit Live View shooting and resume Live
View shooting under the actual light source.
 If you point the camera in a different direction, it may throw off the Live
View image’s correct brightness momentarily. Wait until the brightness
level stabilizes before shooting.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. However, the actual captured image
will correctly show the bright area.
 In low light, if you set the [52: LCD brightness] to a bright setting, noise
or irregular colors may appear in the Live View image. However, the
noise or irregular colors will not be recorded in the captured image.
 When you magnify the image, the image sharpness may look more
pronounced than in the actual image.
Custom Functions
 During Live View shooting, some Custom Functions will not work
(settings become invalid). For details, see p.432-433.
Lens and Flash
 The focus preset function is possible for Live View shooting only when
using a (super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode,
available since the second half of 2011.
 FE lock will not work if the built-in flash is used. FE lock and modeling
flash will not work if an external Speedlite is used.
311
312
9
Shooting Movies
Movie shooting is enabled by
setting the Live View shooting/
Movie shooting switch to <k>.
 For cards that can record movies, see page 5.
 If you handhold the camera and shoot movies, camera
shake can cause blurred movies. Using a tripod is
recommended.
Full HD 1080
Full HD 1080 indicates compatibility with HighDefinition featuring 1080 vertical pixels (scanning
lines).
313
k Shooting Movies
/
Autoexposure Shooting
When the shooting mode is set to <A>, <d>, or <F>, autoexposure
control will take effect to suit the scene’s current brightness. Exposure
control will be the same for all the shooting modes.
the Mode Dial to <A>, <d>,
1 Set
or <F>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
 The reflex mirror will make a sound,
then the image will appear on the
LCD monitor.
on the subject.
3 Focus
 Before shooting a movie, focus with
AF or manual focus (p.299-309).
 When you press the shutter button
halfway, the camera will focus with
the current AF method.
the movie.
4 Shoot
 Press the <0> button to start
Recording movies
Built-in microphone
314
shooting a movie.
 While the movie is being shot, the
“o” mark will be displayed on the
upper right of the screen.
 Sound will be recorded by the built-in
microphone.
 To stop shooting the movie, press the
<0> button again.
k Shooting Movies
Shutter-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <s>, you can manually set the shutter
speed for movie shooting. The ISO speed and aperture will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <s>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the desired shutter speed.
3 Set
 While looking at the LCD monitor,
Shutter speed
turn the <6> dial. The settable
shutter speeds depend on the frame
rate.
• 6 5 B 4:
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• 8 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.314).
 Changing the shutter speed during movie shooting is not recommended
since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
315
k Shooting Movies
Aperture-priority AE
When the shooting mode is <f>, you can manually set the aperture
for movie shooting. The ISO speed and shutter speed will be set
automatically to suit the brightness and obtain a standard exposure.
1
Set the Mode Dial to <f>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the desired aperture.
3 Set
 While looking at the LCD monitor,
turn the <6> dial.
Aperture
and shoot the movie.
4 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.314).
Changing the aperture during movie shooting is not recommended since
variations in the exposure, due to the drive of the lens aperture, will be
recorded.
316
k Shooting Movies
ISO speed in the <A> mode
 In the <A> mode, the ISO speed will be set automatically within
ISO 100 - ISO 16000.
ISO Speed in the <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Mode
 The ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO 100 - ISO 16000.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings] (p.157), if you set the [ISO speed
range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H1 (25600)] in the <d>, <f>, or
<F> mode, the automatic ISO range will be expanded to H1
(equivalent to ISO 25600). Even if you set the [Maximum] and
[Minimum] to a narrower range than the default ISO range (ISO 100
- ISO 16000), it will not take effect.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.180), the
automatic ISO range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] and [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.158-159) for movie shooting. Also,
[ISO speed range] cannot be set in the <s> mode.
For [ISO speed range], if [Maximum] is set to [H2 (51200)] and you switch
from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the automatic ISO range’s
maximum for movie shooting will be H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600, except in
<A> and <s> modes). It cannot be expanded to ISO 51200.
317
k Shooting Movies
Notes for <A>, < d>, <s>, <f>, and <F> Modes
 In the <A> mode, the scene icon for the scene detected by the camera
is displayed on the upper left of the screen (p.319).
 You can lock the exposure (AE lock) by pressing the <A> button
(except in the <A> mode, p.229). The exposure setting will be
displayed for the time length set with [z6: Metering timer]. After
applying AE lock during movie shooting, you can cancel it by pressing
the <S> button. (AE lock setting is retained until you press the <S>
button.)
 You can set exposure compensation up to ±3 stops by setting the
<R> switch to the left and turning the <5> dial (except in the
<A> mode).
 Pressing the shutter button halfway displays the ISO speed and shutter
speed at the screen bottom. This is the exposure setting for taking a still
photo (p.323). The exposure setting for movie shooting is not displayed.
Note that the exposure setting for movie shooting may differ from that for
still photo shooting.
 In the <A>, <d>, and <F> modes, the shutter speed and aperture will
not be recorded in the movie’s Exif information.
Using an EX-series Speedlite (Sold Separately)
Equipped with an LED Light
During movie shooting in the <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F>
modes, this camera supports the function that turns on the Speedlite’s
LED light automatically in low-light conditions. For detailed
instructions, refer to the EX-series Speedlite’s instruction manual.
318
k Shooting Movies
Scene Icons
During movie shooting in the <A> mode, an icon representing the
scene detected by the camera will be displayed, and the shooting will
be adapted to that scene. For certain scenes or shooting conditions, the
icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
Subject
Non-Portrait
Portrait*1
Background
Nature and
Outdoor Scene
Close*2
Background
Color
Bright
Gray
Backlit
Blue Sky Included
Light blue
Backlit
Sunset
*3
*3
Orange
Spotlight
Dark blue
Dark
*1: Displayed only when the AF method is set to [u+Tracking]. If another AF
method is set, the “Non-portrait” icon will be displayed even if a person is
detected.
*2: Displayed when the attached lens has distance information. With an Extension
Tube or Close-up Lens, the icon displayed may not match the actual scene.
*3: The icon suiting the scene detected will be displayed.
319
k Shooting Movies
Manual Exposure Shooting
You can manually set the shutter speed, aperture, and ISO speed for
movie shooting. Using manual exposure to shoot movies is for
advanced users.
1 Set the Mode Dial to <a>.
the Live View shooting/Movie
2 Set
shooting switch to <k>.
the ISO speed.
3 Set
 Press the <m> button.
 The ISO speed setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor.
 Turn the <6> dial to set the ISO
speed.
 For details on the ISO speed, see the
next page.
the shutter speed and
4 Set
aperture.
Shutter speed
Aperture
320
 Press the shutter button halfway and
check the exposure level indicator.
 To set the shutter speed, turn the
<6> dial. The settable shutter
speeds depend on the frame rate.
• 6 5 B 4:
1/4000 sec. - 1/30 sec.
• 8 7: 1/4000 sec. - 1/60 sec.
 To set the aperture, turn the <5>
dial.
 If it cannot be set, set the <R>
switch to the left, then turn the <6>
or <5> dial.
k Shooting Movies
and shoot the movie.
5 Focus
 The procedure is the same as steps 3
and 4 for “Autoexposure Shooting”
(p.314).
ISO Speed in the <a> Mode
 With [Auto] (A), the ISO speed will be set automatically within ISO
100 - ISO 16000. Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set [ISO
speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H1 (25600)] (p.157), the
automatic ISO range will not expand to the H1 maximum. Even if
you set the [Maximum] and [Minimum] to a narrower range than the
default ISO range (ISO 100 - ISO 16000), it will not take effect.
 You can set the ISO speed manually within ISO 100 - ISO 16000 in
1/3-stop increments. Under [z2: ISO speed settings], if you set
[ISO speed range]’s [Maximum] setting to [H1 (25600)], the manual
ISO speed setting range’s maximum will be expanded to H1
(equivalent to ISO 25600). You can also set the [Maximum] and
[Minimum] to a range narrower than the default range (ISO 100 ISO 16000).
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable] (p.180), the auto
or manual ISO setting range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], [Auto ISO range] and [Min.
shutter spd.] cannot be set (p.158-159) for movie shooting.
321
k Shooting Movies
 Under [ISO speed range], if [Maximum] is set to [H2 (51200)] and you
switch from still photo shooting to movie shooting, the maximum ISO
speed for the manual ISO range during movie shooting will be H1
(equivalent to ISO 25600). It cannot be expanded to ISO 51200.
 Changing the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting is not
recommended since the changes in the exposure will be recorded.
 When shooting a movie of a moving subject, a shutter speed of 1/30 sec.
to 1/125 sec. is recommended. The faster the shutter speed, the less
smooth the subject’s movement will look.
 If you change the shutter speed while shooting under fluorescent or LED
lighting, image flicker may be recorded.
 Under [83: Custom Controls], if [s: Expo comp (hold btn, turn
)] is set (p.455), you can set exposure compensation while Auto ISO
is set.
 When Auto ISO is set, you can press the <A> button to lock the ISO
speed.
 If you press the <A> button and recompose the shot, you can see the
exposure level difference on the exposure level indicator (p.323)
compared to when the <A> button was pressed.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can display the histogram.
322
k Shooting Movies
Information Display
 Each time you press the <B> button, the information display will change.
Movie shooting remaining time*1/Elapsed time
Maximum burst
Possible shots
AF point (FlexiZone - Single)
Battery check
Temperature warning
Histogram (a mode)
Movie shooting mode
: Autoexposure (A)
: Autoexposure (d/F)
: Shutter-priority
: Aperture-priority
: Manual exposure
Time code
Writing indicator
Card for recording/
playback
Recording movie
Image-recording
quality
AF method
Drive mode
Movie recording size
White balance
Picture Style
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Frame rate
Compression
method
Headphone volume
Signal strength*2
Exposure mode
L: Autoexposure
:Shutterpriority AE
: Aperturepriority AE
K: Manual
exposure
Movie Servo AF
Recording level: Manual
LED light
AE lock
Eye-Fi card transmission status
Shutter speed
Digital compass
Recording level meter
Aperture
GPS connection indicator
Exposure compensation
MOV/MP4
ISO speed
Highlight tone priority
Attenuator
Wind filter
Wi-Fi function*2
Exposure level indicator
*1: Applies to a single movie clip.
*2: Refer to the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual.
323
k Shooting Movies
 You can display the electronic level by pressing the <B> button (p.75).
 Note that if the AF method is set to [u +Tracking] or the camera is
connected to a TV set with an HDMI cable (p.385), the electronic level
cannot be displayed.
 The electronic level cannot be displayed during movie shooting. (The
electronic level will disappear when you start shooting a movie.)
 When movie shooting starts, the movie shooting remaining time will
change to the elapsed time.
Cautions for Movie Shooting
 Do not point the camera toward an intense light source, such as the sun
on a sunny day or an intense artificial light source. Doing so may
damage the image sensor or the camera’s internal components.
 Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], even if [Record func.] is set
to [Rec. to multiple] (p.147), the movie cannot be recorded to both the
CF card [f] and SD card [g]. If [Rec. separately] or [Rec. to multiple]
is set, the movie will be recorded to the card which is set for [Playback].
 If <Q> is set and the ISO speed or aperture changes during movie
shooting, the white balance may also change.
 If you shoot a movie under fluorescent or LED lighting, the movie may
flicker.
 Shooting a few test movies is recommended where you will perform
zooming during movie shooting. Zooming during movie shooting may
result in recording of changes in exposure or mechanical sound of the
lens, or images may be out of focus.
 During movie shooting, you cannot magnify the image even if you press
the <u> button.
 Be careful not to cover the built-in microphone (p.314) with your finger,
etc.
 [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] (p.176) and [Distortion] (p.182) cannot
be set. (They will not function.)
 If you connect or disconnect the HDMI cable during movie shooting, the
movie shooting will end.
 General Movie Shooting Cautions are on pages 351-352.
 If necessary, also read General Live View Shooting Cautions on
pages 310-311.
324
k Shooting Movies
Notes for Movie Shooting
 Movie-related settings are under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (p.342). In the
<A> mode, they are under the [z2] and [z3] tabs.
 A movie file is recorded each time you shoot a movie. If the file size exceeds
4 GB, a new file will be created for every subsequent approx. 4 GB.
 The movie image’s field of view is approx. 100% (when the movie
recording size is set to L).
 You can also focus on the image by pressing the <p> button.
 Under [z5: V button function], if [
/k] [q/k] is selected, you can
press the shutter button completely to start or stop the movie shooting (p.348).
 Monaural sound is recorded by the camera’s built-in microphone (p.314).
 Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the camera’s external microphone IN
terminal (p.23) as the external microphone is given the priority.
 By using HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately), you can display the
movie on a TV screen (p.385). If the picture does not appear on the TV
screen, check if [53: Video system] is correctly set to [For NTSC] or
[For PAL] (depending on the video standard of your TV set).
 By connecting stereo headphones (commercially available) equipped
with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal
(p.23), you can listen to the sound during movie shooting.
 You can use Remote Controller RC-6 (sold separately, p.248) to start
and stop the movie shooting if the drive mode is <Q> or <k>. Set
the shooting timing switch to <2> (2-sec. delay), then press the transmit
button. If the switch is set to <o> (immediate shooting), still photo
shooting will take effect.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the total movie recording time
will be as follows: At 23°C/73°F: Approx. 1 hr. 40 min., At 0°C/32°F:
Approx. 1 hr. 30 min.
 The focus preset function is possible for movie shooting when using a
(super) telephoto lens equipped with the focus preset mode, available
since the second half of 2011.
Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time.
Even if the camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same
body part may cause skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact
burns. Using a tripod is recommended for people with circulation problems or
very sensitive skin, or when using the camera in very hot places.
325
k Shooting Movies
Final Image Simulation
The final image simulation shows the results of the current settings for
Picture Style, white balance and other functions in the image so you can
see what the captured image will look like.
During movie shooting, the image displayed will automatically show the
effects of the settings listed below.
Final Image Simulation for Movie Shooting
 Picture Style
* All settings such as sharpness, contrast, color saturation, and color tone will
be reflected.








White balance
White balance correction
Exposure
Depth of field
Auto Lighting Optimizer
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Highlight tone priority
326
k Shooting Movies
Shooting Still Photos
While shooting a movie, you can also
take a still photo by pressing the shutter
button completely.
Taking Still Photos During Movie Shooting
 If you take a still photo during movie shooting, the movie will record
a still moment lasting approx. 1 sec.
 The captured still photo will be recorded to the card, and the movie
shooting will resume automatically when the Live View image is
displayed.
 The movie and still photo will be recorded as separate files on the card.
 Under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.], if [Record func.]
(p.146) is set to [Standard] or [Auto switch card], the movies and
still photos will be recorded to the same card. If [Rec. separately] or
[Rec. to multiple] is set, the movies will be recorded to the card set
for [Playback] (p.148). The still photos will be recorded at the
image-recording quality set for the respective card.
 Functions particular to still photo shooting are shown below. Other
functions will be the same as for movie shooting.
Function
Imagerecording
Quality
Settings
As set in [z1: Image quality].
When the movie recording size is [1920x1080] or [1280x720], the
aspect ratio will be 16:9. When the size is [640x480], the aspect
ratio will be 4:3.
• <A>: ISO 100 - ISO 6400
ISO Speed* • <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F>: ISO 100 - ISO 16000
• <a>: See “ISO Speed in the <a> mode” on page 321.
Exposure
Setting
• <A>, <d>, and <F>: Automatically-set shutter speed and
aperture.
• <s>: Manually-set shutter speed and automatically-set aperture.
• <f>: Manually-set aperture and automatically-set shutter speed.
• <a>: Manually-set shutter speed and aperture.
* If highlight tone priority is set, the ISO speed range will start from ISO 200.
327
k Shooting Movies
 If L 8 (59.94 fps) or 7 (50.00 fps) is set, or if [z5: V button
function] is set to [
/k] or [q/k], you cannot take still photos.
 Still photo shooting during movie shooting will have approx. 99%
coverage with L or w, and approx. 98% with x (when the imagerecording quality is set to JPEG 73).
 AEB cannot be used.
 Even if a flash is used, it will not fire.
 Continuous still photo shooting is possible during movie shooting.
However, the captured images will not be displayed on the screen.
Depending on the still photo’s image-recording quality, number of shots
during continuous shooting, card performance, etc., movie shooting may
stop automatically.
 AF is possible during movie shooting. However, the following may occur:
• Focus may become far off momentarily.
• The brightness of the recorded movie may change.
• The recorded movie may be momentarily still.
• The movie may record the lens operation noise.
• If focus cannot be achieved, you cannot shoot still photos.
 Exposure compensation up to ±3 stops can be applied for still photo
shooting during movie shooting.
 If you want to shoot still photos continuously during movie shooting,
using a high-speed card is recommended. Setting a smaller imagerecording quality for still photos and shooting fewer continuous still
photos are also recommended.
 You can shoot still photos in all drive modes.
 The self-timer can be set before you start shooting a movie. During
movie shooting, the camera will switch to single-image shooting.
328
Shooting Function Settings
B/R/f/i/A Settings
If you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <b> button while
the image is displayed on the LCD monitor, the setting screen will
appear on the LCD monitor and you can turn the <6> or <5> dial to
set the respective function.
 During manual-exposure shooting (p.320), you can press the
<m> button to set the ISO speed.
 By pressing the <n> button and then the <B> button, you
can set WB shift and WB bracketing.
 Note that the following cannot be set: <q> Metering mode, <y>
Flash exposure compensation, <w> HDR mode, and <P>
Multiple exposures.
Q Quick Control
In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, the AF method,
Drive mode, Movie recording size, Recording level (set manually
only), Volume (headphones), Recording/playing back card and
image quality (still photos), White balance, Picture Style, and Auto
Lighting Optimizer can be set.
In the <A> mode, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button (7).
 The settable functions will be
displayed.
a function and set it.
2 Select
 Use <9> to select a function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed on the screen.
 Turn the <6> or <5> dial to set it.
 To set the movie recording size or to
set the image quality to RAW, press
<0>.
329
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 To select the card for recording/
playing back, WB Shift/Bracketing, or
Picture Style parameters, press the
<B> button.
 Pressing <0> will return the camera
to movie shooting.
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
With [z4: Movie rec quality] (the [z2]
tab in <A>), you can set the movie
recording format, movie recording size
(size, frame rate, compression method),
and other functions.
The frame rate displayed on the [Movie
rec. size] screen switches automatically
depending on the [53: Video system]
setting (p.491).
MOV/MP4
You can select the movie’s recording format.
MOV
The movie is recorded in the MOV
format (file extension: “.MOV”).
Convenient for editing with a computer.
MP4
The movie is recorded in the MP4 format (file extension: “.MP4”). This
format is compatible with a much larger range of playback systems than
the MOV format.
330
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Movie Recording Size
You can select the movie’s size, frame rate, and compression method.
 Image Size
L 1920x1080
Full High-Definition (Full HD)
recording quality. The aspect ratio is
16:9.
w 1280x720
High-Definition (HD) recording
quality. The aspect ratio is 16:9.
x 640x480
Standard-definition recording quality. The aspect ratio is 4:3.
 Frame Rate (fps: frames per second)
6 29.97 fps/8 59.94 fps
For areas where the TV format is NTSC (North America, Japan,
South Korea, Mexico, etc.).
5 25.00 fps/7 50.00 fps
For areas where the TV format is PAL (Europe, Russia, China,
Australia, etc.).
4 23.98 fps/B 24.00 fps
Mainly for motion pictures. Regarding B, see page 333.
Movies recorded at L 8 (59.94fps) or 7 (50.00fps) may not be
played back properly on other devices, due to the heavy data processing
load during playback.
The frame rate displayed on the movie recording size screen depends on
whether [53: Video system] is set to [For NTSC] or [For PAL].
331
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Compression Method
W ALL-I (For editing/I-only)
Compresses one frame at a time for recording. Although the file size
is larger than with IPB (Standard) and IPB (Light), the movie is more
suited for editing.
X IPB (Standard)
Compresses multiple frames at a time efficiently for recording. Since
the file size is smaller than with ALL-I (For editing), you can shoot
longer (with the same card).
IPB (Light)
Selectable when the movie recording format is set to [MP4]. The
movie is recorded at bit rate lower than with IPB (Standard) resulting
in a smaller file size and compatibility with a larger range of playback
systems. Of the three methods available, this method allows the
longest total possible movie shooting time on a card of a given
capacity.
 If L 8(59.94 fps) or 7(50.00 fps) is set, certain functions will not
be available.
• Movie Servo AF will not work.
• Contrast-detection AF will be applied. (Focusing may take longer
than usual.)
• Still photos cannot be taken.
 If you change the [53: Video system] setting, set the movie recording
size again.
332
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
24.00p
Records the movie at a frame rate of 24.00 fps. Applies to Full HD
quality.
If [Enable] is set, the movie is recorded
in LBW or LBX.
If you have set [Movie rec. size] and
then set [24.00p] to [Enable], set the
[Movie rec. size] again.
Cautions for [24.00p: Enable]
 [53: Video system] cannot be set.
 [53: HDMI frame rate] (p.350) cannot be set. The movie will be output
at 1080/24.00p via HDMI. If you connect the camera to a TV set etc. not
compatible with the 1080/24.00p signal via HDMI, the movie may not
appear.
 If you set it back to [Disable], [53: HDMI frame rate] will be set to
[Auto].
 Even if you set it back to [Disable], the movie recording size will not
revert to the original. Set the movie recording size again.
333
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
Total Movie Recording Time and File Size Per Minute
 In MOV Format
Movie Recording
Quality
(Approx.)
Total Recording Time on Card
File Size
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
87 X
8 min.
17 min.
34 min.
440 MB/min.
65
W
L B4
5 min.
11 min.
23 min.
654 MB/min.
65
X
B4
16 min.
33 min.
1 hr. 7 min.
225 MB/min.
87 W
6 min.
13 min.
26 min.
583 MB/min.
87 X
19 min.
38 min.
1 hr. 17 min.
196 MB/min.
x 65 X
50 min.
1 hr. 41 min.
3 hr. 22 min.
75 MB/min.
w
 In MP4 Format
Movie Recording
Quality
L
File Size
4 GB
8 GB
16 GB
87 X
8 min.
17 min.
35 min.
431 MB/min.
65
W
B4
5 min.
11 min.
23 min.
645 MB/min.
65
X
B4
17 min.
35 min.
1 hr. 10 min.
216 MB/min.
65
43 min.
1 hr. 26 min.
2 hr. 53 min.
87 MB/min.
87 W
6 min.
13 min.
26 min.
574 MB/min.
187 MB/min.
w 87 X
65
x
(Approx.)
Total Recording Time on Card
65 X
65
20 min.
40 min.
1 hr. 21 min.
2 hr. 5 min.
4 hr. 10 min.
8 hr. 20 min.
30 MB/min.
57 min.
1 hr. 55 min.
3 hr. 50 min.
66 MB/min.
5 hr. 26 min. 10 hr. 53 min.
23 MB/min.
2 hr. 43 min.
An increase of the camera’s internal temperature may cause movie shooting
to stop before the maximum recording time shown in the table (p.351).
334
3 Setting the Movie Recording Size
 Movie Files Exceeding 4 GB
Even if you shoot a movie exceeding 4 GB, you can keep shooting
without interruption.
During movie shooting, approx. 30 sec. before the movie reaches
the 4 GB file size, the elapsed shooting time or time code displayed
in the movie-shooting screen will start blinking. If you keep shooting
until the movie file size exceeds 4 GB, a new movie file will be
created automatically and the elapsed shooting time or time code
will stop blinking.
When you play back the movie, you will have to play each movie file
individually. Movie files cannot be played back automatically in
consecutive order. After the movie playback ends, select the next
movie and play it back.
 Movie Shooting Time Limit
The maximum recording time of one movie clip is 29 min. 59 sec. If
the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically. You can start shooting a movie again by
pressing the <0> button. (A new movie file starts being recorded.)
When shooting movies, if the file size exceeds 4 GB, “buSY” will be
displayed on the LCD panel for a while. Still photo shooting is not possible
while “buSY” is displayed on the screen.
335
3 Setting the Sound Recording
You can shoot movies while recording sound
with the built-in monaural microphone or the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold
separately). You can also freely adjust the
sound-recording level.
Sound-recording settings are under
[z4: Sound recording] (the [z2] tab
in <A>).
Sound Recording/Sound-Recording Level
Auto
Manual
Disable
: The sound-recording level is adjusted automatically. Auto level
control will operate automatically in response to the sound level.
: For advanced users. You can adjust the sound-recording
level to one of 64 levels.
Select [Rec. level] and look at the level meter while
turning the <5> dial to adjust the sound-recording level.
While looking at the peak hold indicator, adjust so that the
level meter sometimes lights up the “12” (-12 dB) mark on
the right for the loudest sounds. If it exceeds “0”, the
sound will be distorted.
: Sound will not be recorded. Also, no sound will be output
through HDMI output (p.348).
Wind Filter/Attenuator
Wind filter
Attenuator
336
: When [Enable] is set, it reduces the wind noise when
recording outdoors. This feature takes effect only with the
built-in microphone. Note that [Enable] reduces low bass
sounds, so set it to [Disable] when there is no wind. It will
record a more natural sound than with [Enable].
: Automatically suppresses sound distortion caused by
loud noises. Even if [Sound rec.] is set to [Auto] or
[Manual] before shooting, sound distortion may still
result if there is a very loud sound. In such a case,
setting it to [Enable] is recommended.
3 Setting the Sound Recording
 Using a microphone
Normally, the built-in microphone will record monaural sound.
Stereo sound recording is also possible by connecting the
Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal (p.23) as the external
microphone is given the priority.
 Using headphones
By connecting stereo headphones (commercially available)
equipped with a 3.5 mm diameter mini plug to the camera’s
headphone terminal (p.23), you can listen to the sound during movie
shooting. If you are using the Directional Stereo Microphone DM-E1
(sold separately), you can listen to the sound in stereo. To adjust the
headphones’ sound volume, press the <Q> button and select <n>.
Then turn <5> to adjust (p.329).
You can also use headphones during movie playback.
When using headphones for audio, noise reduction will not be applied to the
headphone output. Because of this, what you hear will differ from the actual
audio recorded with the movie.
 In the <A> mode, [Sound recording] can be set to [On] or [Off]. If [On]
is set, the sound-recording level will be adjusted automatically (same as
with [Auto]), but the wind filter function will not take effect.
 When the camera is connected to a TV set with the HDMI cable, sound
will also be output (except when [Sound recording] is set to [Off]). If the
sound from the TV set causes audio feedback, place the camera farther
away from the TV set or turn down the TV set’s sound volume.
 You can also adjust the headphones’ volume by pressing the <Q>
button, then holding down the <c> button and titling <9> up or
down.
 The sound volume balance between L (left) and R (right) cannot be
adjusted.
 Audio is recorded at a 48 kHz/16-bit sampling rate.
 If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h] (p.338), you can adjust the
sound-recording level with the <h> touch pad with less operation noise
during movie shooting.
337
3 Silent Control
You can change the settings of the ISO speed, sound-recording level,
etc., without making too much noise while shooting a movie.
When [z5: Silent Control] (the [z3]
tab in <A>) is set to [Enable h], you
can use the touch pad <h> on the inner
ring of the Quick Control Dial.
You can just touch the top, bottom, left,
or right of <h> for silent operation.
During movie shooting, you can press
the <Q> button to display the Quick
Control screen and change the functions
below with <h>.
Shooting Mode
A d/F s f
Shutter speed
k Aperture
- k
Exposure compensation k
k k
ISO speed
Recording level*2
k
k k
nVolume
k
k
k k
Settable
Functions
a
k
k
k*1
k
k
k
*1: With Auto ISO set.
*2: With [Sound recording: Manual] set.
 If [z5: Silent Control] is set to [Enable h], you cannot change Quick
Control settings with the <5> Quick Control dial during movie shooting.
 Even if you change the aperture silently with <h>, the movie will still
record the lens aperture-driving sound.
 If there is water or dirt on the <h>, the touch operation may not work. In
such a case, use a clean cloth to clean the <h>. If it still does not work,
wait a while and try again.
Before shooting a movie, you can use <h> with the [Rec. level] setting to
adjust the sound-recording level.
338
3 Setting the Time Code
The time code is a time reference
recorded automatically to synchronize
the movie during movie shooting. It is
recorded at all times in the following
units: hours, minutes, seconds, and
frames. It is mainly used during movie
editing.
Use [z5: Time code] (the [z3] tab in
<A>) to set the time code.
Count Up
Rec run
Free run
: The time code counts up only while you are shooting a
movie. The time code will continue in the sequence of the
movie files captured.
: The time code counts up whether you are shooting a
movie or not.
Start Time Setting
You can set the time code’s start time.
Manual input setting : You can freely set the hour, minute, second,
and frames.
Reset
: The time set with [Manual input setting] and
[Set to camera time] is reset to “00:00:00.” or
“00:00:00:” (p.341).
Set to camera time : Sets hours, minutes, and seconds to match the
camera’s internal clock. “Frames” will be set to 00.
 Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code.
 If [Free run] is set and you change the time, zone, or daylight saving
time (p.47), the time code will be affected.
 If you use a different camera to play an MP4 movie recorded with this
camera, the time code may not be displayed correctly.
339
3 Setting the Time Code
Movie Recording Count
You can select what to display on the movie shooting screen.
Rec time
Time code
: Indicates the elapsed time from the start of the movie
shooting.
: Indicates the time code during movie shooting.
Movie Playback Count
You can select what to display on the movie playback screen.
Rec time
Time code
: Displays the recording time and playback time during
movie playback.
: Displays the time code during movie playback.
With [Time code] set:
During movie shooting
During movie playback
 Regardless of the [Movie rec count] setting, the time code will always
be recorded to the movie file.
 The [Movie play count] setting under [z5: Time code] switches in
tandem with the [x3: Movie play count] setting. Changing either
setting will automatically change the other.
 “Frames” are not displayed for movie shooting or during movie playback.
340
3 Setting the Time Code
HDMI
 Time code
The time code can be appended to a movie that is output via HDMI
(p.350).
Enable: Appends time code to HDMI output movie.
Disable: Time code not appended to HDMI output movie.
 Record command
When you record a movie that is an output from HDMI to an external
recording device, the camera’s movie shooting start/stop can sync
with the recording from that external recording device.
Enable: Synchronizes external recording device’s recording start/
stop with camera’s movie shooting start/stop.
Disable: Controls external device’s recording start/stop from
external recording device.
To check whether your external recording device is compatible with the
[Time code] or [Rec command], consult the manufacturer.
Drop Frame
If the frame rate setting is 6 (29.97 fps) or 8 (59.94 fps), the time
code’s frame count causes a discrepancy between the actual time and
time code. This discrepancy can be corrected automatically. This
correction function is called “drop frame.”
Enable : The discrepancy is corrected automatically by skipping time
code numbers (DF: Drop frame).
Disable : The discrepancy is not corrected (NDF: Non-drop frame).
The time code will be displayed as follows:
Enable (DF)
Disable (NDF)
: 00:00:00. (Playback time: 00:00:00.00)
: 00:00:00: (Playback time: 00:00:00:00)
If the frame rate is 4(23.98 fps), B(24.00 fps), 5(25.00 fps), or
7(50.00 fps), drop frame is not used. (If 4/B is set or if [53: Video
system] is set to [For PAL], [Drop frame] will not be displayed.)
341
3 Menu Function Settings
z4
When the Live View shooting/Movie
shooting switch is set to <k>, the
movie shooting menu options will appear
under the [z4] and [z5] tabs (the
[z2] [z3] tabs in <A>).
 Movie Servo AF
During movie shooting, the camera focuses on the subject
continuously. The default setting is [Enable].
When [Enable] is set:
• The camera focuses on the subject continuously even when you
are not pressing the shutter button halfway.
• Since this drives the lens continuously, it will consume battery
power and shorten the total possible movie shooting time (p.325).
• With certain lenses, the lens mechanical sound during focusing
may be recorded. If this happens, the lens mechanical sound in
the movie may be reduced by using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately). Also, using a lens like the
EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS USM will reduce lens operation
noise.
• If you want to set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> during
Movie Servo AF, first set the Live View shooting/Movie shooting
switch to <A>.
If L8(59.94 fps) or 7(50.00 fps) is set, Movie Servo AF will not work.
Also, since contrast detection is used for AF control, it may take longer to
focus.
342
3 Menu Function Settings
• If you want to keep the focus at a specific point or you do not
want the lens operation noise to be recorded, you can
temporarily stop Movie Servo AF as follows. When you stop
Movie Servo AF, the AF point will turn gray. When you perform
the same steps below, Movie Servo AF will resume.
• Press the <D> button.
• Under [83: Custom controls], if a button is assigned to [AF
stop], you can pause the Movie Servo AF while holding down
that button. When you let go of the button, Movie Servo AF
will resume.
• When Movie Servo AF is paused, if you return to movie shooting
after pressing the <M> or <x> button, changing the AF
method, or performing some other operation, Movie Servo AF will
resume automatically.
When [Disable] is set:
• Press the shutter button halfway or press the <p> button to
focus.
 AF method
The AF methods are the same as described on pages 299-307. You
can select [u+Tracking], [FlexiZone - Multi], or [FlexiZone Single].
Cautions When [Movie Servo AF] is Set to [Enable]
 Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult
• A fast-moving subject approaching or moving away from the camera.
• A subject moving at a close distance in front of the camera.
• Also see “Shooting Conditions that Make Focusing Difficult” on page
306.
 Movie Servo AF will pause during zooming or magnified view.
 During movie shooting, if a subject approaches or moves away or if the
camera is moved vertically or horizontally (panning), the recorded movie
image may momentarily expand or contract (change in image
magnification).
343
3 Menu Function Settings
 Grid display
With [3x3 l] or [6x4 m], you can display grid lines to help you
level the camera vertically or horizontally. Also, with [3x3+diag n],
the grid is displayed together with diagonal lines to help you
compose with better balance by aligning the intersections over the
subject.
Note that the grid is not displayed during movie shooting.
 Movie recording quality
You can set the movie recording format (MOV or MP4), movie
recording size, and 24.00p. For details, see page 330.
 Sound recording
You can set sound-recording settings. For details, see page 336.
344
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie Servo AF speedN
You can set the Movie Servo AF’s AF
speed and its operation conditions.
This function is settable when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Additionally, the function is only enabled
when using a lens compatible with slow
focus transition during movie shooting*.
When active : [Always on] sets the AF adjustment speed to take
effect at all times for movie shooting (before and
during movie shooting). [During shooting] sets the
AF adjustment speed to take effect only during
movie shooting.
AF speed
: You can set the AF adjustment speed (focus
transition speed) to one of five levels, from standard
speed to slow, to obtain the desired effect.
* Lenses supporting slow focus transition during movie shooting
USM lenses marketed in 2009 or later and STM lenses (for example,
the EF-S18-135mm f/3.5-5.6 IS STM) support slow focus transition
during movie shooting. For details, refer to the Canon website.
If L8(59.94 fps) or 7(50.00 fps) is set, Movie Servo AF will not
function and therefore the settings above will not be available.
If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi], the AF
adjustment speed will be equivalent to the [Standard] setting.
345
3 Menu Function Settings
 Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivityN
You can change the Movie Servo AF’s
tracking sensitivity to one of five levels.
This affects the responsiveness of AF
tracking sensitivity when the AF point
loses the subject, such as during
panning or when an obstacle enters the
AF points.
This function is available when [Movie
Servo AF] is set to [Enable] and [AF
method] is set to [FlexiZone - Single].
Locked on: -2 / Locked on: -1
This setting makes the camera less inclined to track a different
subject if the AF point loses the original subject. The -2 setting
makes the camera less inclined to track a different subject than the
-1 setting. It is effective when you want to prevent the AF points from
rapidly tracking something that is not the intended subject during
panning or when an obstacle enters the AF points.
Responsive: +2 / Responsive: +1
This makes the camera more responsive when tracking a subject
that covers the AF point. The +2 setting makes the AF point more
responsive than +1. It is effective when you want to keep tracking a
moving subject as its distance from the camera changes, or to
rapidly focus on another subject.
If L8(59.94 fps) or 7(50.00 fps) is set, Movie Servo AF will not
function and therefore the settings above will not be available.
If [AF method] is set to [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Multi], the tracking
sensitivity will be equivalent to the [0] setting.
346
3 Menu Function Settings
z5
 Silent LV shootingN
This function applies to still photo shooting. For details, see page
297.
 Metering timerN
You can change how long the exposure setting is displayed (AE lock
time).
 Time code
You can set the time code. For details, see pages 339-341.
 Silent Control
When [Enable h] is set, you can use the touch pad <h> and
Quick Control screen to change settings silently during movie
shooting. For details, see page 338.
347
3 Menu Function Settings
 V button function
You can set the functions performed by pressing the shutter button
halfway or completely during movie shooting.
Setting
Pressed Halfway
/z
Metering and AF
Still photo shooting
Metering only
Still photo shooting
q/z
/k
q/k
Pressed Completely
Metering and AF
Starts/stops movie shooting
Metering only
Starts/stops movie shooting
If [
/k] or [q/k] is set, besides pressing the <0> button,
you can start/stop the movie shooting by pressing the shutter button
completely or by using Remote Switch RS-80N3 or Timer Remote
Controller TC-80N3 (both sold separately, p.248). However, with
[
/k] or [q/k] set, still photo shooting (p.327) is not possible.
During movie shooting, the [V button function] setting overrides any
function assigned to the shutter button with [83: Custom Controls].
 HDMI output + LCD
This is for recording an HDMI movie to an external recording device.
The default setting is [No mirroring].
[No mirroring]
• When HDMI output starts, the camera’s LCD monitor turns off.
• Shooting information, AF point, and other details are overlaid on the
HDMI output movie. However, while viewing an external monitor
connected to an external recording device, you can press the
<B> button to switch to output without any information overlay.
• If you do not connect the HDMI output to an external device and
only view the output on the camera’s LCD monitor, you cannot
make the settings for output without an information overlay even
by pressing the <B> button.
• When recording a movie without an information overlay, use an
external monitor to confirm that the shooting information, AF point,
and other details are not displayed (confirm that the movie is
output without an information overlay) before recording.
348
3 Menu Function Settings
[Mirroring]
• The movie is displayed on the LCD monitor and via the HDMI
output simultaneously.
• The HDMI output movie does not show the shooting information,
AF frame, and other details (output without an information
overlay).
If you will leave the camera untouched for more than 30 minutes
during HDMI output, select [No mirroring] and set [52: Auto
power off] to [Disable] (p.69).
 If the HDMI movie is output without an information overlay, remaining
card capacity, remaining battery capacity, internal temperature warning
(p.351), and other warnings will not be displayed on the HDMI output
device’s screen. Be especially careful if [No mirroring] is set. If
[Mirroring] is set, you can check for warnings on the camera’s LCD
monitor.
 When you are not shooting movies, the power will turn off automatically
after the [52: Auto power off] time elapses. If [Mirroring] is selected
and [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], HDMI output will stop
(movie shooting will stop) if you leave the camera untouched for 30
minutes.
 Even when [Mirroring] is set, if you play back an image or display a
menu, the HDMI movie will not be displayed.
 Avoid still photo shooting (p.327) while recording the HDMI output to an
external recording device. Some external recording devices may not
synchronize the time code or audio with movie images, or may produce
audio interference, resulting in the movie not being recorded correctly as
intended.
 Depending on the viewing environment, the brightness of the movie shot
with the camera may look different from that of the HDMI output movie
recorded to an external recording device.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information
displayed.
 A time code can be appended to the HDMI output movie (p.341).
 The HDMI output will also output sound (except when [Sound
recording] is set to [Off]).
349
3 Menu Function Settings
53
 HDMI frame rate
For HDMI output, you can set the frame rate to [Auto], [59.94i]/
[50.00i], [59.94p]/[50.00p], or [23.98p]. Set the frame rate that is
compatible with the commercially-available external recording
device you will use to record the movie via HDMI output.
The frame rate cannot be set if [24.00p] for [z4: Movie rec quality] is set
to [Enable].
 The selectable frame rates vary according to the [53: Video system]
setting. If the movie does not appear on the HDMI output device, set the
[53: Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on
the video standard of your output device).
 If the manually-set frame rate is not compatible with the external
recording device, the frame rate will be set automatically.
 If [53: HDMI frame rate]’s [59.94i] or [59.94p] is set together with the
movie recording size 4 (23.98 fps), the movie will be converted via 2:3
pull down.
350
General Movie Shooting Cautions
White <s> and Red <E> Internal Temperature Warning Icons
 If the camera’s internal temperature increases due to prolonged movie shooting
or under a high ambient temperature, a white <s> or red <E> icon will appear.
 The white <s> icon indicates that the image quality of still photos will
deteriorate. It is recommended that you stop still photo shooting for a
while and allow the camera to cool down. Since movie image quality will
hardly be affected, you can still shoot movies.
 The red <E> icon indicates that movie shooting will soon be terminated
automatically. If this happens, you will not be able to shoot again until the
camera’s internal temperature decreases. Turn off the power and let the
camera rest for a while.
 Shooting a movie at a high temperature for a prolonged period will cause the <s>
or <E> icon to appear earlier. When you are not shooting, turn off the camera.
Recording and Image Quality
 If the attached lens has an Image Stabilizer and you set the Image Stabilizer
(IS) switch to <1>, the Image Stabilizer will operate at all times even if
you do not press the shutter button halfway. The Image Stabilizer consumes
battery power and may shorten the total movie shooting time or decrease
the number of possible shots. If you use a tripod or if the Image Stabilizer is
not necessary, it is recommended that you set the IS switch to <2>.
 The camera’s built-in microphone will also pick up the operation sound
and mechanical sound of the camera during shooting. These sounds in
the movie may be reduced by using the Directional Stereo Microphone
DM-E1 (sold separately).
 Do not connect anything other than an external microphone to the
camera’s external microphone IN terminal.
 With autoexposure shooting or shutter-priority AE, if the brightness
changes during movie shooting, the movie may freeze temporarily. In
such cases, shoot movies with aperture-priority AE or manual exposure.
 If there is a very bright light source in the image, the bright area may
appear black on the LCD monitor. The movie will be recorded almost
exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 In low light, noise or irregular colors may appear in the image. The movie
will be recorded almost exactly as it appears on the LCD monitor.
 If you play back a movie with other devices, image or sound quality may
deteriorate or playback may not be possible (even if the devices support
MOV/MP4 format).
351
General Movie Shooting Cautions
Recording and Image Quality
 If you use a card with a slow writing speed, a five-level
indicator may appear on the right of the screen during
movie shooting. It indicates how much data has not
yet been written to the card (remaining capacity of the
internal buffer memory). The slower the card, the
faster the indicator will climb upward. If the indicator
Indicator
becomes full, movie shooting will stop automatically.
If the card has a fast writing speed, the indicator will
either not appear or the level (if displayed) will hardly go upward. First,
shoot a few test movies to see if the card can write fast enough.
 If the indicator indicates that the card is full and movie shooting stops
automatically, the sound near the end of the movie may not be recorded
properly.
 If the card’s writing speed decreases (due to fragmentation) and the
indicator appears, formatting the CF card (p.67) or low-level formatting of
the SD card (p.67-68) may resolve the problem.
Still Photo Shooting during Movie Shooting
 Regarding the image quality of still photos, see “Image Quality” on page
310.
Restrictions on MP4-format Movies
Note that generally the following restrictions apply to MP4-format movies.
 Sound will not be recorded on approx. the last two frames.
 When you play back movies on Windows, images and sound may
become slightly out of synchronization.
352
10
Image Playback
This chapter explains how to play back or erase photos
and movies, how to display them on a TV screen, and
other playback-related functions.
Images shot and saved with another device
The camera may not be able to properly display images captured
with a different camera, edited with a computer, or that have had their
file names changed.
353
x Image Playback
Single-Image Display
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button.
 The last image captured or played
back will appear.
an image.
2 Select
 To play back images starting with the
last image captured, turn the <5>
dial counterclockwise. To play back
images starting with the first captured
image, turn the dial clockwise.
 Each time you press the <B>
button, the information display will
change.
No information
Basic information display
Shooting information display
354
x Image Playback
the image playback.
3 Exit
 Press the <x> button to exit the
image playback and return to
shooting-ready state.
Shooting Information Display
With the shooting information screen displayed (p.354), you can tilt
<9> up or down to change the shooting information displayed at the
screen’s bottom as follows. For details, see pages 357-358.
Detailed information
GPS information
Lens / Histogram information
Lens aberration correction information
White balance information
Color space / Noise reduction information
Picture Style information
3 Grid Display
In single-image display and two-image
display (p.366), you can overlay the grid
on the image playback.
With [33: Playback grid], you can
select [3x3 l], [6x4 m], or [3x3+diag
n].
This function is convenient for checking
the image’s vertical or horizontal tilt, as
well as composition.
The grid is not displayed during movie playback.
355
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Information for Still Photos
 Basic information display
Eye-Fi transfer completed
Wi-Fi function*/Eye-Fi
card transmission status
Signal strength*
Rating
Protect images
Card
Battery check
Playback number/
Total images
recorded
Folder number File number
Shutter speed
Image-recording
quality
Aperture
Exposure compensation
amount
Highlight tone priority
ISO speed
* Refer to the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual.
356
B: Shooting Information Display
 Shooting information display
• Detailed information
Exposure compensation amount
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode/
Multiple exposure
White balance
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)
Shooting date
and time
ISO speed
Scroll bar
Highlight tone priority
Metering mode
File size
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
Color temperature
when <P> is set
White balance correction
Flash exposure compensation
amount / HDR Mode /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Image-recording quality
Picture Style/Settings
AF Microadjustment
* When you shoot in RAW+JPEG image quality, the RAW image file size will be
displayed.
* During flash photography without flash exposure compensation, <0> will be
displayed.
* <w> and the dynamic range adjustment amount will be displayed for images
taken in the HDR mode.
* <P> will be displayed for multiple-exposure photos.
* <M> will be displayed for images shot with Multi Shot Noise Reduction.
* For still photos taken during movie shooting, <G> will be displayed.
* For images developed with the camera’s RAW processing function or resized
and then saved, <u> will be displayed.
If the image was taken by another camera, certain shooting information may
not be displayed.
357
B: Shooting Information Display
• Lens/Histogram information
Histogram display
(Brightness)
Lens name
Focal length
Histogram display
(RGB)
• White balance information
• Picture Style information
• Color space / Noise
reduction information
• Lens aberration correction
information
• GPS information
Latitude
Longitude
Elevation
UTC (Coordinated
Universal Time)
Direction
If GPS information was not recorded for the image, the GPS information
screen will not be displayed.
358
B: Shooting Information Display
Sample Movie Information Display
Playback
Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Movie file size
Movie recording format
Movie recording size
Frame rate
Shooting time, Playback time/
Time code
Compression method
• < > and < > modes: Shutter speed, aperture and ISO speed are not
displayed.
• < > mode: Aperture and ISO speed are not displayed.
• < > mode: Shutter speed and ISO speed are not displayed.
• < > mode + Auto ISO: ISO speed is not displayed.
 Highlight Alert
When [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable], overexposed
highlight areas will blink. To obtain more image detail in the
overexposed, blinking areas, set the exposure compensation to a
negative amount and shoot again.
 AF Point Display
When [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable], the AF point that
achieved focus will be displayed in red. If automatic AF point
selection is set, multiple AF points may be displayed.
359
B: Shooting Information Display
 Histogram
The brightness histogram shows the exposure level distribution and
overall brightness. The RGB histogram is for checking the color
saturation and gradation. The display can be switched with [33:
Histogram disp.].
[Brightness] Display
Sample Histograms
This histogram is a graph showing the
distribution of the image’s brightness level. The
horizontal axis indicates the brightness level
Dark image
(darker on the left and brighter on the right),
while the vertical axis indicates how many
pixels exist for each brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker the
Normal brightness
image. The more pixels there are toward the
right, the brighter the image. If there are too
many pixels on the left, the shadow detail will be
Bright image
lost. If there are too many pixels on the right, the
highlight detail will be lost. The gradation inbetween will be reproduced. By checking the image and its
brightness histogram, you can see the exposure level inclination and
the overall gradation.
[RGB] Display
This histogram is a graph showing the distribution of each primary
color’s brightness level in the image (RGB or red, green, and blue).
The horizontal axis indicates the color’s brightness level (darker on
the left and brighter on the right), while the vertical axis indicates
how many pixels exist for each color brightness level. The more
pixels there are toward the left, the darker and less prominent the
color. The more pixels there are toward the right, the brighter and
denser the color. If there are too many pixels on the left, the
respective color information will be lacking. If there are too many
pixels on the right, the color will be too saturated with no gradation.
By checking the image’s RGB histogram, you can see the color’s
saturation and gradation condition, as well as white balance
inclination.
360
x Searching for Images Quickly
H Display Multiple Images on One Screen (Index Display)
You can search for images quickly with the index display showing 4, 9,
36, or 100 images on one screen.
1
Press the <u> button.
 During image playback or when the
camera is ready to shoot, press the
<u> button.
 [6u] will be displayed on the lower
right of the screen.
to the index display.
2 Switch
 Turn the <6> dial counterclockwise.
 The 4-image index display will
appear. The selected image is
highlighted with an orange frame.
 Turning the <6> dial further
counterclockwise will switch the
display from 9 images, 36 images
and to 100 images. If you turn the dial
clockwise, it will rotate through 100,
36, 9, 4, and single-image display.
B
B
B
B
an image.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to move the
orange frame and select the image.
 Press the <u> button to turn off the
[6u] icon, then turn the <6> dial to
go to the next screen or previous image.
 Press <0> in the index display to
display the selected image in the
single-image display.
361
x Searching for Images Quickly
I
Jump through Images (Jump Display)
In the single-image display, you can turn the <6> dial to jump through
the images forward or backward according to the jump method set.
1
Select [Image jump w/6].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
jump w/6], then press <0>.
the jump method.
2 Select
 Select the jump method, then press
<0>.
d: Display images one by one
e: Jump 10 images
f: Jump 100 images
g: Display by date
h: Display by folder
i: Display movies only
j: Display stills only
P: Display protected images only
k: Display by image rating (p.371)
Turn the <6> dial to select.
362
x Searching for Images Quickly
by jumping.
3 Browse
 Press the <x> button to play back
Jump method
images.
 In the single-image display, turn the
<6> dial.
 You can browse by the method that
was set.
Playback position
 To search images by shooting date, select [Date].
 To search images by folder, select [Folder].
 If the card contains both movies and still photos, select [Movies] or
[Stills] to display one or the other.
 If no images match the [Protect] or [Rating] setting, you cannot browse
through images with the <6> dial.
363
u Magnifying Images
You can magnify a captured image by approx. 1.5x to 10x on the LCD
monitor.
1
Magnified area position
Magnify the image.
 The image can be magnified as
follows: 1. During image playback
(single-image display), 2. During the
image review after image capture,
and 3. From the shooting-ready state.
 Press the <u> button.
 The magnified view will appear. The
magnified area and [6u] will be
displayed on the lower right of the
screen.
 The image magnification increases
as you turn the <6> dial clockwise.
You can magnify the image up to 10x.
 The image magnification decreases
as you turn the <6> dial
counterclockwise. In the case of 1
and 3 only, turning the dial further will
display the index display (p.361).
around the image.
2 Scroll
 Use <9> to scroll around the
magnified image.
 To exit the magnified view, press the
<u> button or <x> button and the
single-image display will return.
 In the case of 1 and 3 only, you can turn the <5> dial to view another
image while the magnification is maintained.
 A movie cannot be magnified.
364
u Magnifying Images
3 Magnification Settings
Under the [33] tab, when you select
[Magnificatn (apx)], you can set the
starting magnification and initial position
for the magnified view.
 1x (no magnification)
The image is not magnified. The magnified view will start with the
single-image display.
 2x, 4x, 8x, 10x (magnify from center)
The magnified view starts at the image center at the selected
magnification.
 Actual size (from selected point)
The recorded image’s pixels will be displayed at approx. 100%. The
magnified view starts at the AF point that achieved focus. If the
photo is taken with manual focus, the magnified view starts at the
image center.
 Same as last magnification (from center)
The magnification will be the same as the last time you exited the
magnified view with the <x> or <u> button. The magnified view
starts at the image center.
For images taken with [u+Tracking] or [FlexiZone - Single] (p.299) or with
[Distortion] set to [Enable] (p.182), the magnified view will start at the
image center even if [Actual size (from selected pt)] is set.
365
X Comparing Images (Two-Image Display)
You can compare two images side by side on the LCD monitor. In the
two-image display, you can use magnified view or jump display as well
as protect, rate, and delete images.
1
Set the two-image display.
 During image playback, press the
<X> button.
 The two-image index display will
appear. The currently-selected image
will be highlighted with an orange
frame.
the images to be
2 Select
compared.
 Pressing <0> switches the orange
frame between the two images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image.
 Repeat this procedure to select the
other image to be compared.
 If the left and right images are the
same, the [
] icon will appear on
the upper left of both images.
 By pressing the <Q> button, you can
set the same magnification and
magnified area for both images. (The
magnification settings will match
those of the image not highlighted
with an orange frame.)
 By holding the <x> button, you can
display the image highlighted with an
orange frame as a single image.
 To return to the previous display,
press the <X> button.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can change the information display.
 You cannot play back movies in the two-image display.
366
b Rotating the Image
You can rotate the displayed image to the desired orientation.
1
Select [Rotate image].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Rotate
image], then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be rotated.
 You can also select an image in the
index display (p.361).
the image.
3 Rotate
 Each time you press <0>, the
image will rotate clockwise as follows:
90° 9 270° 9 0°.
 To rotate another image, repeat steps
2 and 3.
 If you set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD] (p.395) before taking vertical
shots, you need not rotate the image as described above.
 If the rotated image is not displayed in the rotated orientation during
image playback, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD].
 A movie cannot be rotated.
367
K Protecting Images
Protecting an image prevents it from being erased accidentally.
3 Protecting a Single Image
1
Select [Protect images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Protect
images], then press <0>.
[Select images].
2 Select
 An image will be displayed.
Image protection icon
an image.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.361).
the image.
4 Protect
 Press <0> to protect the selected
image. The <K> icon will appear at
the top of the screen.
 To cancel the image protection, press
<0> again. The <K> icon will
disappear.
 To protect another image, repeat step
3 and 4.
368
K Protecting Images
3 Protecting All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can protect all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When you select [All images in folder]
or [All images on card] in [31:
Protect images], all the images in the
folder or on the card will be protected.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Unprotect all images in folder] or
[Unprotect all images on card].
If you format the card (p.67), the protected images will also be erased.
 Movies can also be protected.
 Once an image is protected, it cannot be erased by the camera’s erase
function. To erase a protected image, you must first cancel the
protection.
 If you erase all the images (p.393), only the protected images will
remain. This is convenient when you want to erase unnecessary images
all at once.
 When [All images on card] or [Unprotect all images on card] is
selected, the images will be protected or unprotected on the card
selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record
func+card/folder sel.].
369
K Protecting Images
Protecting Images with the <c> Button
During image playback, you can use the <c> button to protect an
image.
1
Select [m btn function].
 Under the [53] tab, select [m
button function], then press <0>.
2 Select [Protect].
an image.
3 Select
 Press the <x> button to play back
images.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be protected.
 You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.361).
the image.
4 Protect
 When you press the <c> button,
the image will be protected and the
<K> icon will appear.
 To cancel the image protection, press
the <c> button again. The <K>
icon will disappear.
370
Setting Ratings
You can rate images (still photos and movies) with one of the five rating
marks: l/m/n/o/p. This function is called rating.
Rating Images with the <c> Button
1
Select an image.
 During image playback, turn the
<5> dial to select an image or movie
to be rated.
 You can also select an image or
movie on the index display (p.361).
the image.
2 Rate
 Each time you press the <c>
button, the rating mark will change:
l/m/n/o/p/None.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 1
and 2.
 If [53: m btn function] is set to [Protect], change it to [Rating].
 If you press the <Q> button when [Rating] is selected in [53: m btn
function], you can set the rating marks that can be selected when you
press the <c> button.
371
Setting Ratings
3 Setting Ratings with the Menu
1
Select [Rating].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Rating],
then press <0>.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
or movie to be rated.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
the image.
3 Rate
 Press <0> and a blue highlight
frame will appear as shown in the
screenshot.
 Turn the <5> dial to select a rating,
then press <0>.
 The total number of images rated will
be counted and displayed for each
rating.
 To rate another image, repeat steps 2
and 3.
372
Setting Ratings
A total of up to 999 images of a given rating can be displayed. If there are
more than 999 images with a given rating, [###] will be displayed.
Taking Advantage of Ratings
 With [32: Image jump w/6], you can display only images having the
specified rating.
 With [32: Slide show], you can play back only images with a specific
rating.
 With Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.534), you can select
only the image with a specific rating (still photos only).
 With Windows 8.1, Windows 8, Windows 7, etc., you can see each file’s
rating as part of the file information display or in the provided image
viewer (JPEG images only).
373
Q Quick Control for Playback
During playback, you can press the <Q> button to set the following:
[J: Protect images], [b: Rotate image], [9: Rating], [R: RAW
image processing] (RAW images only), [S: Resize] (JPEG image
only), [ : Highlight alert], [ : AF point display], and [e: Image
jump w/6].
For movies, only the functions in bold above can be set.
1
Press the <Q> button.
 During image playback, press the
<Q> button.
 The Quick Control options will
appear.
an item and set it.
2 Select
 Tilt <9> up or down to select a
function.
 The setting of the selected function is
displayed at the bottom.
 Turn the <5> dial to set it.
 For RAW image processing and
Resize, press <0> and set the
function. For details, see page 398 for
RAW image processing and page 403
for Resize. To cancel, press the
<M> button.
the setting.
3 Exit
 Press the <Q> button to exit the
Quick Control screen.
374
Q Quick Control for Playback
To rotate an image, set [51: Auto rotate] to [OnzD]. If [51: Auto rotate]
is set to [OnD] or [Off], the [b Rotate image] setting will be recorded to
the image, but the camera will not rotate the image for display.
 Pressing the <Q> button during the index display will switch to the
single-image display and the Quick Control screen will appear. Pressing
the <Q> button again will return to the index display.
 For images taken with another camera, the options you can select may
be restricted.
375
k Enjoying Movies
You can play back movies in the following three ways:
Playback on a TV Set
(p.385)
By connecting the camera to a TV set
with HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold
separately), you can play back the
camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set.
 Since hard disk recorders do not have an HDMI IN port, the camera
cannot be connected to a hard disk recorder with an HDMI cable.
 Even if the camera is connected to a hard disk recorder with a USB
cable, movies and still photos cannot be played back or saved.
Playback on the Camera’s LCD Monitor
(p.378-379)
You can play back movies on the
camera’s LCD monitor. You can also edit
out the movie’s first and last scenes, and
play back the still photos and movies on
the card in an automatic slide show.
A movie edited with a computer cannot be rewritten to the card and played
back with the camera.
376
k Enjoying Movies
Playback and Editing with a Computer
(p.534)
The movie files recorded on the card can
be transferred to a computer and played
back or edited with pre-installed or
general-purpose software compatible
with the movie’s recording format.
If you want to use commercially-available software to play back or edit the
movies, be sure it is compatible with MOV or MP4 files. For details on
commercially-available software, contact the software manufacturer.
377
k Playing Movies
1
Play back the image.
 Press the <x> button to display an
image.
a movie.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
movie to be played.
 With the single-image display, the
<s1> icon displayed on the
upper left indicates a movie.
 In the index display, perforations at the
left edge of a thumbnail indicate a
movie. As movies cannot be played
from the index display, press <0>
to switch to the single-image display.
display, press <0>.
3 IntheThesingle-image
movie playback panel will appear
at the bottom of the screen.
back the movie.
4 Play
 Select [7] (Play), then press <0>.
Speaker (for sound)
 The movie will start playing.
 You can pause the movie playback by
pressing <0>.
 You can adjust the sound volume
during movie playback by turning the
<6> dial.
 For more details on the playback
procedure, see the next page.
 Before listening to a movie’s sound through headphones, turn down the
volume to prevent hurting your ears.
 The camera may not be able to play movies shot with another camera.
378
k Playing Movies
Movie Playback Panel
Operation
Playback Description
7 Play
Pressing <0> toggles between play and stop.
8 Slow motion
Adjust the slow motion speed by turning the <5> dial.
The slow motion speed is indicated on the upper right of
the screen.
5 First frame
Displays the movie’s first frame.
3 Previous frame
Each time you press <0>, the previous frame is
displayed. If you hold down <0>, it will rewind the movie.
6 Next frame
Each time you press <0>, the movie will play frame-byframe. If you hold down <0>, it will fast forward the
movie.
4 Last frame
Displays the movie’s last frame.
X Edit
Displays the editing screen (p.380).
Playback position
mm’ ss”
Playback time (minutes:seconds with [Movie play count:
Rec time] set)
hh:mm:ss.ff (DF)
Time code (hours:minutes:seconds:frames with [Movie
hh:mm:ss:ff (NDF) play count: Time code] set)
9 Volume
Turn the <6> dial to adjust the volume of the built-in
speaker (p.378) or headphones.
32
To return to the single-image display, press the <M>
button.
 With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N, the continuous playback time
at room temperature (23°C/73°F) will be approx. 3 hr. 20 min.
 By connecting commercially-available headphones equipped with a 3.5
mm diameter stereo mini plug to the camera’s headphone terminal
(p.23), you can listen to the movie’s sound (p.337).
 If you connect the camera to a TV set to play back a movie (p.385),
adjust the sound volume with the TV set. (Turning the <6> dial will not
change the sound volume.) If there is audio feedback, place the camera
farther away from the TV set or turn down the TV sound volume.
 If you took a still photo while you shot the movie, the still photo will be
displayed for approx. 1 sec. during the movie playback.
379
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
You can edit out the first and last scenes of a movie in approx. 1-sec.
increments.
1
On the movie playback screen,
select [X].
 The movie editing panel will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
the part to be edited out.
2 Specify
 Select either [U] (Cut beginning) or
[V] (Cut end), then press <0>.
 Tilt <9> to the left or right to see the
previous or next frames. Holding
down the key will fast forward or fast
rewind the frames. Turn the <5> dial
for frame-by-frame playback.
 After deciding which part to edit out,
press <0>. The portion highlighted
in white on the top of the screen is
what will remain.
the edited movie.
3 Check
 Select [7] and press <0> to play
back the edited movie.
 To change the editing, go back to step
2.
 To cancel the editing, press the
<M> button, then select [OK] on
the confirmation screen.
380
X Editing a Movie’s First and Last Scenes
the edited movie.
4 Save
 Select [W], then press <0>.
 The save screen will appear.
 To save it as a new movie, select
[New file]. To save it and overwrite
the original movie file, select
[Overwrite], then press <0>.
 On the confirmation screen, select
[OK] to save the edited movie and
return to the movie playback screen.
 Since the editing is performed in approx. 1-sec. increments (position
indicated by [ ] on the top of the screen), the actual position where the
movie is edited may differ from the position you specified.
 If the card does not have enough free space, [New file] will not be
available.
 When the battery level is low, movie editing is not possible. Use a fullycharged battery.
 Movies shot with another camera cannot be edited with this camera.
381
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
You can play back the images on the card as an automatic slide show.
1
Number of images to be played
Select [Slide show].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Slide
show], then press <0>.
the images to be played.
2 Select
 Select the desired option on the
screen, then press <0>.
All images/Movies/Stills/Protect
 Select one of the following: [jAll
images] [kMovies] [zStills]
[JProtect]. Then press <0>.
Date/Folder/Rating
 Select one of the following: [iDate]
[nFolder] [9Rating].
 When <zH> is highlighted,
press the <B> button.
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
Date
382
Folder
Rating
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
Item
Playback Description
jAll images
All the still photos and movies on the card will be played
back.
iDate
Still photos and movies taken on the selected shooting date
will be played back.
nFolder
Still photos and movies in the selected folder will be played
back.
kMovies
Only the movies on the card will be played back.
zStills
Only the still photos on the card will be played back.
JProtected
Only the protected still photos and movies on the card will be
played back.
9Rating
Only the still photos and movies with the selected rating will
be played back.
[Set up] as desired.
3 Configure
 Select [Set up], then press <0>.
 Set the [Display time] and [Repeat]
settings for still photos.
 After completing the settings, press
the <M> button.
Display time
Repeat
When [All images] is selected, the images on the card selected for
[Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.] will
be played back.
383
3 Slide Show (Auto Playback)
the slide show.
4 Start
 Select [Start], then press <0>.
 After [Loading image...] is displayed,
the slide show will start.
the slide show.
5 Exit
 To exit the slide show and return to
the setting screen, press the <M>
button.
 To pause the slide show, press <0>. During pause, [G] will be
displayed on the upper left of the image. Press <0> again to resume
the slide show.
 During auto playback, you can press the <B> button to change the
still photo display format (p.354).
 During movie playback, you can adjust the sound volume by turning the
<6> dial.
 During auto playback or pause, you can turn the <5> dial to view
another image.
 During auto playback, auto power off will not take effect.
 The display time may vary depending on the image.
 To view the slide show on a TV set, see page 385.
384
Viewing Images on a TV Set
By connecting the camera to a TV set with an HDMI cable (sold
separately), you can play the camera’s still photos and movies on the
TV set. For the HDMI cable, HDMI Cable HTC-100 (sold separately) is
recommended.
If the picture does not appear on the TV screen, set the [53: Video
system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL] (depending on the video
standard of your TV set).
1
Connect the HDMI cable to the
camera.
 With the plug’s <dHDMI MINI> logo
facing the front of the camera, insert it
into the <D> terminal.
the HDMI cable to the TV
2 Connect
set.
 Connect the HDMI cable to the TV
set’s HDMI IN port.
on the TV set and switch the
3 Turn
TV set’s video input to select the
4
5
connected port.
Set the camera’s power switch to
<1>.
Press the <x> button.
 The image will appear on the TV
screen. (Nothing will be displayed on
the camera’s LCD monitor.)
 The images will automatically be
displayed at the TV set’s optimum
resolution.
 By pressing the <B> button, you
can change the display format.
 To play back movies, see page 378.
385
Viewing Images on a TV Set
 Adjust movie sound volume with the TV set. The sound volume cannot
be adjusted with the camera.
 Before connecting or disconnecting the cable between the camera and
TV set, turn off the camera and TV set.
 Depending on the TV set, part of the image displayed may be cut off.
 Do not connect any other device’s output to the camera’s <D>
terminal. Doing so may cause a malfunction.
 Certain TV sets may not be able to display the captured movies.
Using HDMI CEC TV Sets
If the TV set connected to the camera with an HDMI cable is compatible
with HDMI CEC*, you can use the TV set’s remote control for playback
operations.
* An HDMI-standard function enabling HDMI devices to control each other so that
you can control them with one remote control unit.
1
Set [Ctrl over HDMI] to [Enable].
 Under the [33] tab, select [Ctrl over
HDMI], then press <0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
the camera to a TV set.
2 Connect
 Use an HDMI cable to connect the
camera to the TV set.
 The TV set’s input will switch
automatically to the HDMI port
connected to the camera. If it does
not switch automatically, use the TV
set’s remote control to select the
HDMI IN port the cable is connected
to.
386
Viewing Images on a TV Set
the camera’s <x> button.
3 Press
 An image will appear on the TV
screen and you can use the TV set’s
remote control to play back images.
an image.
4 Select
 Point the remote control toward the
TV set and press the / button to
select an image.
Still photo playback menu
the remote control’s Enter
5 Press
button.
 The menu appears and you can
perform the playback operations
shown on the left.
 Press the remote control’s /
: Return
button to select the desired option,
: 9-image index
then press the Enter button. For a
: Play movie
slide show, press the / button to
: Slide show
select an option, then press the Enter
: Display shooting info
button.
: Rotate
 If you select [Return] and press the
Enter button, the menu will disappear
and you can use the / button to
select an image.
Movie playback menu
During the two-image display (p.366), playback with the TV’s remote control
is not possible. To use the TV’s remote control for playback, first press the
<X> button to return to the single-image display.
 Some TV sets require you to first enable the HDMI CEC connection. For
details, refer to the TV set’s instruction manual.
 Certain TV sets, even those compatible with HDMI CEC, may not
operate properly. In such a case, set [33: Ctrl over HDMI] to [Disable],
and use the camera to control the playback operation.
387
a Copying Images
The images recorded on one card can be copied to another card.
3 Copying a Single Image
1
Select [Image copy].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Image
copy], then press <0>.
[Sel.Image].
2 Select
 Check the copy source and target
cards’ number, and remaining
capacity.
 Select [Sel.Image], then press <0>.
Lowest file number
Number of images in folder
the folder.
3 Select
 Select the folder containing the image
you want to copy, then press <0>.
 Check the images displayed on the
right to select the desired folder.
 The images in the selected folder will
be displayed.
Folder name
Highest file number
The copy source is the card selected for [Record/play] or [Playback] under
[51: Record func+card/folder sel.].
388
a Copying Images
Total images selected
the images to be copied.
4 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select an image
to be copied, then press <0>.
 The [X] icon will appear on the upper
left of the screen.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
 To select other images to be copied,
repeat step 4.
the <c> button.
5 Press
 After selecting all the images to be
copied, press the <c> button.
Select [OK].
6  Check the card where the images will
be copied to, then select [OK].
the target folder.
7 Select
 Select the target folder to which you
want to copy the images, then press
<0>.
 To create a new folder, select [Create
folder].
389
a Copying Images
[OK].
8 Select
 Check the information of the source
card and target card, then select
[OK].
 The copying will start and the
progress will be displayed.
 When the copying is completed, the
result will be displayed. Select [OK] to
return to the screen in step 2.
3 Copying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can copy all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
Under [x1: Image copy], when you
select [Sel.n] or [All image], you can
copy all the images in the folder or on a
card.
390
a Copying Images
 The file name of the copied image will be the same as the source
image’s file name.
 If [Sel.Image] is set, you cannot copy images in multiple folders at once.
Select images in each folder to copy them folder by folder.
 If an image is being copied to a target folder/card which has an image
with the same file number, the following will be displayed: [Skip image
and continue] [Replace existing image] [Cancel copy]. Select the
copying method, then press <0>.
• [Skip image and continue]: Any images in the source folder having
the same file number as images in the target folder will be skipped and
not copied.
• [Replace existing image]: Any images in the target folder having the
same file number as the source images (including protected images)
will be overwritten.
If an image with a print order (p.421) is overwritten, you will have to set
the print order again.
 The image’s print order information, image transfer information, and
photo book order information will not be retained when the image is
copied.
 Shooting is not possible during the copying operation. Select [Cancel]
before shooting.
391
L Erasing Images
You can either select and erase unnecessary images one by one or
erase them in one batch. Protected images (p.368) will not be erased.
Once an image is erased, it cannot be recovered. Make sure you
no longer need the image before erasing it. To prevent important
images from being erased accidentally, protect them. Erasing a
RAW+JPEG image will erase both the RAW and JPEG images.
Erasing a Single Image
1 Play back the image to be erased.
the <L> button.
2 Press
 The Erase menu will appear.
the image.
3 Erase
 Select [Erase], then press <0>. The
image displayed will be erased.
Setting [84: Default Erase option] to [[Erase] selected] makes it faster to
erase images (p.444).
3 Checkmarking [X] Images to Be Erased in a Batch
By appending checkmarks <X> to the images to be erased, you can
erase multiple images at once.
1
392
Select [Erase images].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Erase
images], then press <0>.
L Erasing Images
[Select and erase images].
2 Select
 An image will be displayed.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
the images to be erased.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the image
to be erased, then press <0>.
 A checkmark [X] will be displayed on
the upper left of the screen.
 To select other images to be erased,
repeat step 3.
the image.
4 Erase
 Press the <L> button, then press
[OK].
 The selected images will be erased in
one batch.
3 Erasing All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can erase all the images in a folder or on a card at once. When
[31: Erase images] is set to [All images in folder] or [All images on
card], all the images in the folder or on the card will be erased.
 To erase all images, including protected images, format the card (p.67).
 When [All images on card] is selected, the images on the card selected
for [Record/play] or [Playback] under [51: Record func+card/folder
sel.] will be erased.
393
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Adjusting the LCD Monitor Brightness
The LCD monitor’s brightness is adjusted automatically for optimum
viewing depending on the ambient light level. You can also set the
automatic adjustment’s brightness level (brighter or darker), or adjust
the brightness manually.
1
Select [LCD brightness].
 Under the [52] tab, select [LCD
brightness], then press <0>.
[Auto] or [Manual].
2 Select
 Turn the <6> dial to make the
selection.
the brightness.
3 Adjust
 While referring to the gray chart, turn
the <5> dial, then press <0>.
 You can adjust [Auto] to one of three
levels, and [Manual] to one of seven
levels.
Automatic adjustment
Manual adjustment
While [Auto] is set, be careful not to obstruct the round, ambient light sensor
(p.24) on the lower left of the Quick Control Dial with your finger, etc.
 To check the image’s exposure, looking at the histogram is
recommended (p.360).
 During playback, pressing the <U> button will display the screen in step 2.
394
Changing Image Playback Settings
3 Auto Rotation of Vertical Images
Vertical images are rotated automatically so they
are displayed vertically on the camera’s LCD
monitor and on the computer instead of
horizontally. You can change the setting for this
feature.
1
Select [Auto rotate].
 Under the [51] tab, select [Auto
rotate], then press <0>.
the auto rotation.
2 Set
 Select the desired setting, then press
<0>.
 OnzD
The vertical image is automatically rotated during playback on both
the camera’s LCD monitor and on the computer.
 OnD
The vertical image is automatically rotated only on the computer.
 Off
The vertical image is not automatically rotated.
Auto rotation will not work with vertical images captured while auto rotation
was [Off]. They will not rotate even if you later switch it to [On] for playback.
 The vertical image will not be automatically rotated for the image review
just after shooting.
 If the vertical image is taken while the camera is pointed up or down, the
image may not be rotated automatically for playback.
 If the vertical image is not automatically rotated on the computer screen,
it means the software you are using is unable to rotate the image. Using
the EOS software is recommended.
395
396
11
Post-Processing
Images
You can process RAW images with the camera or
resize (reduce the resolution of) JPEG images.
 A M icon at the upper right of a page title indicates a
function that can be used only in these modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
 The camera may not be able to process images taken with
another camera.
 Post-processing images as described in this chapter cannot be
performed while the camera is connected to a computer via an
interface cable.
397
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
You can process 1 images with the camera and save them as JPEG
images. As the RAW image itself does not change, you can apply
different processing conditions to create any number of JPEG images
from it.
Note that 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the
camera. Use Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.534) to
process those images.
1
Select [RAW image processing].
 Under the [31] tab, select [RAW
image processing], then press
<0>.
 1 images will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to process.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the image.
3 Process
 Press <0> to make the RAWprocessing options appear (p.400).
 Use <9> to select an option, then
turn the <5> dial to set it.
 The displayed image will reflect
“Brightness adjustment”, “White
balance”, and any other setting
adjustments.
 To return to the image settings at the
time of shooting, press the <B>
button.
398
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Displaying the setting screen
 Press <0> to display the setting
screen. Turn the <5> or <6> dial
to change the setting. Press <0> to
finalize the setting and return to the
previous screen.
the image.
4 Save
 Select [W] (Save), then press <0>.
 Select [OK] to save the image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To process another image, repeat
steps 2 to 4.
Magnified View
You can magnify the image by pressing the <u> button in step 3. The
magnification will differ depending on the pixel count of [Image quality]
set in [RAW image processing]. With <9>, you can scroll around the
magnified image.
To cancel magnified view, press the <u> button again.
Images with Aspect Ratio Setting
Images shot with the aspect ratio (p.404) set to [4:3], [16:9], or [1:1] will
be displayed with lines indicating the image area. JPEG images
generated from RAW images will be saved in the set aspect ratio.
399
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
RAW Image Processing Options

Brightness adjustment
You can adjust the image brightness up to ±1 stop in 1/3-stop
increments. The displayed image will reflect the setting’s effect.

White balance (p.168)
You can select the white balance. If you select [P] and press the
<B> button, you can set the color temperature. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Picture Style (p.160)
You can select the Picture Style. By pressing the <B> button,
you can adjust the sharpness and other parameters. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect.

Auto Lighting Optimizer (p.175)
You can set the Auto Lighting Optimizer. The displayed image will
reflect the setting’s effect.

High ISO speed noise reduction (p.176)
You can set the noise reduction for high ISO speeds. The displayed
image will reflect the setting’s effect. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.399).

Image quality (p.149)
You can set the image quality when generating an image in JPEG
format.
400
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN

Color space (p.187)
You can select either sRGB or Adobe RGB. Since the camera’s LCD
monitor is not compatible with Adobe RGB, the image will not look
very different when either color space is set.

Peripheral illumination correction (p.181)
If [Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. If the effect
is difficult to discern, magnify the image (p.399) and check the four
corners. The peripheral illumination correction applied with the
camera will be less pronounced than with Digital Photo Professional
(EOS software) and may be less apparent. In such a case, use
Digital Photo Professional to apply the peripheral illumination
correction.

Distortion correction (p.182)
Image distortion due to lens characteristics can be corrected. If
[Enable] is set, the corrected image will be displayed. The image
periphery will be cropped in the corrected image.
Since the image resolution may look slightly lower, use the Picture
Style’s sharpness parameter to make adjustments as necessary.

Chromatic aberration correction (p.182)
Chromatic aberrations (color fringing along the subject’s outline) due
to the lens characteristics can be corrected. If [Enable] is set, the
corrected image will be displayed. If the effect is difficult to discern,
magnify the image (p.399).
401
R Processing RAW Images with the CameraN
Peripheral Illumination Correction, Distortion Correction, and
Chromatic Aberration Correction
To execute peripheral illumination correction, distortion correction, and
chromatic aberration correction with the camera, the correction data of the
lens used must be registered in the camera. If the lens correction data is not
registered in the camera, use EOS Utility (EOS software, p.534) to register
the lens correction data.
 Processing RAW images in the camera will not produce the same results
as processing RAW images with Digital Photo Professional.
 When processing images with [Distortion] set to [Enable], AF point
display information (p.359) and Dust Delete Data (p.407) will not be
appended to the image.
402
S Resizing JPEG Images
You can resize a JPEG image to make the pixel count lower and save it
as a new image. Resizing an image is possible only with JPEG 3/4/a/
b images. JPEG c and RAW images cannot be resized.
1
Select [Resize].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Resize],
then press <0>.
 An image will be displayed.
an image.
2 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image you want to resize.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from the index
display.
the desired image size.
3 Select
 Press <0> to display the image
sizes.
 Select the desired image size, then
press <0>.
Target sizes
the image.
4 Save
 Select [OK] to save the resized
image.
 Check the destination folder and
image file number, then select [OK].
 To resize another image, repeat steps
2 to 4.
403
S Resizing JPEG Images
Resize Options by Original Image Size
Original Image Size
3
Available Resize Settings
4
a
b
c
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
4
a
k
b
Image Sizes
Image sizes by aspect ratio are shown in the table below. The imagerecording quality figures marked with an asterisk do not exactly match
the aspect ratio. The image will be cropped slightly.
Image
Quality
Aspect Ratio and Pixel Count (Approx.)
3:2
4:3
16:9
1:1
4
3648x2432
3248x2432*
3648x2048*
2432x2432
(8.9 megapixels) (7.9 megapixels) (7.5 megapixels) (5.9 megapixels)
a
2736x1824
2432x1824
2736x1536*
1824x1824
(5.0 megapixels) (4.4 megapixels) (4.2 megapixels) (3.3 megapixels)
b
1920x1280
1696x1280*
1920x1080
1280x1280
(2.5 megapixels) (2.2 megapixels) (2.1 megapixels) (1.6 megapixels)
c
720x480
640x480
720x408*
480x480
(350,000 pixels) (310,000 pixels) (290,000 pixels) (230,000 pixels)
404
12
Sensor Cleaning
The camera has a Self Cleaning Sensor Unit to
automatically shake off dust adhered to the image
sensor’s front layer (low pass filter).
The Dust Delete Data can also be appended to the
image so that the dust spots remaining can be deleted
automatically by Digital Photo Professional (EOS
software, p.534).
Smudges adhering to the front of the sensor
Besides dust entering the camera from outside, in rare cases
lubricant from the camera’s internal parts may adhere to the front of
the sensor. If visible spots still remain after the automatic sensor
cleaning, having the sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
Even while the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit is operating, you can
press the shutter button halfway to interrupt the cleaning and start
shooting immediately.
405
f Automatic Sensor Cleaning
Whenever you set the power switch to <1> or <2>, the Self
Cleaning Sensor Unit operates to automatically shake off the dust on
the front of the sensor. Normally, you need not pay attention to this
operation. However, you can choose to perform sensor cleaning
manually, or disable it.
Cleaning the Sensor Now
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
[Clean nowf].
2 Select
 Select [Clean nowf], then press
<0>.
 Select [OK].
 The screen will indicate that the
sensor is being cleaned. (A small
sound may be heard.) Although there
will be a shutter sound, no picture is
taken.
 For best results, perform the sensor cleaning with the camera placed
upright and stable on a table or other flat surface.
 Even if you repeat the sensor cleaning, the result will not improve much.
Immediately after the sensor cleaning is finished, the [Clean nowf]
option will remain disabled temporarily.
Disabling Automatic Sensor Cleaning
 In step 2, select [Auto cleaningf] and set it to [Disable].
 The sensor cleaning will no longer be executed when you set the
power switch to <1> or <2>.
406
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
Normally, the Self Cleaning Sensor Unit will eliminate most of the dust
that may be visible on captured images. However, in case visible dust
still remains, you can append the Dust Delete Data to the image for
erasing the dust spots later. The Dust Delete Data is used by Digital
Photo Professional (EOS software, p.534) to erase the dust spots
automatically.
Preparation
 Prepare a solid white object such as a sheet of paper.
 Set the lens focal length to 50 mm or longer.
 Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <MF> and set the focus to
infinity (∞). If the lens has no distance scale, rotate the camera to
face towards you and turn the focusing ring clockwise all the way.
Obtaining the Dust Delete Data
1
Select [Dust Delete Data].
 Under the [z3] tab, select [Dust
Delete Data], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 After the automatic self-cleaning of
the sensor is performed, a message
will appear. Although there will be a
shutter sound during the cleaning, no
picture is taken.
407
3 Appending Dust Delete DataN
a solid-white object.
3 Shoot
 At a distance of 20 cm - 30 cm (0.7 ft.




- 1.0 ft.), fill the viewfinder with a
patternless, solid-white object and
take a picture.
The picture will be taken in aperturepriority AE mode at an aperture of f/22.
Since the image will not be saved, the
data can still be obtained even if there
is no card in the camera.
When the picture is taken, the camera
will start collecting the Dust Delete
Data. When the Dust Delete Data is
obtained, a message will appear.
If the data is not obtained successfully,
an error message will appear. Follow
the “Preparation” procedure on the
preceding page, then select [OK]. Take
the picture again.
Dust Delete Data
After the Dust Delete Data is obtained, it is appended to all the JPEG
and RAW images captured thereafter. Before an important shoot, it is
recommended that you update the Dust Delete Data by obtaining it
again.
For details about using Digital Photo Professional (EOS software,
p.534) to erase dust spots, refer to the Digital Photo Professional
Instruction Manual.
The Dust Delete Data appended to the image is so small that it hardly
affects the image file size.
Be sure to use a solid-white object such as a new sheet of white paper. If the
object has any pattern or design, it may be recognized as dust data and
affect the accuracy of the dust deletion with the EOS software.
408
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
Dust that could not be removed by the automatic sensor cleaning can
be removed manually with a commercially-available blower, etc. Before
cleaning the sensor, detach the lens from the camera.
The image sensor is extremely delicate. If the sensor needs to be
cleaned directly, having it done by a Canon Service Center is
recommended.
1
Select [Sensor cleaning].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Sensor
cleaning], then press <0>.
2 Select [Clean manually].
[OK].
3 Select
 In a moment, the reflex mirror will lock
up and the shutter will open.
 “CLn” will blink on the LCD panel.
4 Clean the sensor.
the cleaning.
5 End
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 If you use a battery, make sure it is fully charged.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) with size AA/LR6
batteries, manual sensor cleaning will not be possible.
For the power source, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and
AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) is recommended.
409
3 Manual Sensor CleaningN
 While cleaning the sensor, never do any of the following. If the
power is cut off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains and
image sensor may get damaged.
• Setting the power switch to <2>.
• Removing or inserting the battery.
 The surface of the image sensor is extremely delicate. Clean the sensor
with care.
 Use a plain blower without any brush attached. A brush can scratch the
sensor.
 Do not insert the blower tip inside the camera beyond the lens mount. If
the power is turned off, the shutter will close and the shutter curtains or
reflex mirror may get damaged.
 Never use pressurized air or gas to clean the sensor. The blowing force
can damage the sensor, or the spray gas can freeze on the sensor and
scratch it.
 If the battery level becomes low while you clean the sensor, the beeper
will sound as a warning. Stop cleaning the sensor.
 If a smudge that cannot be removed with a blower remains, having the
sensor cleaned by a Canon Service Center is recommended.
410
13
Printing Images and Transferring
Images to a Computer
 Printing (p.414)
You can connect the camera directly to a printer and print
out the images on the card. The camera is compliant with
“wPictBridge”, which is the standard for direct printing.
 Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) (p.421)
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) enables you to print
images recorded on the card according to your printing
instructions such as the image selection, quantity to print,
etc. You can print multiple images in one batch or give the
print order to a photofinisher.
 Transferring Images to a Computer (p.425)
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the
camera to transfer images recorded on the card to the
computer.
 Specifying Images for a Photobook (p.429)
You can specify images on the card for printing in a
photobook.
411
Preparing to Print
The direct printing procedure can be performed entirely with the
camera while you look at the camera’s LCD monitor.
Connecting the Camera to a Printer
the camera’s power switch to
1 Set
<2>.
up the printer.
2 Set
 For details, refer to the printer’s
instruction manual.
the camera to a printer.
3 Connect
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.34). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
 To connect to the printer, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
4 Turn on the printer.
the camera’s power switch to
5 Set
<1>.
 Some printers may make a beeping
sound.
412
Preparing to Print
back the image.
6 Play
 Press the <x> button.
 The image will appear with the <w>
icon on the upper left of the screen to
indicate that the camera is connected
to a printer.
 Make sure the printer has a PictBridge connection port.
 Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).
 Movies cannot be printed.
 The camera cannot be used with printers conforming only to CP Direct or
Bubble Jet Direct.
 If there is a long beeping sound in step 5, it indicates a problem with the
printer. Resolve the problem displayed in the error message (p.420).
 Printing is not possible if Multi Shot Noise Reduction or the HDR Mode is
set.
 You can also print RAW images taken with this camera.
 If you use a battery to power the camera, make sure it is fully charged.
With a fully-charged battery, printing up to approx. 3 hr. is possible.
 Before disconnecting the cable, first turn off the camera and printer. Hold
the plug (not the cord) to pull out the cable.
 For direct printing, using the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and
AC Adapter AC-E6N (sold separately) to power the camera is
recommended.
413
w Printing
The screen display and setting options will differ depending on the
printer. Some settings may not be available. For details, refer to the
printer’s instruction manual.
Printer-connected icon
1
Select the image to be printed.
 Check that the <w> icon is
displayed on the upper left of the LCD
monitor.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be printed.
<0>.
2 Press
 The print setting screen will appear.
Print setting screen
Sets printing effects (p.416).
Sets date or file number imprinting to on or off
(p.417).
Sets quantity to be printed (p.417).
Sets print area (p.419).
Sets paper size, type, and layout (p.415).
Returns to the screen in step 1.
Starts printing.
The paper size, type, and layout you set are displayed.
* Depending on the printer, certain settings such as the date and file
number imprinting and cropping may not be selectable.
[Paper settings].
3 Select
 The paper settings screen will
appear.
414
w Printing
Q Setting the Paper Size
 Select the size of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The paper type screen will appear.
Y Setting the Paper Type
 Select the type of the paper loaded in
the printer, then press <0>.
 The page layout screen will appear.
U Setting the Page Layout
 Select the page layout, then press
<0>.
 The print setting screen will reappear.
Bordered
The print will have white borders along the edges.
Borderless
The print will have no borders. If your printer cannot print
borderless prints, the print will have borders.
Borderedc
The shooting information*1 will be imprinted on the border on
9x13 cm or larger prints.
xx-up
Option to print 2, 4, 8, 9, 16, or 20 images on one sheet.
20-upc
35-upp
20 or 35 images will be printed as thumbnails on A4 or Letter size
paper*2.
• [20-upc] will have the shooting information*1 imprinted.
Default
The page layout will vary depending on the printer model or its
settings.
*1:From the Exif data, the camera name, lens name, shooting mode, shutter speed,
aperture, exposure compensation amount, ISO speed, white balance, etc., will be
imprinted.
*2:After ordering the prints with “Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)” (p.421), printing by
following “Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images” (p.424) is recommended.
415
w Printing
the printing effects.
4 Set
 Set them if necessary. If you do not need
to set any printing effects, go to step 5.
 Contents displayed on the screen
differ depending on the printer.
 Select the setting, then press <0>.
 Select the desired printing effect, then
press <0>.
 If the <ze> icons are displayed
brightly, you can also adjust the
printing effects (p.418).
Printing Effect
Description
EOn
The image will be printed using the printer’s standard colors.
The image’s Exif data is used to make automatic corrections.
EOff
No automatic correction will be applied.
EVIVID
The image will be printed with higher saturation to produce
more vivid blues and greens.
ENR
Image noise is reduced before printing.
0 B/W
Prints in black-and-white with true blacks.
0 Cool tone Prints in black-and-white with cool, bluish blacks.
0 Warm tone Prints in black-and-white with warm, yellowish blacks.
zNatural
Prints the image in the actual colors and contrast. No automatic
color adjustments are applied.
zNatural M
Printing characteristics are the same as the “Natural” setting.
However, this setting enables finer printing adjustments than
with “Natural.”
EDefault
Printing will differ depending on the printer. For details, refer to
the printer’s instruction manual.
* When you change the printing effects, changes are reflected in the image
displayed on the upper left of the screen. Note that the printed image may look
slightly different from the displayed image, which is only an approximation. This
also applies to [Brightness] and [Adjust levels] on page 418.
When making a large print of a RAW or RAW+JPEG image, printing a JPEG
73 image created by processing a RAW image (p.398), or printing via
Digital Photo Professional (EOS software, p.534) is recommended.
416
w Printing
the date and file number
5 Set
imprinting.
 Set them if necessary.
 Select <I>, then press <0>.
 Set the print settings as desired, then
press <0>.
the number of copies.
6 Set
 Set it if necessary.
 Select <R>, then press <0>.
 Select the number of copies, then
press <0>.
printing.
7 Start
 Select [Print], then press <0>.
 The [Default] setting for printing effects and other options are the
printer’s own default settings as set by the printer’s manufacturer. Refer
to the printer’s instruction manual to find out what the [Default] settings
are.
 Depending on the image’s file size and image-recording quality, it may
take some time for the printing to start after you select [Print].
 If image tilt correction (p.419) is applied, it may take longer to print the
image.
 To stop the printing, press <0> while [Stop] is displayed, then select
[OK].
 If you execute [54: Clear all camera settings] (p.70), all the settings
will revert to their defaults.
417
w Printing
e Adjusting Printing Effects
In step 4 on page 416, select the printing
effect. When the <ze> icons are
displayed brightly, you can press the
<B> button. You can then adjust the
printing effects. What can be adjusted or
what is displayed will depend on the
selection made in step 4.
 Brightness
The image brightness can be adjusted.
 Adjust levels
When you select [Manual], you can change
the histogram’s distribution and adjust the
image’s brightness and contrast.
With the Adjust levels screen displayed, press
the <B> button to change the position of
the <h>. Turn the <5> dial to freely adjust
the shadow level (0 - 127) or highlight level (128 - 255).
 kBrightener
Effective in backlit conditions where the subject’s face looks dark.
When [On] is set, the face will be brightened for printing.
 Red-eye corr.
Effective in flash images where the subject has red eye. When [On]
is set, the red eye will be corrected for printing.
 The [kBrightener] and [Red-eye corr.] effects will not be reflected on
the screen.
 When [Detail set.] is selected, you can adjust the [Contrast],
[Saturation], [Color tone], and [Color balance]. To adjust the [Color
balance], use <9>. B is for blue, A for amber, M for magenta, and G for
green. The image’s color balance will be corrected towards the selected
color.
 If you select [Clear all], all the printing effect settings will be reverted to
their defaults.
418
w Printing
Cropping the Image
Tilt correction
You can crop the image and print only an
enlarged version of the cropped portion,
as if the image is recomposed.
Set the cropping right before printing.
If you change the print settings after
setting the cropping, you may have to set
the cropping again before printing.
1 On the print setting screen, select [Cropping].
2 Set the cropping frame size, position, and aspect ratio.
The image area within the cropping frame will be printed. The
cropping frame’s aspect ratio can be changed with [Paper settings].
Changing the Cropping Frame Size
Turn the <6> dial to change the cropping frame size. The smaller the
cropping frame, the larger the image magnification will be for printing.
Moving the Cropping Frame
Use <9> to move the frame over the image vertically or
horizontally. Move the cropping frame until it covers the desired
image area.
Switching the Orientations of the Cropping Frame
Pressing the <B> button will toggle the cropping frame
between the vertical and horizontal orientations. This enables you
to create a vertically oriented print from a horizontal image.
Image Tilt Correction
By turning the <5> dial, you can tilt the image between -10 and
+10 degrees in 0.5-degree increments. When you adjust the
image tilt, the <O> icon on the screen will turn blue.
3 Press <0> to exit the cropping.
 The print setting screen will reappear.
You can check the cropped image area on the upper left of the
print setting screen.
419
w Printing
 If the image’s aspect ratio is different from the printing paper’s aspect
ratio, the image may be cropped significantly when you print it as a
borderless print. If the image is cropped, the print may look grainier due
to the fewer number of pixels.
 If you imprint shooting information on an image shot at an expanded ISO
speed (H1 or H2), the correct ISO speed may not be imprinted.
 Depending on the printer, the cropped image area may not be printed as
you specified.
 The smaller you make the cropping frame, the grainier the picture will
look in the print.
 Check the camera’s LCD monitor while cropping the image. If you look at
the image on a TV screen, the cropping frame may not be displayed
accurately.
Handling Printer Errors
If printing does not resume after you resolve a printer error (no ink, no paper,
etc.) and select [Continue], operate the buttons on the printer to resume
printing. For details on resuming the printing, refer to the printer’s instruction
manual.
Error Messages
If a problem occurs during printing, an error message will appear on the
camera’s LCD monitor. Press <0> to stop printing. After fixing the
problem, resume printing. For details on how to fix a printing problem, refer
to the printer’s instruction manual.
Paper Error
Check whether the paper is properly loaded in the printer.
Ink Error
Check the printer’s ink level and the waste ink tank.
Hardware Error
Check for any printer problems other than paper and ink problems.
File Error
The selected image cannot be printed via PictBridge. Images taken with a
different camera or images edited with a computer may not be printable.
420
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
You can set the print type, date imprinting, and file number imprinting.
The print settings will be applied to all print-ordered images. (They
cannot be set individually for each image.)
Setting the Printing Options
1
Select [Print order].
 Under the [31] tab, select [Print
order], then press <0>.
2 Select [Set up].
the options as desired.
3 Set
 Set the [Print type], [Date], and [File
No.].
 Select the option to be set, then press
<0>. Select the desired setting,
then press <0>.
Print type
Date
File No.
421
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print type
Date
File number
K
Standard
Prints one image on one sheet.
L
Index
Multiple thumbnail images are printed on
one sheet.
K
L
Both
Prints both the standard and index prints.
On
Off
On
Off
[On] imprints the recorded date on the print.
[On] imprints the file number on the print.
the setting.
4 ExitPress
the <M> button.
 The print order screen will reappear.
 Next, select [Sel.Image], [Byn], or
[All image] to order the images to be
printed.
 RAW images and movies cannot be print ordered. You can print RAW
images with PictBridge (p.411).
 Even if [Date] and [File No.] are set to [On], the date or file number may
not be imprinted, depending on the print type setting and printer model.
 With [Index] prints, the [Date] and [File No.] cannot both be set to [On]
at the same time.
 When printing with DPOF, use the card whose print order specifications
are set. It will not work if you just extract images from the card and try to
print them.
 Certain DPOF-compatible printers and photofinishers may not be able to
print the images as you specified. Refer to the printer’s instruction
manual before printing, or check with your photofinisher about
compatibility when ordering prints.
 Do not specify a new print order for a card containing images whose print
order was set by a different camera. The print order may be overwritten.
Also, the print order may not be possible, depending on the image type.
422
W Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)
Print Ordering
 Sel.Image
Select and order images one by one.
If you press the <u> button and turn the
<6> dial counterclockwise, you can
select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
Press the <M> button to save the
print order to the card.
Standard / Both
Quantity
Total images selected
Press <0>, and a print order for one
copy of the displayed image will be
placed. By turning the <5> dial, you
can set the number of copies to be
printed up to 99.
Index
Checkmark
Index icon
Press <0> to add a checkmark to the
box [X]. The image will be included in
the index print.
 Byn
Select [Mark all in folder] and select the folder. A print order for one
copy of all the images in the folder will be placed. If you select [Clear
all in folder] and select the folder, the print order for all the images
in the folder will be canceled.
 All image
If you select [Mark all on card], one copy of all the images on the
card will be set for printing. If you select [Clear all on card], the print
order will be cleared for all the images on the card.
 Note that RAW images and movies will not be included in the print order
even if you set [Byn] or [All image].
 When using a PictBridge printer, print no more than 400 images for one
print order. If you specify more than this, all the images may not be printed.
423
W Direct Printing of Print-Ordered Images
With a PictBridge printer, you can easily
print images with DPOF.
1
Prepare to print.
See page 412.
Follow the “Connecting the Camera to a Printer” procedure up to
step 5.
2 Under the [31] tab, select [Print order].
3 Select [Print].
[Print] will be displayed only if the camera is connected to a
printer and printing is possible.
4 Set the [Paper settings] (p.414).
Set the printing effects (p.416) if necessary.
5 Select [OK].
Before printing, be sure to set the paper size.
Certain printers cannot imprint the file number.
If [Bordered] is set, certain printers may imprint the date on the border.
Depending on the printer, the date may appear faint if it is imprinted on a
bright background or on the border.
 Under [Adjust levels], [Manual] cannot be selected.




 If you stopped the printing and want to resume printing the remaining
images, select [Resume]. Note that printing will not resume if any of the
following are the case:
• You changed the print order or deleted any of the print ordered images
before resuming the printing.
• When index is set, you changed the paper setting before resuming the
printing.
• The card’s remaining capacity was low when you paused the printing.
 If a problem occurs during printing, see page 420.
424
d Transferring Images to a Computer
You can connect the camera to a computer and operate the camera to
transfer images on the card to the computer. This is called direct image
transfer.
The direct image transfer can be performed with the camera while
you look at the LCD monitor.
The images transferred to the computer will be saved in the [Pictures]
or [My Pictures] folder and organized in folders by shooting date.
Before connecting the camera to a computer, install the EOS
Utility (p.534) on your computer.
Preparing Image Transfer
the camera’s power switch to
1 Set
<2>.
the camera to a
2 Connect
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.34). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).
425
d Transferring Images to a Computer
the camera’s power switch to
3 Set
<1>.
 When the computer displays a screen
to select the program, select [EOS
Utility].
 The EOS Utility screen will appear on
the computer.
After the EOS Utility screen appears, do not operate EOS Utility. If any
screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed, [Direct transfer]
in step 5 on page 428 will not be displayed. (The image transfer function will
not be available.)
 If the EOS Utility screen does not appear, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
 Before disconnecting the cable, turn off the camera. Hold the plug (not
the cord) to pull out the cable.
3 Transferring RAW+JPEG Images
For RAW+JPEG images, you can specify
which image to transfer.
On the next page in step 2, select
[RAW+JPEG transfer], and select the
image to be transferred: [JPEG only],
[RAW only], or [RAW+JPEG].
426
d Transferring Images to a Computer
3 Selecting the Images to be Transferred
 Sel.Image
1
Select [Image transfer].
 Under the [32] tab, select [Image
transfer], then press <0>.
2 Select [Image sel./transfer].
3 Select [Sel.Image].
the images to be
4 Select
transferred.
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be transferred, then press
<0>.
 Turn the <5> dial to display the [X] on
the screen’s upper left, then press <0>.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a three-image
display. To return to the single-image
display, turn the <6> dial clockwise.
 To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 4.
 When [Sel.Image] is selected, you can check the image’s transfer status
on the upper left of the screen: No mark: Not selected. X: Selected for
transfer. l: Transfer failed. k: Transfer succeeded.
 The procedures for [RAW+JPEG transfer] (p.426) and above steps 1 to
4 can also be performed while the camera is not connected to a
computer.
427
d Transferring Images to a Computer
the image.
5 Transfer
 On the computer screen, check that
EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
 Select [Direct transfer], then press
<0>.
 On the confirmation screen, select
[OK], and the images will be
transferred to the computer.
 Images selected with [Sel.n] and
[All image] can also be transferred in
this way.
 Sel.n
Select [Sel.n] and select [Folder images not transfer’d]. When
you select a folder, all the images in that folder not yet transferred to
the computer will be selected.
Selecting [Folder images failed transf.] will select the selected
folder’s images that failed to transfer.
Selecting [Clear folder transf. history] will clear the transfer history
of the images in the selected folder. After clearing the transfer
history, you can select [Folder images not transfer’d] and again
transfer all the images in the folder.
 All image
If [All image] is selected and you select [Card images not
transferred], all the images on the card not yet transferred to a
computer will be selected.
For a description of [Card images failed transfer] and [Clear
card’s transf. history], see “Sel.n” above.
 If any screen other than EOS Utility’s main window is displayed on the
computer, [Direct transfer] is not displayed.
 During the image transfer, certain menu options cannot be used.
 You can also transfer movies.
 Shooting is possible during the image transfer.
428
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
You can specify up to 998 images to be printed in a photobook. When
you use EOS Utility (EOS software) to transfer images to a computer,
the specified images will be copied to a dedicated folder. This function
is useful for ordering photobooks online.
Specifying One Image at a Time
1
Select [Photobook Set-up].
 Under the [x1] tab, select
[Photobook set-up], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Select images].
the image to be specified.
3 Select
 Turn the <5> dial to select the
image to be specified, then press
<0>.
 If you press the <u> button and turn
the <6> dial counterclockwise, you
can select an image from a threeimage display. To return to the singleimage display, turn the <6> dial
clockwise.
 To select other images to be
transferred, repeat step 3. The
number of specified images will be
displayed.
429
p Specifying Images for a Photobook
Specifying All Images in a Folder or on a Card
You can specify all the images in a folder or on a card at once.
When [x1: Photobook Set-up] is set
to [All images in folder] or [All images
on card], all the images in the folder or
on the card will be specified.
To cancel the image protection, select
[Clear all in folder] or [Clear all on
card].
 RAW images and movies cannot be specified.
 Do not specify images already specified for a photobook in another
camera for another photobook with this camera. The photobook settings
may be overwritten.
430
14
Customizing the
Camera
You can customize various camera functions to suit
your picture-taking preferences with Custom Functions.
Also, current camera settings can be saved under <w>
<x> <y> positions of the Mode Dial.
The features explained in this chapter can be set and
used in the following shooting modes: <d> <s>
<f> <a> <F>.
431
3 Custom FunctionsN
81: Exposure
A LV
Shooting
Exposure level increments
ISO speed setting increments
p.434
k
k
k
In a
Bracketing auto cancel
k
Bracketing sequence
k
Number of bracketed shots
p.435
k Movie
Shooting
k
Safety shift
p.436
k
Same exposure for new aperture
p.437
k
(Still photo,
with WB
bracketing)
82: Exposure/Drive
Set shutter speed range
Set aperture range
Continuous shooting speed
p.438
p.439
k
k
k
k
k
(Still photo)
The shaded Custom Functions do not function during Live View (LV)
shooting or movie shooting. (Settings are disabled.)
432
3 Custom FunctionsN
83: Display/Operation
Focusing screen
Warnings z in viewfinder
LV shooting area display
A LV
Shooting
p.440
p.441
Dial direction during Tv/Av
Multi function lock
k Movie
Shooting
p.442
Custom Controls
k
k
k
k
k
Depends on setting
84: Others
Add cropping information
Default Erase option
Retract lens on power off
p.443
p.444
k
(During playback)
k
k
85: Clear
Selecting [85: Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)] will clear all the
Custom Function settings.
Even if [85: Clear all Custom Func.(C.Fn)] is executed, the settings for
[83: Focusing screen] and [83: Custom Controls] will remain
unchanged.
433
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Under the [8] tab, you can customize
various camera features to suit your
picture-taking preferences. Any settings
different from the default will be
displayed in blue.
C.Fn1: Exposure
Exposure level increments
1/3:1/3-stop
1/2:1/2-stop
Sets 1/2-stop increments for the shutter speed, aperture, exposure
compensation, AEB, flash exposure compensation, etc. This is effective when
you prefer to control the exposure in less fine increments than 1/3-stop.
When [1/2-stop] is set, the exposure level will be displayed as shown below.
ISO speed setting increments
1/3: 1/3-stop
1/1: 1-stop
Even when [1-stop] is set, you can set ISO 16000.
Bracketing auto cancel
ON: Enable
When you set the power switch to <2>, the AEB and white balance
bracketing settings will be canceled. AEB will also be canceled when
the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie shooting.
OFF: Disable
The AEB and white balance bracketing settings will not be canceled even if you set
the power switch to <2>. (If the flash is ready to fire or if you switch to movie
shooting, AEB will be canceled temporarily, but the AEB range will be retained.)
434
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Bracketing sequence
The AEB shooting sequence and white balance bracketing sequence
can be changed.
0-+: 0, -, +
-0+: -, 0, +
+0-: +, 0, White Balance Bracketing
B/A Direction
M/G Direction
0 : Standard exposure
0 : Standard white balance 0 : Standard white balance
- : Decreased exposure - : Blue bias
- : Magenta bias
+ : Increased exposure + : Amber bias
+ : Green bias
AEB
Number of bracketed shots
The number of shots taken with AEB and white balance bracketing can
be changed from the default, 3 shots, to 2, 5, or 7 shots.
When [Bracketing sequence: 0, -, +] is set, the bracketed shots will
be taken as shown in the table below.
3: 3 shots
2: 2 shots
5: 5 shots
7: 7 shots
(1-stop increments)
1st Shot
2nd
Shot
3rd
Shot
+1
4th
Shot
5th
Shot
3: 3 shots
Standard (0)
-1
2: 2 shots
Standard (0)
±1
5: 5 shots
Standard (0)
-2
-1
+1
+2
7: 7 shots
Standard (0)
-3
-2
-1
+1
6th
Shot
7th
Shot
+2
+3
If [2 shots] is set, you can select the + or - side when setting the AEB
range. Setting WB bracketing will result in a decreased exposure in the B/A
or M/G direction.
435
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Safety shift
OFF: Disable
Tv/Av: Shutter speed/Aperture
This takes effect in the shutter-priority AE (s) and aperturepriority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness changes and the
standard exposure cannot be obtained within the autoexposure
range, the camera will automatically change the manually-selected
setting to obtain a standard exposure.
ISO: ISO speed
This works in the Program AE (d), shutter-priority AE (s), and
aperture-priority AE (f) modes. If the subject brightness
changes and the standard exposure cannot be obtained within the
autoexposure range, the camera will automatically change the
manually set ISO speed to obtain a standard exposure.
 Under [z2: ISO speed settings], even if [ISO speed range] or [Min.
shutter spd.] is changed from the default setting, safety shift will
override it if a standard exposure cannot be obtained.
 The minimum and maximum ISO speeds of the safety shift using the ISO
speed will be determined by the [Auto ISO range] setting (p.158).
However, if the manually set ISO speed exceeds the [Auto ISO range],
the safety shift will take effect up or down to the manually set ISO speed.
 Safety shift will take effect if necessary even when flash is used.
436
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Same exposure for new aperture
If the <a> mode (manual exposure shooting) is set and the ISO speed is set
manually (other than Auto ISO), the maximum aperture’s f/number may change to a
higher number (smaller aperture) if you do any of the following: 1. Change the lens, 2.
Attach or detach an Extender, or 3. Use a zoom lens whose maximum aperture f/
number changes. If you then shoot at the exposure setting as is, the image will be
underexposed by the amount the maximum aperture f/number changes to a higher
number. However, by changing the ISO speed or shutter speed (Tv) automatically,
you can obtain the same exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3.
OFF: Disable
Automatic changes in settings to maintain the specified exposure will not be
applied. The ISO speed, shutter speed, and aperture already set will be used for
shooting. If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the maximum aperture f/number increases,
adjust the ISO speed and shutter speed before you shoot.
ISO: ISO speed
If you do 1, 2, or 3, the ISO speed will automatically increase to compensate for
the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same
exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
Tv: Shutter speed
If you do 1, 2, or 3, a slower shutter speed will automatically be set to compensate
for the amount that the maximum aperture f/number increases by. The same
exposure that would be obtained before you did 1, 2, or 3 is thereby obtained.
 This function does not work with macro lenses whose actual aperture
f/number changes when the magnification changes.
 This function does not work with movies.
 If [ISO speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within the
range set with [ISO speed range], the ISO speed will be automatically
switched within the specified range.
 If [Shutter speed] is set and the exposure cannot be maintained within
the range set with [82: Set shutter speed range], the shutter speed
will be automatically switched within the specified range.
 If you do 1, 2, or 3 and the camera turns off (power switch is set to
<2>, etc.) while the exposure is being maintained, the target exposure
will be updated to the exposure at the moment the camera turns off.
437
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
 This function also works with changes in the highest f/number (minimum
aperture).
 If you set [ISO speed] or [Shutter speed], do 1, 2, or 3, and then undo 1,
2, or 3 without manually changing the ISO speed, shutter speed, or
aperture, so that the camera is back to its original state, the original
exposure setting will be restored.
 If [ISO speed] is set and the ISO speed increases to an expanded ISO
speed, the shutter speed may change to maintain the exposure.
C.Fn2: Exposure/Drive
Set shutter speed range
You can set the shutter speed range. In the <s> <a> modes, you
can set the shutter speed manually within the shutter speed range that
you have set. In the <d> <f> modes, the shutter speed will be set
automatically within the shutter speed range that you have set.
Highest speed
You can set it from 1/8000 sec. to 15 sec.
Lowest speed
You can set it from 30 sec. to 1/4000 sec.
Set aperture range
You can set the aperture range. In the <f> <a> <F> modes, you
can set the aperture manually within the aperture range that you have
set. In the <d> <s> modes, the aperture will be set automatically
within the aperture range that you have set.
Min. aperture (Max. f/)
You can set it from f/91 to f/1.4.
Max. aperture (Min. f/)
You can set it from f/1.0 to f/64.
The settable aperture range will differ depending on the lens’s maximum
and minimum apertures.
438
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Continuous shooting speed
You can set the continuous shooting speed for <o> high-speed
continuous shooting, <i> low-speed continuous shooting, and
<M> silent continuous shooting.
High speed
You can set it from 2 to 10 frames per second (fps).
Low speed
You can set it from 1 to 9 frames per second (fps).
Silent continuous shooting
You can set it from 1 to 4 frames per second (fps).
If [z4: Anti-flicker shoot.] (p.185) is set to [Enable] or EOS iTR AF
(p.128) is set to [Enable], the camera may not be able to shoot at the
continuous shooting speed that was set.
439
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
C.Fn3: Display/Operation
Focusing Screen
To suit your shooting needs, you can change to an optional focusing
screen, sold separately.
If you change the focusing screen, be sure to change this setting
to match the focusing screen type. It is to obtain the correct
exposure.
Std.: Eh-A
Standard screen provided with the camera. Precision Matte
standard focusing screen.
Eh-S: Eh-S
Super Precision Matte focusing screen makes it easier to
distinguish the focus point than with the standard Precision Matte
Eh-A focusing screen. It is ideal for fast lenses having a maximum
aperture of f/2.8 or larger. Geared for manual focusing.
However, if the lens maximum aperture is smaller than f/2.8, the
viewfinder will look darker than with the Eh-A focusing screen.
 The focusing screen setting will not be cleared even if you select [85:
Clear all Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
 To change the focusing screen, refer to the focusing screen’s instruction
manual. If the focusing screen does not come down with the holder, tilt
the camera forward.
440
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Warnings z in viewfinder
When any of the following functions are set, the <z> icon can be
displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.26-27).
Select the function for which you want the warning icon to appear, and
press <0> to append a <X>. Then select [OK] to register the setting.
When monochrome V is set
If the Picture Style is set to [Monochrome] (p.162), the warning
icon will appear.
When WB is corrected
If white balance correction (p.172) is set, the warning icon will
appear.
When one-touch image quality is set
If you change the image-recording quality with the one-touch
image quality function (p.456), the warning icon will appear.
When M is set
If [z3: High ISO speed NR] is set to [Multi Shot Noise
Reduction] (p.176), the warning icon will appear.
When spot metering is set
If the metering mode is set to [Spot metering] (p.225), the
warning icon will appear.
When you set any of the checkmarked [X] functions, <z> will also appear
for the respective setting (except when Multi Shot Noise Reduction is set)
on the shooting settings screen (p.60, 469).
LV shooting area display
When the aspect ratio for Live View shooting (p.295) is set to [4:3],
[16:9], or [1:1], you can set the display method for the shooting area.
: Masked
: Outlined
441
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Dial direction during Tv/Av
: Normal
: Reverse direction
Dial turning direction when setting the shutter speed and aperture
can be reversed.
In the <a> shooting mode, the turning direction of the <6> and
<5> dials will be reversed. In other shooting modes, the turning
direction of only the <6> dial will be reversed. The <5> dial’s
turning direction in the <a> mode and the turning direction to set
the exposure compensation in the <d>, <s>, and <f> mode
will be the same.
Multi function lock
When the <R> switch is set to the right, it can prevent the <6>,
<5>, <9>, and <p> from accidentally changing a setting.
Select the camera control you want to lock, then press <0> to
append a checkmark [X]. Select [OK] to register the setting.
6 Main Dial
5 Quick Control Dial
9 Multi-controller
p AF area selection lever
 If the <R> switch is set and you try to use one of the locked
camera controls, <L> will be displayed in the viewfinder and on the LCD
panel. Also, [LOCK] will be displayed in the shooting settings display
(p.60).
 If you lock, the <5> dial will be locked by default.
 Even if the <5> dial is appended with a [X] checkmark, you can still
use the touch pad <h>.
Custom Controls
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences. For details, see page 445.
442
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
C.Fn4: Others
Add cropping information
If you set cropping information, vertical lines for the aspect ratio you
have set will appear on the Live View image. You can then compose
the shot as if you were shooting with a medium- or large-format
camera (6x6 cm, 4x5 inch, etc.).
When you take a picture, the aspect ratio information for cropping the
image with the EOS software will be appended to the image. (The
image is recorded to the card without being cropped.)
After the image is transferred to a computer, you can use Digital Photo
Professional (EOS software, p.534) to easily crop the image to the
aspect ratio that was set.
OFF
6:6
3:4
4:5
: Off
: Aspect ratio 6:6
: Aspect ratio 3:4
: Aspect ratio 4:5
6:7 : Aspect ratio 6:7
5:6 : Aspect ratio 10:12
5:7 : Aspect ratio 5:7
 If [z5: Aspect ratio] is set to any setting other than [3:2], the cropping
information will not be appended to the image.
 Cropping information will also be appended for viewfinder shooting.
However, the cropping information will not be displayed.
 If cropping information is added to a RAW image, the image cannot be
cropped with the camera’s RAW image processing.
443
3 Setting Custom FunctionsN
Default Erase option
During image playback and image review after image capture, when
you press the <L> button, the erase menu appears (p.392). You can
set which option, [Cancel] or [Erase], is to be preselected on this
screen.
If [Erase] is set, you can just press <0> to quickly erase the image.
: [Cancel] selected
L : [Erase] selected
If [Erase] is set, be careful not to erase an image accidentally.
Retract lens on power off
This is to set the lens retraction mechanism for when a gear-driven
STM lens (such as EF40mm f/2.8 STM) is attached to the camera. You
can set it to retract the extended lens automatically when the camera’s
power switch is set to <2>.
ON: Enable
OFF: Disable
 With auto power off, the lens will not retract regardless of the setting.
 Before detaching the lens, make sure that it is retracted.
When [Enable] is set, this function takes effect regardless of the lens’s
focus mode switch setting (AF or MF).
444
83: Custom ControlsN
You can assign often-used functions to camera buttons or dials
according to your preferences.
1
Select [83: Custom Controls].
 Under the [83] tab, select [Custom
Controls], then press <0>.
 The Custom Controls screen to select
control buttons and dials will appear.
a camera button or dial.
2 Select
 Select a camera button or dial, then
press <0>.
 The name of the camera control and
the assignable functions will be
displayed.
a function.
3 Assign
 Select a function, then press <0>.
 If the [z] icon appears on the
bottom left, you can press the
<B> button and set other related
options.
the setting.
4 Exit
 When you press <0> to exit the
setting, the screen in step 2 will
reappear.
 Press the <M> button to exit.
With the screen in step 2 displayed, you can press the <L> button to revert
the Custom Control settings to their defaults. Note that the [83: Custom
Controls] settings will not be canceled even if you select [85: Clear all
Custom Func. (C.Fn)].
445
83: Custom ControlsN
Assignable Functions to Camera Controls
Function
Page
Metering and AF start
450
k
AF stop
Switch to registered AF function
452
AF
ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
k*1
k*1
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Switch to registered AF point
Selected AF point z Center/
Registered AF point
AF point direct selection
453
Direct AF point selection: Vertical
Direct AF area selection
k
Metering start
AE lock
AE lock (while button pressed)
454
AE lock (hold)
Exposure
AE lock, AF stop
FE lock
Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
ISO (hold down lever, turn
Set ISO speed (
)
)
during meter)
Exposure compensation (hold button,
turn
)
455
Exposure compensation (hold down
lever, turn
)
Shutter speed setting in M mode
Aperture setting in M mode
446
456
k
83: Custom ControlsN
*
p
k
k
k
k*2
k*2
k
k
k*3
k*3
k*4
k
k*5
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
* The AF stop button (
k
k
k
k
) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.
447
83: Custom ControlsN
Function
Page
Images
One-touch image quality setting
One-touch image quality (hold)
456
Image quality
Picture Style
457
Depth-of-field preview
IS start
Menu display
457
Operation
Register/recall shooting function
k*7
k*7
k
k
Image Playback
Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Cycle: y • g/Drive • AF/WB • q
458
Unlock while button pressed
Flash function settings
No function (disabled)
448
83: Custom ControlsN
*
p
k*
k*
k*6
k*6
6
6
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
* The AF stop button (
k
k
k
k
k
) is provided only on super telephoto IS lenses.
449
83: Custom ControlsN
: Metering and AF start
When you press the button assigned to this function, metering and AF
are executed.
*1:When assigned to the <p> or <A> button,
pressing the <B> button while the setting
screen is displayed will enable you to set the
detailed AF settings. When shooting, pressing the
<p> or <A> button will execute AF as it was
set.
 AF start position
When [Registered AF point] is set, you can press the <p> or
<A> button to switch to the registered AF point.
Registering the AF Point
1. Set the AF area selection mode to one of the following: Singlepoint Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF (manual
selection), AF point expansion (manual selection ), AF point
expansion (manual selection, surrounding points), or 65-point
automatic selection AF. Zone AF (manual selection of zone) and
Large Zone AF (manual selection of zone) cannot be selected.
2. Select an AF point manually.
3. Hold down the <S> button and press the <U> button. A beep
will sound and the AF point will be registered. If the AF area
selection mode is set to any setting other than 65-point automatic
selection AF, the registered AF point will blink.
 When the AF point is registered, the following will be displayed:
• 65-point automatic selection AF:
HP (HP: Home Position)
• Spot AF, 1 pt AF, Expand AF Area: SEL (Center), SEL HP (Off
center)
 When registered with SEL
or SEL HP, the registered AF point will
blink.
 To cancel the registered AF point, hold down the <S> button and press
the <m> button. The registered AF point will also be canceled if you
select [54: Clear all camera settings].
450
83: Custom ControlsN
 AI Servo AF characteristics (p.108)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set case
from [Case1] to [Case6].
 AF operation (p.86)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
operation.
 AF area selection mode (p.90)
Press the <p> or <A> button to perform AF with the set AF
area selection mode.
If you want to keep using currently selected AF point when you press
the <p> or <A> button, set [AF start position] to [Manually
selected AF point]. If you want to keep the currently set AI Servo AF
characteristics, AF operation, and AF area selection mode, select
[Maintain current setting].
 If [24: Orientation linked AF point] is set to [Separate AF pts:
Area+pt] or [Separate AF pts: Pt only], you can register the AF points
to be used separately for vertical (grip up or down) and horizontal
shooting.
 If [AF start position: Registered AF point] and [AF area selection
mode] are both set, [Registered AF point] will take effect.
451
83: Custom ControlsN
: AF stop
The AF will stop while you hold down the button assigned to this
function. Convenient when you want to stop the AF during AI Servo AF.
: Switch to registered AF function
After setting and assigning this function to a button, you can apply the
following settings by holding down the assigned button for AF: AF area
selection mode (p.90), Tracking sensitivity (p.113), Acceleration/
deceleration tracking (p.114), AF point auto switching (p.115), Servo 1st
image priority (p.117), and Servo 2nd image priority (p.118). Convenient
when you want to change the AF characteristics during AI Servo AF.
*2:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings screen. Turn the <5>
or <6> dial to select the parameter to be
registered, then press <0> to append a
checkmark [X]. When you select a parameter and
press <0>, you can adjust the parameter.
By pressing the <L> button, you can revert the
settings to their defaults.
: ONE SHOT z AI SERVO
You can switch the AF operation. In One-Shot AF mode, when you hold
down the button to which this function is assigned, the camera switches
to AI Servo AF mode. In the AI Servo AF mode, the camera switches to
One-Shot AF mode only while you hold down the button. Convenient
when you need to keep switching between One-Shot AF and AI Servo
AF for a subject that keeps moving and stopping.
: Switch to registered AF point
During metering, when you press the button assigned to this function,
the camera will switch to the registered AF point.
*3:On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch
only when btn is held] or [Switch each time btn is pressed]. To register the AF
point, see page 450.
452
83: Custom ControlsN
: Selected AF pointzCenter/Registered AF point
During metering, tilting <p> to the right will switch between the current
AF point and the center AF point or registered AF point.
*4:On the setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can select [Switch to
center AF point] or [Switch to registered AF point]. To register the AF point, see
page 450.
: Direct AF point selection
During metering, you can select an AF point directly with the <9> dial
or <5> without pressing the <S> button. With the <5> dial, you can
select a left or right AF point. (Looping sequence for Zone AF and Large
Zone AF.)
*5:On the Multi-controller setting screen, when you press the <B> button, you can
press the center of <9> to select [Switch to center AF point] or [Switch to
registered AF point]. To register the AF point, see page 450.
: Direct AF point selection: Vertical
During metering, you can turn the <5> dial to directly select an upper
or lower AF point without pressing the <S> button. (Looping sequence
for Zone AF and Large Zone AF.)
: Direct AF area selection
During metering, you can use <p> to directly select an AF area
selection mode without pressing the <S> button.
If you change the aperture in <a> mode when [Direct AF point selection],
[Direct AF pt select: Vertical], or [Set ISO speed ( during metering)]
(p.455) is assigned to <5>, turn the <6> dial while holding down the
<A> button.
453
83: Custom ControlsN
: Metering start
When you press the shutter button halfway, only the exposure metering
is performed.
: AE lock
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) during metering. Convenient when you want to
focus and meter the shot at different areas or when you want to take
multiple shots at the same exposure setting.
: AE lock (while button pressed)
The exposure will be locked (AE lock) while you press the shutter
button.
: AE lock (hold)
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock). The AE lock will be maintained until you press the
button again. Convenient when you want to focus and meter the shot at
different areas or when you want to take multiple shots at the same
exposure setting.
: AE lock, AF stop
When you press the button assigned to this function, you can lock the
exposure (AE lock) and the AF will stop. Convenient during AI Servo AF
if you want AE lock at the same time when AF stops.
: FE lock
During flash photography, pressing the button assigned to this function
will fire a preflash and record the required flash output (FE lock).
If you assign [AE lock (while button pressed)] to the shutter button, any
buttons assigned to [AE lock] or [AE lock (hold)] will also work as [AE lock
(while button pressed)].
454
83: Custom ControlsN
: Set ISO speed (hold button, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by holding down <0> and turning the
<6> dial.
If this control is used while Auto ISO is set, manual ISO speed setting
will take effect. Auto ISO cannot be set. If you use this function in the
<a> mode, you can adjust the exposure with the ISO speed while
maintaining the current shutter speed and aperture.
: ISO (hold down lever, turn
)
You can set the ISO speed by tilting <p> to the right and turning the
<6> dial. The settable range is the same as with
.
: Set ISO speed (
during metering)
During metering, you can set the ISO speed by turning the <5> dial.
The settable range is the same as with
.
: Exposure compensation (hold button, turn
)
You can set the exposure compensation by holding down <0> and
turning the <6> dial. Convenient when you want to set exposure
compensation while <a> manual exposure and Auto ISO are set.
: Exposure compensation (hold down lever, turn
)
You can set exposure compensation by tilting <p> to the right and
turning the <6> dial. Convenient when you want to set exposure
compensation while <a> manual exposure and Auto ISO are set.
: Shutter speed setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the shutter speed with the
<6> or <5> dial.
455
83: Custom ControlsN
: Aperture setting in M mode
In manual exposure <a>, you can set the aperture with the <5> or
<6> dial.
: One-touch image quality setting
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the imagerecording quality set here. While this change is in effect, the imagerecording quality (JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [Show/
hide in viewfinder]’s [Image quality] checkmarked). After the shooting
ends, the One-touch image quality setting will be canceled and the
image-recording quality will be switched back to the previous quality.
*6:On the setting screen, by pressing the <B> button, you can select the imagerecording quality for this function.
: One-touch image quality (hold)
Pressing the button assigned to this function will switch to the image-recording
quality set here. While this change is in effect, the image-recording quality
(JPEG/RAW) will blink in the viewfinder (with [Show/hide in viewfinder]’s
[Image quality] checkmarked). Even after shooting, the One-touch image
quality setting will not be canceled. To revert to the previous image-recording
quality setting, press the button assigned to this function again.
*6:On the setting screen, by pressing the <B> button, you can select the imagerecording quality for this function.
: Image quality
Press <0> to display the image-recording quality setting screen
(p.149) on the LCD monitor.
If RAW or RAW+JPEG is set for the image-recording quality to be switched
to with [One-touch image quality setting] and [One-touch image quality
(hold)], [Multi Shot Noise Reduction] (p.176) will not work after the switch.
For [z3: High ISO speed noise reduct’n], [Standard] will be applied for
shooting.
During the switch to the One-touch image quality setting, you can display
<z> in the viewfinder and on the LCD panel (p.441).
456
83: Custom ControlsN
: Picture Style
Press <0> to display the Picture Style selection setting screen on the
LCD monitor (p.160).
: Depth-of-field preview
When you press the depth-of-field preview button, the aperture will stop
down and you can check the depth of field (p.221).
: IS start
With the lens’s IS switch set to <1>, the lens’s Image Stabilizer
operates when you press the button assigned to this function (p.53).
: Menu display
Press <0> will display the menu on the LCD monitor.
: Register/recall shooting function
You can manually set the main shooting functions such as the shutter
speed, aperture, ISO speed, metering mode, AF area selection mode,
and register them to the camera. Only while you hold down the button
assigned to this function, you can summon and use the registered
shooting function settings and shoot.
*7:On the setting screen, press the <B> button to
display the detailed settings. Turn the <5> or
<6> dial to select the function to be registered,
then press <0> to append a checkmark [X] to it.
When you select a parameter and press <0>, you
can adjust the parameter. By pressing the <L>
button, you can revert the settings to their defaults.
By selecting [Register current settings], the
camera’s current settings will be registered. To
register the AF point, see page 450.
457
83: Custom ControlsN
: Image playback
Pressing <0> will play back images.
: Magnify/Reduce (press SET, turn
)
Press <0> to magnify or reduce the images recorded on the card. See
page 364 for the operation procedure. During Live View or movie
shooting (except u+Tracking), you can also magnify the image (p.305,
308).
: Cycle: y • g/Drive • AF/WB • q
Pressing the <B> button changes the settable function in this
sequence: y•g9R•f9B•q.
: Unlock while button pressed
Even when the <R> switch is set to the right, only while you hold
down the depth-of-field preview button, you can use the camera control
buttons and dials restricted by [83: Multi function lock].
: Flash function settings
Pressing <0> will display the function setting screen for the built-in
flash or external Speedlite.
: No function (disabled)
Use this setting when you do not want to assign any function to the
button.
458
3 Registering My MenuN
Under My Menu tab, you can register menu items and Custom
Functions whose settings you change frequently. You can also name
the registered menu tabs and press the <M> button to display the
My Menu tab first.
Adding My Menu Tab
1
Select [Add My Menu tab].
 Under the [9] tab, select [Add My
Menu tab], then press <0>.
[OK].
2 Select
 The [MY MENU1] tab is created.
 You can create up to five menu tabs
by repeating steps 1 and 2.
Registering Menu Items under the My Menu Tab(s)
1
Select [Configure: MY MENU*].
 Turn the <6> dial and select
[Configure: MY MENU*] (tab for
registering menu items), then press
<0>.
459
3 Registering My MenuN
2 Select [Select items to register].
the desired items.
3 Register
 Select the desired item, then press
<0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 You can register up to six items.
 To return to the screen in step 2,
press the <M> button.
My Menu Tab Settings
You can sort and delete items under the
menu tab, and rename or delete the
menu tab.
 Sort registered items
You can change the order of the registered items in My Menu. Select
[Sort registered items] and select the item whose order you want to
change. Then press <0>. With [z] displayed, turn the <5> dial to
change the order, then press <0>.
 Delete selected items / Delete all items on tab
You can delete any of the registered items. [Delete selected items]
deletes one item at a time, and [Delete all items on tab] deletes all
registered items.
460
3 Registering My MenuN
 Delete tab
You can delete the My Menu tab currently displayed. Select [Delete
tab] to delete the [MY MENU*] tab.
 Rename tab
You can rename the My Menu tab from [MY MENU*].
1 Select [Rename tab].
text.
2 Enter
 Press the <L> button to delete any
unnecessary characters.
 Press the <Q> button. The text
palette will be highlighted with a color
frame, and text can be entered.
 Operate the <5> dial or <9> to
move the and select the desired
character. Then press <0> to enter
it.
 You can enter up to 16 characters.
the setting.
3 Exit
 After entering the text, press the
<M> button, then select [OK].
 The name is saved.
461
3 Registering My MenuN
Deleting all My Menu tabs / Deleting all items
You can delete all My Menu tabs and
delete all My Menu items.
 Delete all My Menu tabs
You can delete all My Menu tabs. When you select [Delete all My
Menu tabs], all the tabs from [MY MENU1] to [MY MENU5] will be
deleted and the [9] tab will revert to its default.
 Delete all items
You can delete all the items registered under the [MY MENU1] to
[MY MENU5] tabs and keep the tabs. The menu tab(s) will remain.
When [Delete all items] is selected, all the items registered under
all the created tabs will be deleted.
If you do [Delete tab] or [Delete all My Menu tabs], tab names renamed
with [Rename tab] will also be deleted.
462
3 Registering My MenuN
Menu Display Settings
You can select [Menu display] to set the
menu screen that is to appear first when
you press the <M> button.
 Normal display
Displays the last displayed menu screen.
 Display from My Menu tab
Displays with the [9] tab selected.
 Display only My Menu tab
Only the [9] tab is displayed. (The z, 2, 3, 5, and 8 tabs will
not be displayed.)
463
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
You can register current camera settings, such as the shooting mode,
menu functions, and Custom Function settings, as Custom shooting
modes under the Mode Dial’s <w>, <x>, and <y> positions.
1
Select [Custom shooting mode
(C1-C3)].
 Under the [54] tab, select [Custom
shooting mode (C1-C3)], then press
<0>.
2 Select [Register settings].
the Custom shooting
3 Register
mode.
 Select the Custom shooting mode to
be registered, then press <0>.
 Select [OK] on the confirmation
dialog.
 The current camera settings (p.465466) will be registered under the
Mode Dial’s C* position.
Automatic Updating
If you change a setting while you shoot in the <w>, <x>, or <y>
mode, the respective Custom shooting mode can be automatically
updated to reflect the changes in settings. To enable this automatic
update, in step 2, set [Auto update set.] to [Enable].
Canceling Registered Custom Shooting Modes
In step 2, if you select [Clear settings], the camera will revert to the
default settings with no Custom shooting modes registered.
464
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
Settings Registered
 Shooting functions
Shooting mode, Shutter speed, Aperture, ISO speed, AF operation,
AF area selection mode, AF point, Drive mode, Metering mode,
Exposure compensation amount, Flash exposure compensation
amount
 Menu functions
[z1] Image quality, Image review time, Beep, Release shutter
without card, Lens aberration correction, Flash firing, E-TTL II
flash metering, Flash sync speed in Av mode
[z2] Exposure compensation/AEB, ISO speed settings, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, White balance, Custom White Balance,
White balance Shift/Bracketing, Color space
[z3] Picture Style, Long exposure noise reduction, High ISO
speed noise reduction, Highlight tone priority, Multiple
exposure (settings), HDR Mode (settings)
[z4] Red-eye reduction, Interval timer, Bulb timer, Anti-flicker
shooting, Mirror lockup
[z5 (Live View shooting)]
Live View shooting, AF method, Continuous AF, Grid display,
Aspect ratio, Exposure simulation
[z6] Silent LV shooting, Metering timer
[z4 (Movie)]
Movie Servo AF, AF method, Grid display, Movie recording
quality, Sound recording, AF speed during Movie Servo AF,
Movie Servo AF tracking sensitivity
[z5 (Movie)]
Silent LV shooting, Metering timer, Movie recording count,
Movie play count, Silent control, V button function, HDMI
output +LCD
[21] Case 1, Case 2, Case 3, Case 4, Case 5, Case 6
[22] AI Servo 1st image priority, AI Servo 2nd image priority
[23] Lens electronic MF, AF-assist beam firing, One-Shot AF
release priority
465
w: Registering Custom Shooting ModesN
[24] Lens drive when AF impossible, Selectable AF point, Select
AF area selection mode, AF area selection method,
Orientation linked AF point, Initial AF point
AI Servo AF,
Auto AF point selection: EOS iTR AF
[25] Manual AF point selection pattern, AF point display during
focus, VF display illumination, AF status in viewfinder, AF
Microadjustment
[x2] Slide show (settings), Image jump with 6
[x3] Highlight alert, AF point display, Playback grid, Histogram
display, Movie play count, Magnification (approx.)
[51] File numbering, Auto rotate, Eye-Fi settings
[52] Auto power off, LCD brightness, Viewfinder display
[53] Auto cleaning, z button display options, m button
function, HDMI frame rate
[81] Exposure level increments, ISO speed setting increments,
Bracketing auto cancel, Bracketing sequence, Number of
bracketed shots, Safety shift, Same exposure for new
aperture
[82] Set shutter speed range, Set aperture range, Continuous
shooting speed
[83] Live View shooting area display, Dial direction during Tv/Av,
Multi function lock, Custom Controls
[84] Add cropping information, Default Erase option, Retract lens
on power off
My Menu settings will not be registered under Custom shooting modes.
 Even when the Mode Dial is set to <w>, <x>, or <y>, you can still
change shooting function settings and menu settings.
 By pressing the <B> button, you can check which shooting mode is
registered under <w>, <x>, and <y> (p.468-469).
466
15
Reference
This chapter provides reference information for camera
features, system accessories, etc.
Certification Logo
Select [54: Certification Logo Display] and press <0> to
display some of the logos of the camera’s certifications. Other
certification logos can be found in this Instruction Manual, on the
camera body, and on the camera’s package.
467
B Button Functions
If you press the <B> button when the
camera is ready to shoot, the screens for
the [Displays camera settings],
[Electronic level] (p.75), and [Displays
shooting function] (p.469) will be
displayed in sequence.
Under the [53] tab, [z button
display options] enables you to select
the options displayed when the <B>
button is pressed.
 Select the desired display option and
press <0> to append a checkmark [X].
 After completing the selections, select [OK].
 Note that you cannot remove the [X] for all three display options.
 The [Displays camera settings] sample screen is displayed in English
for all languages.
 Even if you uncheck the [Electronic level] so it does not appear, it will
still appear for Live View shooting and movie shooting when you press
the <B> button.
Camera Settings
Shooting mode
registered under the
Mode Dial’s wxy
(p.464)
(p.171)
(p.133)
Signal strength*1
Wi-Fi function*1
(p.172, 173)
(p.187)
Transfer of some
images failed*2
(p.427)
(p.178)
(p.176)
(p.42, 151)
*1: Refer to the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual.
*2: This icon is displayed when the transfer of some images failed.
468
B Button Functions
Shooting Function Settings
Aperture
Shutter speed
AE lock
Highlight tone priority
Shooting mode
ISO speed
Exposure level
indicator
Flash exposure
compensation
Custom Controls
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
correction
Picture Style
AF operation
Quick Control icon
Battery check
White balance
Wi-Fi function*/Eye-Fi
card transmission status
Metering mode
GPS acquisition status/
Logging function
Drive mode
Image-recording
quality
Possible shots
Maximum burst/Number of
remaining multiple exposures
Card indicator
Multiple exposures/HDR/
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
Card selection icon
Flash-ready/FE lock/High-speed sync
* Refer to the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 Instruction Manual.
 Pressing the <Q> button enables Quick Control of the shooting settings (p.61).
 When you press the <n>, <o>, <m>, or <S>
button, the setting screen appears and you can use <6>, <5>,
<B>, or <9> to set it.
If you turn off the power while the “Shooting function settings” or “Electronic
level” screen is displayed, the same screen will be displayed when you turn
on the power again. To cancel this, press the <B> button to exit from
“Shooting function settings” screen, then turn off the power switch.
469
3 Checking the Battery Information
You can check the battery’s condition on the LCD monitor. Each Battery
Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 has a unique serial number, and you can register
multiple battery packs to the camera. When you use this feature, you can
check the registered battery pack’s remaining capacity and operation history.
Select [Battery info.].
 Under the [53] tab, select [Battery
info.], then press <0>.
 The battery info. screen will appear.
Battery position
Battery model or household power source
being used.
The battery level icon (p.46) is displayed
together with the remaining battery
capacity shown in 1% increments.
The number of shots taken with the current
battery. The number is reset when the
battery is recharged.
Battery’s recharge performance level is
displayed in one of three levels.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is fine.
(Green): Battery’s recharge performance is slightly degraded.
(Red): Purchasing a new battery is recommended.
 Using a genuine Canon Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is recommended. If
you use batteries that are not genuine Canon products, the camera’s full
performance may not be attained or malfunction may result.
 If Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately) and Wireless File Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2, sold separately) are both attached to the camera,
battery information only for the BG-E16 will be displayed. Battery
information for the WFT-E7 (Ver. 2) will not be displayed.
 The shutter count is the number of still photos taken. (Movies are not counted.)
 The battery information will also be displayed for Battery Pack LP-E6N/
LP-E6 inside Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately). If size-AA/LR6
batteries are used, only the battery level will be displayed.
470
3 Checking the Battery Information
If communication with the battery is not possible or irregular for some
reason, [Use this battery?] will be displayed. If you select [OK], you can
continue shooting. However, depending on the battery, the battery info.
screen may not be displayed or may not display battery info. correctly.
Registering Batteries to the Camera
You can register up to six LP-E6N/LP-E6 battery packs to the camera.
To register multiple battery packs to the camera, follow the procedure
below for each battery pack.
1
Press the <B> button.
 With the battery info. screen
displayed, press the <B> button.
 The battery history screen will appear.
 If the battery is not registered, it will
be grayed out.
[Register].
2 Select
 The confirmation dialog will appear.
[OK].
3 Select
 The battery pack will be registered
and the battery history screen will
reappear.
 The grayed out battery number will
now be displayed in white.
 Press the <M> button. The battery
info. screen will reappear.
 The battery cannot be registered if Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold
separately) using AA/LR6 batteries is attached or the camera is powered
by the DC Coupler DR-E6 (sold separately) and AC Adapter AC-E6N
(sold separately).
 If six battery packs are already registered, [Register] cannot be
selected. To delete unnecessary battery information, see page 473.
471
3 Checking the Battery Information
Labeling Serial Numbers on Batteries
It is convenient to label all registered Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 with
their serial numbers, using commercially-available labels.
1
Serial number
Write the serial number on a
label.
 Write the serial number displayed on
the battery history screen on a label
approx. 25 mm x 15 mm / 1.0 in. x 0.6
in. in size.
b 2 9 fd
a30
out the battery and affix the
2 Take
label.
 Set the power switch to <2>.
 Open the battery compartment cover
and remove the battery.
 Affix the label as shown in the
illustration (on the side with no
electrical contacts).
 Repeat this procedure for all of your
battery packs so you can easily see
the serial number.
 Do not affix the label on any part other than as shown in the illustration in
step 2. Otherwise, the misplaced label may make it difficult to insert the
battery or impossible to turn on the camera.
 If you use Battery Grip BG-E16 (sold separately), the label may peel off
as you repeatedly insert and remove the battery pack. If it peels off, affix
a new label.
472
3 Checking the Battery Information
Checking the Remaining Capacity of a Registered Battery Pack
You can check the remaining capacity of any battery pack (even when
not installed) and also when it was last used.
Serial number
Date last used
Look for the serial number.
 Refer to the battery’s serial number
label and look for the battery’s serial
number on the battery history screen.
 You can check the respective battery
pack’s remaining capacity and the
date when it was last used.
Remaining capacity
Deleting the Registered Battery Pack Information
1
Select [Delete info.].
 Follow step 2 on page 471 to select [Delete info.], then press
<0>.
2 Select the battery pack information to be deleted.
 Select the battery pack information to be deleted, then press
<0>.
 [X] will appear.
 To delete information for another battery pack, repeat this
procedure.
3 Press the <L> button.
 The confirmation dialog screen will appear.
4 Select [OK].
 The battery pack information will be deleted and the screen in
step 1 will reappear.
473
Using a Household Power Outlet
You can power the camera with a household power outlet by using the
DC Coupler DR-E6 and AC Adapter AC-E6N (both sold separately).
1
Connect the DC Coupler’s plug.
 Connect the DC Coupler’s plug to the
AC Adapter’s socket.
the power cord.
2 Connect
 Connect the power cord as shown in
the illustration.
 After using the camera, unplug the
power plug from the power outlet.
the cord in the groove.
3 Place
 Insert the DC Coupler’s cord carefully
without damaging the cord.
the DC Coupler.
4 Insert
 Open the battery compartment cover
DC Coupler cord hole
and open the DC Coupler cord hole
cover.
 Insert the DC Coupler securely until it
locks and put the cord through the
hole.
 Close the cover.
Do not connect or disconnect the power cord or DC Coupler while the
camera’s power switch is set to <1>.
474
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
With a commercially-available Eye-Fi card already set up, you can
automatically transfer captured images to a computer, or upload them
to an online service via a wireless LAN.
The image transfer is a function of the Eye-Fi card. For instructions on
how to set up and use the Eye-Fi card or to troubleshoot any image
transfer problems, refer to the Eye-Fi card’s instruction manual or
contact the card manufacturer.
The camera is not guaranteed to support Eye-Fi card
functions (including wireless transfer). In case of a problem
with an Eye-Fi card, please check with the card manufacturer.
Also note that approval is required to use Eye-Fi cards in
many countries or regions. Without approval, use of the card
is not permitted. If it is unclear whether the card has been
approved for use in your area, please check with the card
manufacturer.
1 Insert an Eye-Fi card (p.41).
[Eye-Fi settings].
2 Select
 Under the [51] tab, select [Eye-Fi
settings], then press <0>.
 This menu is displayed only when an
Eye-Fi card is inserted into the
camera.
Eye-Fi transmission.
3 Enable
 Select [Eye-Fi trans.], then press
<0>.
 Select [Enable], then press <0>.
 If you set [Disable], there will be no
automatic transmission even with the
Eye-Fi card inserted (transmission
status icon I).
475
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
the connection
4 Display
information.
 Select [Connection info.], then press
<0>.
the [Access point SSID:].
5 Check
 Check that an access point is
displayed for [Access point SSID:].
 You can also check the Eye-Fi card’s
MAC address and firmware version.
 Press the <M> button to exit the
menu.
the picture.
6 Take
 The picture is transferred and the
Transmission status icon
<H> icon switches from gray (not
connected) to one of the icons below.
 For transferred images, O is
displayed in the shooting information
display (p.357).
H(Gray) Not connected :
H(Blinking) Connecting... :
H(Illuminated) Connected :
H(d) Transferring...
:
476
No connection with access point.
Connecting to access point.
Connection to access point established.
Image transfer to access point in
progress.
H Using Eye-Fi Cards
Cautions for Using Eye-Fi Cards
 If “ ” is displayed, an error occurred while retrieving the card
information. Turn the camera’s power switch off, and on again.
 Even if [Eye-Fi trans.] is set to [Disable], it may still transmit a signal. In
hospitals, airports, and other places where wireless transmissions are
prohibited, remove the Eye-Fi card from the camera.
 If the image transfer does not function, check the Eye-Fi card and
computer settings. For details, refer to the card’s instruction manual.
 Depending on the wireless LAN’s connection conditions, the image
transfer may take longer or it may be interrupted.
 The Eye-Fi card may become hot as it transmits.
 The battery power will be consumed faster.
 During the image transfer, auto power off will not take effect.
 If you insert a wireless LAN card other than an Eye-Fi card, [Eye-Fi
settings] will not appear. Also, the transmission status icon <H> will not
appear.
477
System Map
ST-E2
ST-E3-RT
Dioptric Adjustment
Lenses Eg
270EX II
430EX III-RT/ 600EX II-RT
430EX III
Macro Ring Lite
MR-14EX II
Macro Twin Lite
MT-24EX
Bundled
Accessories
Eyecup Eg
Wide
Strap
Anti-Fog
Eyepiece Eg
Cable protector
Angle Finder C
Wi-Fi Adapter
W-E1
Battery Pack
LP-E6N*1
Battery Charger
LC-E6 or LC-E6E
Focusing
Screen Eh
AC Adapter DC Coupler
AC-E6N*4
DR-E6*4
Hand Strap E2
Leather Case EH20-L
478
Battery Grip
BG-E16
Car Battery
Cable CB-570
Car Battery
Charger
CBC-E6
Battery Magazine
Battery Magazine
BGM-E16L for
BGM-E16A for
LP-E6N/LP-E6
size-AA/LR6 batteries
(attached to BG-E16) (attached to BG-E16)
System Map
Timer Remote Remote
Switch
Controller
RS-80N3
TC-80N3
Headphones
Wireless
Controller
LC-5
Remote
Controller
RC-6
EF lenses
Directional
Stereo
Microphone
DM-E1
Connect Station
CS100
EF-S lenses
HDMI Cable
HTC-100 (2.9 m/9.5 ft.)
EOS Solution Disk
Wireless LAN
access point
Interface Cable IFC-150U II
(1.5 m/4.9 ft.)
Wireless File
Transmitter
WFT-E7 (Ver. 2)/
WFT-E7*2
TV/Video
Wireless LAN adapter
Ethernet port
Interface Cable IFC-500U II*3
(4.7 m/15.4 ft.)
USB port
Computer
CF Card
Card reader
SD/SDHC/SDXC memory card
PictBridge-compatible printer
*1: Battery Pack LP-E6 can also be used.
*2: To use the older model WFT-E7 (not Version 2), the firmware must be updated and
Interface Cable IFC-40AB II or IFC-150AB II must be used.
*3: With IFC-500U II, the communication speed will be equivalent to Hi-Speed USB (USB 2.0).
*4: AC Adapter Kit ACK-E6 can also be used.
* All cable lengths given are approximate figures.
479
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photo Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
Function
All image quality settings selectable
ISO speed
Picture Style
Automatically set/Auto ISO
d
s
f
a
F
k
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Manually set
Automatically set/Auto
o
Manual selection
Auto
o
Preset
White balance
Custom
Color temperature setting
Correction/Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
o
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction
o
Highlight tone priority
Lens aberration
correction
Peripheral illumination correction
Chromatic aberration correction
Distortion correction
Anti-flicker shooting
Color space
sRGB
k
k
k
o
o
Adobe RGB
One-Shot AF
AI Servo AF
AI Focus AF
o
AF area selection mode
AF point
AF
Manual focusing (MF)
AF-assist beam
o
k
o *1
AF Microadjustment
u (face)+Tracking*2
FlexZone - Multi*2
FlexZone - Single*2
Continuous AF*2
480
: Not selectable/Disabled
A
k
k
k
k
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Function
A
d
s
f
a
F
o
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k*4
k
k
k
k
k
High-speed continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Low-speed continuous shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
Silent single shooting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Evaluative metering
Metering
Partial metering
Spot metering
Center-weighted average metering
Program shift
AE lock
Exposure compensation
AEB
Exposure
Depth-of-field preview
HDR shooting
Multiple exposures
Interval timer*5
*3
Bulb timer
Single shooting
Drive
Silent continuous shooting
10-sec. self-timer/Remote control
2-sec. self-timer/Remote control
Automatic firing
Flash on (Fires at all times)
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Built-in flash Red-eye reduction
k
k
k
k
FE lock
k
k
k
k
Flash exposure compensation
k
k
k
k
Wireless control
k
k
k
k
Function settings
External
k
k
k
k
Speedlite
Custom Function settings
k
k
k
k
Live View shooting
k
k
k
k
k
Quick Control
k
k
k
k
k
*1: If the built-in flash is set to <b>, the AF-assist beam will not be emitted.
*2: Settable only during Live View shooting.
*3: With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*4: Settable only when Auto ISO is set.
*5: Settable only during viewfinder shooting.
Flash off
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
481
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Movie Shooting
o: Set automatically k: User selectable
: Not selectable/Disabled
Still Photos z*1
Movies
Function
A d/F s f a A
a
k
k
k
k k k
k
k
Automatically set/Auto ISO o
o
o o k o
o
k
k
k
k k k o
k
k
k
Color temperature setting
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Correction
k
k k k
o
k
k k k o
k
k
k
k
k
k
o
k
k
k k k o
k k k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k k k k
k
k
k
k
k k k k
k
k
o
o
o o o o
k
k
u+Tracking
k k k k k k
k
FlexiZone - Multi
k k k k k k
k
AF
FlexiZone - Single
k k k k k k
k
Manual focusing (MF)
k k k k k k
k
Movie Servo AF
k k k k k k
k
*1 : The z icon indicates still photo shooting during movie shooting.
*2 : Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
All image quality settings selectable
(movie)
All image quality settings selectable
(still photos)
ISO speed
Picture
Style
Manually set
Automatically set/Auto
o
Manual selection
Auto
o
Preset
White
balance
Custom
M y
d/F/s/f
y
k
k
k
k
k
k
k o
k
k
k
Bracketing
Auto Lighting Optimizer
M
k
k
Long exposure noise reduction
High ISO speed noise reduction*2
Highlight tone priority
Peripheral illumination
correction
Lens
aberration Chromatic aberration
correction correction
Distortion correction
Color
space
482
sRGB
Adobe RGB
Function Availability Table According to Shooting Mode
Still Photos z*1
Movies
Function
Metering
A d/F s f
a
y
k
M y
o
o
o o
k
k
k k *3
k k k *4
o
A
o
d/F/s/f
a
M
k
o
o
k
k
k *4
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
k
Program shift
AE lock
Exposure
Exposure compensation
*3
AEB
Depth-of-field preview
Single shooting
High-speed continuous
shooting
Low-speed continuous
shooting
Drive
Silent single shooting
Silent continuous
shooting
10-sec. self-timer/
Remote control*5
2-sec. self-timer/Remote
control*5
Built-in flash/External Speedlite
Sound recording
k k k k k
k k k k k
Quick Control
k k k k k k
*3 : With Auto ISO, you can set a fixed ISO speed.
*4 : With Auto ISO, you can set exposure compensation.
*5 : Works only before you start shooting a movie.
Time code
483
Menu Settings
Viewfinder Shooting and Live View Shooting
z: Shooting 1 (Red)
Image quality
Page
1 / 41 / 61
73 / 83 / 74 / 84 / 7a / 8a / b / c
149
Image review time
Off / 2 sec. / 4 sec. / 8 sec. / Hold
70
Beep
Enable / Disable
69
Release shutter
without card
Enable / Disable
42
Peripheral illumination: Enable / Disable
Lens aberration
correction
Chromatic aberration: Enable / Disable
181
Distortion: Disable / Enable
Flash control
Flash firing / E-TTL II metering / Flash sync.
speed in Av mode / Built-in flash settings /
External flash function settings / External flash
C.Fn setting / Clear settings
262
 Shaded menu options are not displayed in the <A> mode.
 What is displayed under [z1: Image quality] depends on the [Record
func.] (p.146) setting under [51: Record func+card/folder sel.]. If
[Rec. separately] is set, set the image quality for each card.
 With movie shooting, certain menu items are not displayed. Also, the
[z6] tab will not appear.
484
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 2 (Red)
Page
Exposure
compensation/
AEB setting*
1/3- and 1/2-stop increments, ±5 stops
(AEB ±3 stops)
226
227
ISO speed settings
ISO speed / ISO speed range /
Auto ISO range / Minimum shutter speed
154
Auto Lighting
Optimizer
White balance
Disable / Low / Standard / High
Disabled in M or B modes
Q/W/E/R/Y/U/D/O/
P (Approx. 2500 - 10000)
Custom White Balance Manual setting of white balance
175
168
169
White balance shift/
bracketing
White balance correction: B/A/M/G bias, 9 levels each
White balance bracketing: B/A and M/G bias,
172
single-level increments, ±3 levels
Color space
sRGB / Adobe RGB
187
* During movie shooting, [Expo.comp./AEB] will be [Exposure comp.].
z: Shooting 3 (Red)
Picture Style
DAuto / PStandard / QPortrait /
RLandscape / SNeutral / UFaithful /
VMonochrome / WUser Def. 1-3
160
Long exposure noise
reduction
Disable / Auto / Enable
178
High ISO speed noise
reduction
Disable / Low / Standard / High /
Multi Shot Noise Reduction
176
Highlight tone priority
Disable / Enable
180
Dust Delete Data
Obtain data to be used by EOS software to
delete dust spots
407
Multiple exposure
Multiple exposure / Multiple exposure control /
Number of exposures / Save source images /
Continue multiple exposure
238
HDR Mode
Adjust dynamic range / Effect / Continuous
HDR / Auto Image Align / Save source images
233
485
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 4* (Red)
Page
Red-eye reduction
Disable / Enable
256
Interval timer
Disable / Enable (Interval / Number of shots)
250
Bulb timer
Disable / Enable (Exposure time)
231
Anti-flicker shooting
Disable / Enable
185
Mirror lockup
Disable / Enable
246
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
z: Shooting 5* (Red)
Live View shooting
Enable / Disable
287
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone Single
299
Continuous AF
Disable / Enable
294
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
295
Aspect ratio
3:2 / 4:3 / 16:9 / 1:1
295
Exposure simulation
Enable / During e / Disable
296
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
z: Shooting 6 (Red)
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
297
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. / 1 min. /
10 min. / 30 min.
298
486
Menu Settings
2: AF1 (Purple)
Page
Case 1
Versatile multi purpose setting
109
Case 2
Continue to track the subjects, ignoring
possible obstacles
109
Case 3
Instantly focus on subjects suddenly entering
AF points
110
Case 4
For subjects that accelerate or decelerate
quickly
110
Case 5
For erratic subjects moving quickly in any
direction
111
Case 6
For subjects that change speed and move
erratically
112
AI Servo 1st image
priority
Release priority / Equal priority / Focus priority
117
AI Servo 2nd image
priority
Shooting speed priority / Equal priority / Focus
priority
118
Lens electronic MF
Enable after One-Shot AF / Disable after OneShot AF / Disable in AF mode
119
AF-assist beam firing
Enable / Disable / Enable external flash only /
IR AF assist beam only
120
One-Shot AF release
priority
Release priority / Focus priority
121
2: AF2 (Purple)
2: AF3 (Purple)
487
Menu Settings
2: AF4 (Purple)
Page
Lens drive when AF
impossible
Continue focus search / Stop focus search
122
Selectable AF point
65 points / 21 points / 9 points
123
Select AF area
selection mode
Manual selection: Spot AF / Manual selection:
1 point AF / Expand AF area:
/ Expand AF
area: Surround / Manual selection: Zone AF /
Manual selection: Large Zone AF /
Auto selection: 65 point AF
124
AF area selection
method
S 9 M-Fn button / S 9 Main Dial
125
Orientation linked AF
point
Same for both vertical/horizontal /
Separate AF points: Area+point /
Separate AF points: Point only
125
Initial AF point,
Servo AF
Initial
Manual
127
AI
Auto AF point
selection: EOS iTR AF
AF point selected /
AF point / Auto
Enable / Disable
128
Stops at AF area edges / Continuous
129
2: AF5 (Purple)
Manual AF point
selection pattern
Selected (constant) / All (constant) / Selected
AF point display during
(pre-AF, focused) / Selected (focused) /
focus
Disable display
130
Auto / Enable / Disable
VF display illumination AF point during AI Servo AF: Non illuminated /
Illuminated
131
AF status in viewfinder Show in field of view / Show outside view
132
AF Microadjustment
133
488
Disable / All by same amount / Adjust by lens
Menu Settings
3: Playback 1 (Blue)
Page
Protect images
Protect images
368
Rotate image
Rotate images
367
Erase images
Erase images
392
Print order
Specify images to be printed (DPOF)
424
Photobook Set-up
Specify images for a photobook
429
Image copy
Copy images between cards
388
RAW image processing Process 1 images
398
3: Playback 2 (Blue)
Resize
Downsize JPEG image’s pixel count
403
Rating
[OFF] / l / m / n / o / p
371
Slide show
Set Playback description / Display time /
Repeat, and start auto playback
382
Image transfer
Image selection/transfer / RAW+JPEG transfer
427
Image jump w/6
1 image / 10 images / 100 images / Date /
Folder / Movies / Stills / Protect / Rating
362
Highlight alert
Disable / Enable
359
AF point display
Disable / Enable
359
Playback grid
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
355
Histogram display
Brightness / RGB
360
3: Playback 3 (Blue)
Movie playback count* Rec time / Time code
340
1x (no magnification) / 2x (magnify from center) / 4x
(magnify from center) / 8x (magnify from center) / 10x
Magnification (approx.)
(magnify from center) / Actual size (from selected
point) / Same as last magnification (from center)
365
Control over HDMI
386
Disable / Enable
* The setting is linked to the [Time code]’s [Movie play count] under the [z5
(Movie)] tab.
489
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 1 (Yellow)
Page
Record function:
Standard / Auto switch card / Record
separately / Record to multiple
146
Record/playback / Playback: f / g
148
Folder: Creating and selecting a folder
188
File numbering
Continuous / Auto reset / Manual reset
193
File name
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
190
Auto rotate
OnzD / OnD / Off
395
Format card
Erase data on the card by formatting
67
Eye-Fi settings
Displayed when a commercially-available EyeFi card is inserted
475
1 min. / 2 min. / 4 min. / 8 min. / 15 min. / 30
min. / Disable
69
Record function+card/
folder selection
5: Set-up 2 (Yellow)
Auto power off
LCD brightness
Auto: Adjustable to one of three brightness levels
Manual: Adjustable to one of seven brightness levels
394
Date/Time/Zone
Date (year, month, day) / Time (hr., min., sec.) /
Daylight saving time / Time zone
47
LanguageK
Select the interface language
49
Viewfinder level: Hide / Show
75
VF grid display: Disable / Enable
74
Show/hide in viewfinder:
Shooting mode / White balance / Drive mode /
AF operation / Metering mode / Image quality /
Flicker detection
77
Set GPS and digital compass functions
197
Viewfinder display
GPS/digital compass
settings
490
Menu Settings
5: Set-up 3 (Yellow)
Page
Video system
For NTSC / For PAL
330
385
Battery information
Power source / Remaining capacity / Shutter
count / Recharge performance / Battery
registration / Serial number / Battery history
470
Auto cleaning f: Enable / Disable
Sensor cleaning
Clean now f
406
Clean manually
409
z button display
options
Displays camera settings / Electronic level /
Displays shooting functions
468
m button function
Rating / Protect
371
370
HDMI frame rate*
Auto / 59.94i / 50.00i / 59.94p / 50.00p / 23.98p 350
Communication
settings
Displayed when WFT-E7 (Ver. 2, sold
separately) is attached.
-
Wi-Fi function
Displayed when W-E1 is in use.
-
* Options displayed on the screen differ depending on the [Video system] setting.
5: Set-up 4 (Yellow)
Custom shooting mode Register current camera settings to the Mode
(C1-C3)
Dial’s w, x, and y positions
464
Clear all camera settings Resets the camera to the default settings
70
Copyright information
Display copyright information / Enter author’s
name / Enter copyright details /
Delete copyright information
195
Certification Logo
Display
Some of the camera’s certification logos are
displayed
467
z firmware ver.
Select to update the firmware of the camera,
lens, Speedlite, or Wireless File Transmitter
-
When using GPS function or a Wireless File Transmitter, be sure to check
the countries and areas of use, and use the device in accordance with the
laws and regulations of the country or region.
491
Menu Settings
8: Custom Functions (Orange)
C.Fn1: Exposure
434
C.Fn2: Exposure/Drive
C.Fn3: Display/
Operation
438
Customize camera functions as desired
C.Fn4: Others
C.Fn5: Clear
Page
440
443
Clear all Custom Function settings
433
Add My Menu tabs 1-5
459
9: My Menu (Green)
Add My Menu tab
Delete all My Menu tabs Delete all My Menu tabs
462
Delete all items
Delete all items under My Menu tabs 1-5
462
Menu display
Normal display / Display from My Menu tab /
Display only My Menu tab
463
492
Menu Settings
Movie Shooting
z: Shooting 4*1 (Movie) (Red)
Page
Movie Servo AF
Enable / Disable
342
AF method
u+Tracking / FlexiZone - Multi / FlexiZone Single
343
Grid display
Off / 3x3 l / 6x4 m / 3x3+diag n
344
MOV / MP4
330
Movie recording size:
• 1920x1080 / 1280x720 / 640x480
• NTSC: 59.94p / 29.97p / 23.98p
Movie recording quality
PAL: 50.00p / 25.00p
• ALL-I (For editing) / IPB (Standard) /
IPB (Light)
331
24.00p: Disable / Enable
333
Sound recording: Auto / Manual / Disable
Sound recording*2
Recording level
Wind filter: Disable / Enable
336
Attenuator: Disable / Enable
Movie Servo AF speed
Movie Servo AF
tracking sensitivity
When active: Always on / During shooting
AF speed: Slow (4, 3, 2, 1) / Standard
Locked on (-1, -2) / 0 / Responsive (+1, +2)
345
346
* In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z2].
* In the <A> shooting mode, [Sound recording] settings will be [On] [Off].
493
Menu Settings
z: Shooting 5*1 (Movie) (Red)
Page
Silent LV shooting
Mode 1 / Mode 2 / Disable
347
Metering timer
4 sec. / 8 sec. / 16 sec. / 30 sec. /
1 min. / 10 min. / 30 min.
347
Time code
Count up / Start time setting / Movie recording
count / Movie play count*2 / HDMI /
Drop frame*3
339
Silent Control
Enable h / Disable h
338
V button function
HDMI output + LCD
/z / q/z /
/k / q/k
No mirroring / Mirroring
*1: In the <A> mode, these menu options are displayed under [z3].
*2: The setting is linked to [Movie play count] under the [x3] tab.
*3: Displayed when 8 (59.94 fps) or 6 (29.97 fps) is set.
494
348
348
Troubleshooting Guide
If a problem occurs with the camera, first refer to this Troubleshooting
Guide. If this Troubleshooting Guide does not resolve the problem,
contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
Power-Related Problems
The battery pack does not recharge.
 If the battery’s remaining capacity is 94% or higher, the battery will not
be recharged (p.470).
 Do not use any battery pack other than genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/
LP-E6.
The charger’s lamp blinks at high speed.
 If (1) the battery charger or battery pack has a problem or (2)
communication with the battery pack failed (with a non-Canon battery pack),
the protection circuit will stop charging, and the charge lamp will blink in
orange at a high speed. In the case of (1), unplug the charger’s power plug
from the power outlet. Detach and reattach the battery pack to the charger.
Wait a few minutes, then reconnect the power plug to the power outlet. If the
problem persists, contact your dealer or nearest Canon Service Center.
The charger’s lamp does not blink.
 If the internal temperature of the battery pack attached to the charger is
high, the charger will not charge the battery for safety reasons (lamp
off). During charging, if the battery’s temperature becomes high for any
reason, charging will stop automatically (lamp blinks). When the battery
temperature goes down, charging will resume automatically.
The camera does not operate even when the power switch is set to <1>.




Make sure the battery compartment cover is closed (p.40).
Make sure the battery is installed properly in the camera (p.40).
Recharge the battery (p.38).
Make sure the card slot cover is closed (p.41).
495
Troubleshooting Guide
The access lamp still lights or blinks
even when the power switch is <2>.
 If the power is turned off while an image is being recorded to the card, the
access lamp will remain on or continue to blink for a few seconds. When
the image recording is completed, the power will turn off automatically.
[Cannot communicate with battery] is displayed.
 Do not use any battery pack other than a genuine Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6.
 Remove and install the battery again (p.40).
 If the battery contacts are dirty, use a soft cloth to clean them.
The battery becomes exhausted quickly.
 Use a fully-charged battery pack (p.38).
 The battery performance may have degraded. See [53: Battery info.]
to check the battery’s recharge performance level (p.470). If the
battery performance is poor, replace the battery pack with a new one.
 The number of possible shots will decrease with any of the following operations:
• Pressing the shutter button halfway for a prolonged period.
• Activating the AF frequently without taking a picture.
• Using the lens’s Image Stabilizer.
• Using the LCD monitor frequently.
• Continuing Live View shooting or movie shooting for a prolonged period.
• Using GPS.
• [GPS] is set to [Enable] even after the camera’s power is turned off.
• The Eye-Fi card’s communication function is operating.
The camera turns off by itself.
 Auto power off is in effect. If you do not want auto power off to take
effect, set [52: Auto power off] to [Disable] (p.69).
 Even if [52: Auto power off] is set to [Disable], the LCD monitor will
still turn off after the camera is left idle for 30 min. (The camera’s
power does not turn off.)
496
Troubleshooting Guide
Auto power off does not work.
 During interval timer shooting, auto power off will not take effect (p.250).
Shooting-Related Problems
The lens cannot be attached.
 The camera cannot be used with EF-M lenses (p.50).
The viewfinder is dark.
 Install a recharged battery pack in the camera (p.38).
No images can be shot or recorded.
 Make sure the card is properly inserted (p.41).
 If you are using an SD card, slide the card’s write-protect switch to the
Write/Erase setting (p.41).
 If the card is full, replace the card or delete unnecessary images to
make space (p.41, 392).
 If you try to focus in the One-Shot AF mode and the focus indicator
<o> in the viewfinder blinks, a picture cannot be taken. Press the
shutter button halfway again to refocus automatically, or focus
manually (p.55, 140).
The card cannot be used.
 If a card error message is displayed, see page 44 or 510.
I cannot lock the focus and recompose the shot.
 Set the AF operation to One-Shot AF (p.87). Focus lock is not possible
in the AI Servo AF, or when servo takes effect in AI Focus AF (p.83).
497
Troubleshooting Guide
I have to press the shutter button twice completely
to take a picture.
 If [z4: Mirror lockup] is set to [Enable], set it to [Disable].
The image is out of focus.




Set the lens’s focus mode switch to <AF> (p.50).
Press the shutter button gently to prevent camera shake (p.54-55).
If the lens has an Image Stabilizer, set the IS switch to <1>.
In low light, the shutter speed may become slow. Use a faster shutter
speed (p.218), set a higher ISO speed (p.154), use flash (p.254, 259),
or use a tripod.
There are fewer AF points.
 Depending on the attached lens, the number of usable AF points and
patterns will differ. The lenses are categorized into seven groups from
A to G. Check which group your lens belongs to. Using a lens in
Groups E to G will have fewer usable AF points (p.102-103).
The AF point is blinking or two AF points are displayed.
 The AF point at the registered area is blinking (p.94, 450).
 The manually-selected AF point (or zone) and the registered AF point
are displayed (p.93, 450).
The AF points do not light up in red.
 The AF points light up in red when focus is achieved in low-light
conditions.
 In the <d>, <s>, <f>, <a>, and <F> modes, you can set
whether to have the AF points light in red when focus is achieved
(p.131).
498
Troubleshooting Guide
AF speed changes depending on lenses used.
 During Live View shooting and movie shooting, the AF control method
(phase-difference detection with the image sensor or contrast
detection) switches automatically depending on the lens type and
function used such as magnified view. The AF speed may therefore
change greatly and focusing may take longer.
Focusing takes a long time.
 If FlexiZone - Multi is set, it may take longer to focus on the subject
depending on the shooting conditions. Use FlexiZone - Single or focus
manually.
 If the movie recording size is set to L 8(59.94 fps) or 7(50.00
fps), contrast detection will be used for the AF control.
The continuous shooting speed is slow.
 Depending on the shutter speed, aperture, subject conditions,
brightness, etc., the continuous shooting speed may become slower
(p.142).
 When EOS iTR AF is operating (p.128), maximum continuous
shooting speed set with <o> will be approx. 9.5 shots/sec. Also,
under low-light conditions, the continuous shooting speed may
decrease.
 If [Anti-flicker shoot.] is set to [Enable] and you shoot under
flickering light, the continuous shooting speed may become slightly
slower, or the continuous shooting interval may become irregular.
Also, the time lag until shutter release may be slightly longer than
usual (p.185).
The maximum burst during continuous shooting is lower.
 If you shoot something that has fine detail such as a field of grass, the
file size will be larger, and the actual maximum burst may be lower
than the number mentioned on page 151.
499
Troubleshooting Guide
ISO 100 cannot be set. ISO speed expansion cannot be selected.
 If [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Enable], the settable ISO
speed range will be ISO 200 - ISO 16000. Even if you expand the
settable ISO speed range with [ISO speed range], you cannot select
the H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200).
When [z3: Highlight tone priority] is set to [Disable], ISO 100/125/
160, H1, or H2 can be set (p.180).
Even if I set a decreased exposure compensation,
the image comes out bright.
 Set [z2: Auto Lighting Optimizer] to [Disable]. When [Low],
[Standard], or [High] is set, even if you set a decreased exposure
compensation or flash exposure compensation, the image may come
out bright (p.175).
I cannot set the exposure compensation while both manual
exposure and Auto ISO are set.
 See page 223 to set the exposure compensation.
 Even if an exposure compensation is performed, it will not be applied
for flash photography.
Multi Shot Noise Reduction cannot be set.
 If the image-recording quality is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, [Multi
Shot Noise Reduction] cannot be set.
The Live View image or movie shooting image is
not displayed during multiple-exposure shooting.
 If [On:ContShtng] is set, Live View display, image review after image
capture, or image playback is not possible during shooting (p.238).
500
Troubleshooting Guide
The multiple-exposure image is shot in 1 quality.
 When the image-recording quality is set to 41 or 61, the
multiple-exposure image will be recorded in 1 quality (p.245).
When I use the <f> mode with flash,
the shutter speed becomes slow.
 If you shoot at night when the background is dark, the shutter speed
automatically becomes slow (slow-sync shooting) so that both the
subject and background are properly exposed. To prevent a slow
shutter speed, under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in
Av mode] to [1/250-1/60sec. auto] or [1/250 sec. (fixed)] (p.263).
The built-in flash rises by itself.
 In the <A> mode, the built-in flash will be raised automatically when
necessary.
The built-in flash fires continuous flashes and makes a sound.
 In low light, the built-in flash fires continuous flashes as an AF-assist
beam (p.89) to make it easier to focus. It also makes a sound when it
fires the flashes. This is normal and not a malfunction.
The built-in flash does not fire.
 If you use the built-in flash too often in too short a period of time, the
flash may stop firing for a while to protect the flash unit.
The external flash does not fire.
 If you use a non-Canon flash unit with Live View shooting, set [z6:
Silent LV shoot.] to [Disable] (p.297).
501
Troubleshooting Guide
The external flash always fires at full output.
 If you use a flash unit other than an EX-series Speedlite, the flash will
always be fired at full output (p.260).
 When the external Speedlite’s Custom Function setting for [Flash
metering mode] is set to [TTL flash metering] (autoflash), the flash
will always be fired at full output (p.271).
Flash exposure compensation cannot be set
for the external Speedlite.
 If flash exposure compensation is already set with the external
Speedlite, flash exposure compensation cannot be set with the camera.
When the external Speedlite’s flash exposure compensation is canceled
(set to 0), flash exposure compensation can be set with the camera.
High-speed sync cannot be set in the <f> mode.
 Under [z1: Flash control], set [Flash sync. speed in Av mode] to
[Auto] (p.263).
The camera makes a small noise when it is shaken.
 When the camera’s internal components slightly move, a small sound
may be heard.
The shutter makes two shooting sounds
during Live View shooting.
 If you use flash, the shutter will make two sounds each time you shoot (p.287).
During Live View or movie shooting, a white
icon is displayed.
or red E
 It indicates that the camera’s internal temperature is high. If the white
< > icon is displayed, the still photo’s image quality may deteriorate.
If the red <E> icon is displayed, it indicates that the Live View or
movie shooting will soon stop automatically (p.310, 351).
502
Troubleshooting Guide
Movie shooting stops by itself.
 If the card’s writing speed is slow, movie shooting may stop
automatically. For cards that can record movies, see page 5. To find
out the card’s writing speed, refer to the card manufacturer’s website.
 If the movie shooting time reaches 29 min. 59 sec., the movie shooting
will stop automatically.
Movie Servo AF cannot be used.
 The movie recording size is set to L 8(59.94 fps) or 7(50.00
fps).
The ISO speed cannot be set for movie shooting.
 If the shooting mode is <A>, <d>, <s>, <f>, and <F>, the
ISO speed will be set automatically. In the <a> mode, you can freely
set the ISO speed (p.321).
The manually set ISO speed changes when
switching to movie shooting.
 If you shoot a movie with manual exposure set to H2 (equivalent to
ISO 51200), the ISO speed setting will switch to H1 (equivalent to ISO
25600). Even if you switch back to still photo shooting, the ISO speed
will not revert to the H2.
The exposure changes during movie shooting.
 If you change the shutter speed or aperture during movie shooting, the
changes in the exposure may be recorded.
 Zooming the lens during movie shooting can cause changes in the
exposure regardless of whether the lens’s maximum aperture changes
or not. The changes in the exposure may be recorded as a result.
503
Troubleshooting Guide
The image flickers or horizontal stripes appear
during movie shooting.
 Flickering, horizontal stripes (noise), or irregular exposures can be
caused by fluorescent lighting, LED lighting, or other light sources
during movie shooting. Also, changes in the exposure (brightness) or
color tone may be recorded. In the <a> mode, a slow shutter speed
may reduce the problem.
The subject looks distorted during movie shooting.
 If you move the camera to the left or right quickly (high-speed panning)
or shoot a moving subject, the image may look distorted.
Still photo shooting is not possible during movie shooting.
 The movie recording size is set to L 8(59.94 fps) or
7(50.00 fps).
When I shoot still photos during movie shooting,
the movie shooting stops.
 To shoot still photos during movie shooting, using a CF card capable of
UDMA transfer or a UHS-I SD card is recommended.
 Setting a lower image quality for still photos or shooting fewer
continuous still photos may resolve the problem.
Time code is off.
 Shooting still photos during movie shooting will cause a discrepancy
between the actual time and time code. When you want to edit a movie
using time code, it is recommended not to shoot still photos during
movie shooting.
Shot images cannot be saved.
 When using the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1, the images cannot be saved if
there is no CF card in the CF card slot.
504
Troubleshooting Guide
Operation Problems
I cannot change the setting with the
<6> dial, <5> dial, <9>, or <p>.
 Set the <R> switch to the left (lock release, p.59).
 Check the [83: Multi function lock] setting (p.442).
A camera button or dial does not work as expected.
 Check the [83: Custom Controls] setting (p.445).
Display Problems
The menu screen shows fewer tabs and options.
 In the <A> mode, only certain menu tabs and options are displayed.
Set the shooting mode to <d> <s> <f> <a> <F> (p.64).
 Under the [9] tab, [Menu display] is set to [Display only My Menu
tab] (p.463).
The file name’s first character is an underscore (“_”).
 Set the color space to sRGB. If Adobe RGB is set, the first character
will be an underscore (p.187).
The fourth character in the file name changes.
 With [51: File name], select the camera’s unique file name or the file
name registered under User setting 1 (p.190).
The file numbering does not start from 0001.
 If the card already contains recorded images, the image number may
not start from 0001 (p.193).
505
Troubleshooting Guide
The shooting date and time displayed is incorrect.
 Check that the correct date and time are set (p.47).
 Check the time zone and daylight saving time (p.47-48).
The date and time are not in the picture.
 The shooting date and time do not appear in the picture. The date and
time are recorded in the image data as shooting information. When
printing, you can imprint the date and time in the picture, using the
date and time recorded in the shooting information (p.417, 421).
[###] is displayed.
 If the number of images recorded on the card exceeds the number the
camera can display, [###] will be displayed (p.373).
In the viewfinder, the AF point display speed is slow.
 In low temperatures, the display speed of the AF points may become
slower due to the AF point display device’s (liquid crystal)
characteristics. The display speed will return to normal at room
temperature.
The LCD monitor does not display a clear image.
 If the LCD monitor is dirty, use a soft cloth to clean it.
 In low or high temperatures, the LCD monitor display may seem slow
or may look black. It will return to normal at room temperature.
[Eye-Fi settings] does not appear.
 [Eye-Fi settings] will appear only when an Eye-Fi card is inserted in
the camera. If the Eye-Fi card has a write-protect switch set to the
LOCK position, you will not be able to check the card’s connection
status or disable Eye-Fi transmission (p.475).
506
Troubleshooting Guide
Playback Problems
Part of the image blinks in black.
 [33: Highlight alert] is set to [Enable] (p.359).
A red box is displayed on the image.
 [33: AF point disp.] is set to [Enable] (p.359).
The image cannot be erased.
 If the image is protected, it cannot be erased (p.368).
The movie cannot be played back.
 Movies edited with a computer cannot be played back with the camera.
Camera operation noise can be heard
when the movie is played back.
 If you operate the camera’s dials or lens during movie shooting, the
operation noise will also be recorded. Using the Directional Stereo
Microphone DM-E1 (sold separately) is recommended (p.337).
The movie has still moments.
 During autoexposure movie shooting, if there is a drastic change in the
exposure level, the recording will stop momentarily until the brightness
stabilizes. In such cases, shoot in the <a> mode (p.320).
507
Troubleshooting Guide
No picture on the TV set.
 Set the [53: Video system] correctly to [For NTSC] or [For PAL].
 Check that the HDMI cable’s plug is inserted all the way in (p.385).
 If [z5: HDMI output+LCD] is set to [Mirroring], the movie will not
appear on the TV set via HDMI output even during playback.
There are multiple movie files for a single movie shoot.
 If the movie file size reaches 4 GB, another movie file will be created
automatically (p.335).
My card reader does not recognize the card.
 Depending on the card reader and computer OS used, large-capacity
CF cards or SDXC cards may not be correctly recognized. In such a
case, connect your camera to the computer with the interface cable,
then transfer the images to your computer using EOS Utility (EOS
software, p.534).
I cannot process the RAW image.
 41 and 61 images cannot be processed with the camera. Use
the EOS software, Digital Photo Professional to process the image
(p.534).
I cannot resize the image.
 c JPEG images and 1/41/61 images cannot be resized
with the camera (p.403).
508
Troubleshooting Guide
Sensor Cleaning Problems
The shutter makes a noise during sensor cleaning.
 If you selected [Clean nowf], the shutter will make a noise, but no
picture is taken (p.406).
Automatic sensor cleaning does not work.
 If you repeatedly turn the power switch <1> / <2> at a short
interval, the <f> icon may not be displayed (p.45).
Printing-Related Problems
There are fewer printing effects than
listed in the instruction manual.
 Contents displayed on the screen vary depending on the printer. This
instruction manual lists all the printing effects available (p.416).
Computer Connection Problems
I cannot transfer images to a computer.
 Install the EOS Utility on your computer (p.534).
 Check that EOS Utility’s main window is displayed.
509
Error Codes
If there is a problem with the camera, an
error message will appear. Follow the onscreen instructions.
Error number
Cause and countermeasures
Number
01
02
Error Message and Solution
Communications between the camera and lens is faulty. Clean the
lens contacts.
 Clean the electrical contacts on the camera and lens, use a Canon
lens, or remove and install the battery pack again (p.21, 22, 40).
Card* cannot be accessed. Reinsert/change card* or format card*
with camera.
 Remove and insert the card again, replace the card, or format the
card (p.41, 67).
Cannot save images because card* is full. Replace card*.
04
05
06
 Replace the card, erase unnecessary images, or format the card
(p.41, 67, 392).
The built-in flash could not be raised. Turn the camera off and on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.45).
Sensor cleaning could not be performed. Turn the camera off and
on again.
 Operate the power switch (p.45).
10, 20
30, 40
50, 60
70, 80
99
An error prevented shooting. Turn the camera off and on again or
re-install the battery.
 Operate the power switch, remove and install the battery pack
again, or use a Canon lens (p.40, 45).
* If the error still persists, write down the error number and contact your nearest
Canon Service Center.
510
Specifications
• Type
Type:
Recording media:
Image sensor size:
Compatible lenses:
Lens mount:
Digital, single-lens reflex, AF/AE camera with built-in
flash
CF cards (Type I, UDMA 7 supported)
SD/SDHC*/SDXC* memory cards
* UHS-I cards compatible.
Approx. 22.4 x 15.0 mm
Canon EF lenses (including EF-S lenses)
* Excluding EF-M lenses
(35mm-equivalent focal length is approx. 1.6 times the
focal length indicated on the lens)
Canon EF mount
• Image Sensor
Type:
Effective pixels:
Aspect ratio:
Dust delete feature:
CMOS sensor
Approx. 20.20 megapixels
* Rounded off to the nearest 10,000th.
3:2
Auto/Manual, Appending Dust Delete Data
• Recording System
Recording format:
Image type:
Pixels recorded:
Record function:
Create/select a folder:
File name:
File numbering:
Design rule for Camera File System (DCF) 2.0
JPEG, RAW (14-bit Canon original),
RAW+JPEG simultaneous recording possible
L (Large)
: Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M (Medium) : Approx. 8.90 megapixels (3648 x 2432)
S1 (Small 1) : Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
S2 (Small 2) : Approx. 2.50 megapixels (1920 x 1280)
S3 (Small 3) : Approx. 350,000 pixels (720 x 480)
RAW
: Approx. 20.0 megapixels (5472 x 3648)
M-RAW
: Approx. 11.2 megapixels (4104 x 2736)
S-RAW
: Approx. 5.0 megapixels (2736 x 1824)
Standard, Auto switch card, Record separately, Record
to multiple
Possible
Preset code / User setting 1 / User setting 2
Continuous, Auto reset, Manual reset
• Image Processing During Shooting
Picture Style:
Auto, Standard, Portrait, Landscape, Neutral, Faithful,
Monochrome, User Defined 1 - 3
511
Specifications
White balance:
Noise reduction:
Automatic image
brightness correction:
Highlight tone priority:
Lens aberration
correction:
Anti-flicker:
Auto, Preset (Daylight, Shade, Cloudy, Tungsten light,
White fluorescent light, Flash), Custom, Color temperature
setting (approx. 2500-10000 K), White balance correction,
and White balance bracketing provided
* Flash color temperature information transmission
possible
Applicable to long exposures and high ISO speed shots
Auto Lighting Optimizer provided
Provided
Peripheral illumination correction, Chromatic aberration
correction, Distortion correction
Possible
• Viewfinder
Type:
Coverage:
Magnification:
Eye point:
Built-in dioptric
adjustment:
Focusing screen:
Grid display:
Electronic level:
Function setting display:
Mirror:
Depth-of-field preview:
Eye-level pentaprism
Vertical/Horizontal approx. 100% (with Eye point approx. 22mm)
Approx. 1.00x (-1 m-1 with 50mm lens at infinity)
Approx. 22mm (from eyepiece lens center at -1 m-1)
Approx. -3.0 - +1.0 m-1 (dpt)
Eh-A standard screen, interchangeable
Provided
Provided
Shooting mode, White balance, Drive mode, AF operation,
Metering mode, Image quality: JPEG/RAW, Flicker
detection, Warning symbol !, AF status
Quick-return type
Provided
• Autofocus
Type:
AF points:
Focusing brightness
range:
Focus operation:
512
TTL secondary image-registration, phase-difference
detection with the dedicated AF sensor
65 (Cross-type AF point: Max. 65 points)
* Number of available AF points, cross-type points, and
Dual cross-type points vary depending on the lens.
* Dual cross-type focusing at f/2.8 with center AF point.
(Excluding some lenses with f/2.8 or larger maximum
aperture)
EV -3 - 18 (Conditions: f/2.8-sensitive center AF point,
One-Shot AF, room temperature, ISO 100)
One-Shot AF, AI Servo AF, AI Focus AF, Manual focusing (MF)
Specifications
AF area selection mode: Single-point Spot AF (manual selection), Single-point AF
(manual selection), AF point expansion (manual
selection: up, down, left, and right), AF point expansion
(manual selection: surround), Zone AF (manual
selection of zone), Large Zone AF (manual selection of
zone), 65-point automatic selection AF
AF point automatic
Based on EOS iTR AF setting
selection conditions:
(Enables AF incorporating human face/color information)
* iTR: Intelligent Tracking and Recognition
AF Configuration Tool: Case 1 - 6
AI Servo AF
Tracking sensitivity, Acceleration/deceleration tracking,
characteristics:
AF point auto switching
AF Custom Functions: 17 functions
AF fine adjustment:
AF Microadjustment (All lenses by same amount or
Adjust by lens)
AF-assist beam:
Small series of flashes fired by built-in flash
• Exposure Control
Metering modes:
Brightness metering
range:
Exposure control:
ISO speed:
(Recommended
exposure index)
ISO speed settings:
Exposure
compensation:
Approx. 150,000-pixel RGB+IR metering sensor and
252-zone TTL metering at max. aperture
EOS iSA (Intelligent Subject Analysis) system
• Evaluative metering (linked to all AF points)
• Partial metering (approx. 6% of viewfinder at center)
• Spot metering (approx. 1.8% of viewfinder at center)
• Center-weighted average metering
EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Program AE (Scene Intelligent Auto, Program), Shutterpriority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual exposure, Bulb
exposure
Scene Intelligent Auto: ISO 100 - ISO 6400 set
automatically
P, Tv, Av, M, B: Auto ISO, ISO 100 - ISO 16000 (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), or ISO expansion to H1 (equivalent
to ISO 25600) or H2 (equivalent to ISO 51200)
ISO speed range, Auto ISO range, and Auto ISO
minimum shutter speed settable
Manual: ±5 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
AEB:
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments (can be
combined with manual exposure
compensation)
513
Specifications
AE lock:
Interval timer:
Bulb timer:
Auto:
Applied in One-Shot AF mode with evaluative
metering when focus is achieved
Manual: By AE lock button
Shooting interval and shot count settable
Bulb exposure time settable
• HDR Shooting
Dynamic range adjustment: Auto, ±1, ±2, ±3
Effects:
Natural, Art standard, Art vivid, Art bold, Art embossed
Auto image align:
Provided
• Multiple Exposures
Shooting methods:
Function/control priority, Continuous shooting priority
Number of multiple
2 to 9 exposures
exposures:
Multiple-exposure control: Additive, Average, Bright, Dark
• Shutter
Type:
Shutter speeds:
Electronically-controlled, focal-plane shutter
1/8000 sec. to 30 sec. (total shutter speed range; available
range varies by shooting mode), Bulb, X-sync at 1/250 sec.
• Drive System
Drive modes:
Continuous shooting
speed:
Max. burst:
514
Single shooting, High-speed continuous shooting, Lowspeed continuous shooting, Silent single shooting, Silent
continuous shooting, 10-sec. self-timer/remote control,
2-sec. self-timer/remote control
High-speed continuous shooting:
Max. approx. 10.0 shots/sec. (settable to 10 to 2 shots/sec.)
* Max. approx. 9.5 shots/sec. with EOS iTR AF.
Low-speed continuous shooting:
Approx. 3.0 shots/sec. (settable to 9 to 1 shots/sec.)
Silent continuous shooting:
Approx. 4.0 shots/sec. (settable to 4 to 1 shots/sec.)
JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 130 shots (approx. 1090 shots)
RAW: Approx. 24 shots (approx. 31 shots)
RAW+JPEG Large/Fine: Approx. 18 shots (approx. 19 shots)
* Figures are based on Canon’s testing standards
(Aspect ratio: 3 x 2, ISO 100 and Standard Picture
Style) and an 8 GB CF card.
* Figures in parentheses apply to an UDMA mode 7, CF
card based on Canon’s testing standards.
Specifications
• Flash
Built-in flash:
External Speedlite:
Flash metering:
Flash exposure
compensation:
FE lock:
PC terminal:
Flash control:
Retractable, auto pop-up flash
Guide number: Approx. 11/36.1 (ISO 100, in meters/feet)
Flash coverage: Approx. 15mm lens angle of view
Recycling time: Approx. 3 sec.
Compatible with EX-series Speedlites
E-TTL II autoflash
±3 stops in 1/3- or 1/2-stop increments
Provided
Provided
Built-in flash function settings, External Speedlite function
settings, External Speedlite Custom Function settings
Wireless flash control via optical transmission possible
• Live View Shooting
Focus methods:
Continuous AF:
Focusing brightness
range:
Metering modes:
Dual Pixel CMOS AF system/Contrast-detection AF
system (Face+Tracking, FlexiZone-Multi, FlexiZoneSingle), Manual focus (approx. 5x and 10x magnified
view possible for focus check)
Provided
EV 0 - 18 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Evaluative metering (315 zones), Partial metering (approx.
10% of Live View screen), Spot metering (approx. 2.6% of
Live View screen), Center-weighted average metering
Brightness metering range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Aspect ratio:
3:2, 4:3, 16:9, 1:1
Silent shooting:
Provided (Mode 1 and 2)
Grid display:
3 types
• Movie Shooting
Recording format:
Movie:
Audio:
Recording size and
frame rate:
MOV/MP4
MPEG-4 AVC / H.264
Variable (average) bit rate
MOV: Linear PCM, MP4: AAC
Full HD (1920x1080): 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p/
24.00p/23.98p
HD (1280x720)
: 59.94p/50.00p/29.97p/25.00p
SD (640x480)
: 29.97p/25.00p
515
Specifications
Compression method:
ALL-I (For editing/I-only), IPB (Standard), IPB (Light)
* IPB (Light) is for MP4 only.
File size:
[MOV]
• Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 440 MB/min.
• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 654 MB/min.
• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 225 MB/min.
• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 583 MB/min.
• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 196 MB/min.
• SD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 75 MB/min.
[MP4]
• Full HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 431 MB/min.
• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 645 MB/min.
• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p/24.00p/23.98p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 216 MB/min.
• Full HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)
: Approx. 87 MB/min.
• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/ALL-I
: Approx. 574 MB/min.
• HD (59.94p/50.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 187 MB/min.
• HD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)
: Approx. 30 MB/min.
• SD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Standard)
: Approx. 66 MB/min.
• SD (29.97p/25.00p)/IPB (Light)
: Approx. 23 MB/min.
Card requirements:
[CF card]
(Writing/reading speed)
ALL-I: 30 MB/sec. or faster
IPB (Standard), Full HD 59.94p/50.00p: 30 MB/sec. or
faster
IPB (Standard), other than above: 10 MB/sec. or faster
IPB (Light): 10 MB/sec. or faster (MP4 only)
516
Specifications
[SD card]
ALL-I: 20 MB/sec. or faster
IPB (Standard), Full HD 59.94p/50.00p: 20 MB/sec. or
faster
IPB (Standard), other than above: 6 MB/sec. or faster
IPB (Light): 4 MB/sec. or faster (MP4 only)
Focus methods:
Same as focusing with Live View shooting
Movie Servo AF customizable
Metering modes:
Center-weighted average and Evaluative metering with
the image sensor
* Automatically set by the focus method.
Brightness metering range: EV 0 - 20 (at room temperature, ISO 100)
Exposure control:
Autoexposure shooting (Program AE for movie shooting),
Shutter-priority AE, Aperture-priority AE, Manual
exposure
Exposure compensation: ±3 stops in 1/3-stop or 1/2-stop increments
Scene Intelligent Auto, Tv: Automatically set within ISO
ISO speed:
100 - ISO 16000
(Recommended
P, Av, B: Automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO 16000,
exposure index)
expandable to H1 (equivalent to ISO 25600)
M: Auto ISO (automatically set within ISO 100 - ISO
16000), ISO 100 - ISO 16000 set manually (in 1/3- or
whole-stop increments), expandable to H1 (equivalent to
ISO 25600)
Time code:
Supported
Drop frames:
Compatible with 59.94p/29.97p
Sound recording:
Built-in monaural microphone, external stereo
microphone terminal provided
Sound-recording level adjustable, wind filter provided,
attenuator provided
Headphones:
Headphone socket provided and volume adjustment
possible
Grid display:
3 types
Still photo shooting:
Possible
* Except when set to Full HD 59.94p/50.00p
2-screen display:
LCD monitor and HDMI output movie displayable
simultaneously
HDMI output:
Movie without information display can also be output.
* Auto/59.94i/50.00i/59.94p/50.00p/23.98p selectable
517
Specifications
• LCD Monitor
Type:
Monitor size and dots:
Brightness adjustment:
Electronic level:
Interface languages:
Help display:
TFT color, liquid-crystal monitor
Wide 7.7 cm (3.0-in) (3:2) with approx. 1.04 million dots
Auto (Dark, Standard, Bright), Manual (7 levels)
Provided
25
Possible
• Playback
Image display formats:
Highlight alert:
AF point display:
Grid display:
Magnified view:
Image browsing
methods:
Image rotation:
Rating:
Movie playback:
Slide show:
Image protection:
Copying images:
Single-image display (without shooting information),
Single-image display (with simple information), Singleimage display (Shooting information displayed: Detailed
information, Lens/histogram, White balance, Picture
Style, Color space/noise reduction, Lens aberration
correction, GPS), Index display (4/9/36/100 images),
Two-image display
Overexposed highlights blink
Provided
3 types
Approx. 1.5x-10x, initial magnification and position
settable
Single image, Jump by 10 or 100 images, By shooting
date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By protected
images, By rating
Provided
Provided
Enabled (LCD monitor, HDMI)
Built-in speaker
All images, By date, By folder, By movies, By stills, By
protected images, By rating
Possible
Possible
• Post-Processing of Images
In-camera RAW image
processing:
Resize:
518
Brightness correction, White balance, Picture Style, Auto
Lighting Optimizer, High ISO speed noise reduction,
JPEG image-recording quality, Color space, Peripheral
illumination correction, Distortion correction, Chromatic
aberration correction
Provided
Specifications
• Direct Printing
Compatible printers:
Printable images:
Print ordering:
PictBridge-compatible printers
JPEG and RAW images
DPOF Version 1.1 compliant
• Image Transfer
Transferrable files:
Still photos (JPEG, RAW, RAW+JPEG images), Movies
• GPS Function
Compatible satellites:
Geotag information
appended to image:
Geotag updating
interval:
Time setting:
Digital compass:
Log data:
Log data deletion:
GPS satellites (USA), GLONASS satellites (Russia),
Quasi-Zenith Satellite System (QZSS) “MICHIBIKI” (Japan)
Latitude, Longitude, Elevation, Direction, Coordinated
Universal Time (UTC), satellite signal condition
1 sec., 5 sec., 10 sec., 15 sec., 30 sec., 1 min., 2 min.,
5 min.
GPS time data set to camera
Three-axis geomagnetic sensor and three-axis
accelerometer sensor used for orientation sensing
One file per day, NMEA format
* Changing the time zone creates another file.
* The log data saved in internal memory as a log file can
be transferred to a card or downloaded to a computer.
Possible
• Custom Functions
Custom Functions:
My Menu:
Custom shooting modes:
Copyright information:
19
Up to 5 screens can be registered
Register under Mode Dial’s C1, C2, or C3
Text entry and inclusion enabled
• Interface
DIGITAL terminal:
SuperSpeed USB (USB 3.0)
Computer communication, direct printing, Wireless File
Transmitter WFT-E7 (Ver. 2) connection
HDMI mini OUT terminal: Type C (Auto switching of resolution), CEC-compatible
External microphone IN 3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
terminal:
Headphone terminal:
3.5 mm diameter stereo mini-jack
Remote control terminal: For N3-type remote control units
Wireless remote control: Compatible with Remote Controller RC-6
Eye-Fi card:
Supported
519
Specifications
• Power
Battery:
Battery information:
Number of possible
shots (Based on CIPA
testing standards):
Movie shooting time:
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6, quantity 1
* AC power usable with household power outlet
accessories.
* With Battery Grip BG-E16 attached, size-AA/LR6
batteries can be used.
Remaining capacity, Shutter count, Recharge
performance, and Battery registration possible
With viewfinder shooting:
Approx. 670 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 640 shots at
0°C/32°F
With Live View shooting:
Approx. 250 shots at 23°C/73°F, approx. 240 shots at
0°C/32°F
Approx. 1 hr. 40 min. at 23°C/73°F
Approx. 1 hr. 30 min. at 0°C/32°F
* With a fully-charged Battery Pack LP-E6N.
• Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions (W x H x D): Approx. 148.6 x 112.4 x 78.2 mm / 5.85 x 4.43 x 3.08 in.
Weight:
Approx. 910 g / 32.10 oz. (Including battery, CF card,
SD memory card)
Approx. 820 g / 28.92 oz. (Body only)
• Operation Environment
Working temperature
range:
Working humidity:
0°C - 40°C / 32°F - 104°F
85% or less
 For the specifications of the Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1, refer to “Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1
Preliminary Notes and Legal Information” (p.4).
 All the data above is based on Canon’s testing standards and CIPA (Camera &
Imaging Products Association) testing standards and guidelines.
 Dimensions, maximum diameter, length and weight listed above are based on CIPA
Guidelines (except weight for camera body only).
 Product specifications and the exterior are subject to change without notice.
 If a problem occurs with a non-Canon lens attached to the camera, consult the
respective lens manufacturer.
520
521
522
Trademarks
 Adobe is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated.
 Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
 Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and
other countries.
 CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk Corporation.
 SDXC logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
 HDMI, HDMI logo, and High-Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or
registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
 Google, Google Maps, and Google Earth are trademarks of Google Inc.
 Map Utility uses Google Maps to display images and routes traveled on
a map.
 All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
About MPEG-4 Licensing
“This product is licensed under AT&T patents for the MPEG-4 standard and may be
used for encoding MPEG-4 compliant video and/or decoding MPEG-4 compliant video
that was encoded only (1) for a personal and non-commercial purpose or (2) by a
video provider licensed under the AT&T patents to provide MPEG-4 compliant video.
No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG-4 standard.”
* Notice displayed in English as required.
523
Use of Genuine Canon Accessories Is Recommended
This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with
genuine Canon accessories.
Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and/or accidents such
as fire, etc., caused by the malfunction of non-genuine Canon accessories
(e.g., a leakage and/or explosion of a battery pack). Please note that this
warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non-genuine
Canon accessories, although you may request such repairs on a chargeable
basis.
Battery Pack LP-E6N/LP-E6 is dedicated to Canon products only. Using it
with an incompatible battery charger or product may result in malfunction or
accidents for which Canon cannot be held liable.
524
Safety Precautions
The following precautions are provided to prevent harm or injury to
yourself and others. Make sure to thoroughly understand and follow
these precautions before using the product.
If you experience any malfunctions, problems, or damage to the
product, contact the nearest Canon Service Center or the dealer
from whom you purchased the product.
Warnings:
Follow the warnings below. Otherwise, death or
serious injuries may result.
 To prevent fire, excessive heat, chemical leakage, explosions, and electrical shock,
follow the safeguards below:
• Do not use any batteries, power sources, or accessories not specified in the
Instruction Manual. Do not use any home-made or modified batteries.
• Do not short-circuit, disassemble, or modify the battery. Do not apply heat or
solder to the battery. Do not expose the battery to fire or water. Do not subject the
battery to strong physical shock.
• Do not insert the battery’s plus and minus ends incorrectly.
• Do not recharge the battery in temperatures outside the allowable ambient
temperature range. Also, do not exceed the recharging time indicated in the
Instruction Manual.
• Do not insert any foreign metallic objects into the electrical contacts of the camera,
accessories, connecting cables, etc.
 When disposing of a battery, insulate the electrical contacts with tape to prevent
contact with other metallic objects or batteries. This is to prevent a fire or an explosion.
 If excessive heat, smoke, or fumes are emitted when recharging the battery,
immediately unplug the battery charger from the power outlet to stop recharging.
Otherwise, it may cause a fire, heat damage, or electrical shock.
 If the battery leaks, changes color, deforms, or emits smoke or fumes, remove it
immediately. Be careful not to get burned in the process. It may cause a fire,
electrical shock or skin burn if you keep using it.
 Prevent any battery leakage from contacting your eyes, skin, and clothing. It can
cause blindness or skin problems. If the battery leakage contacts your eyes, skin, or
clothing, flush the affected area with lots of clean water without rubbing it. See a
physician immediately.
 Do not leave any cords near a heat source. It can deform the cord or melt the
insulation and cause a fire or electrical shock.
 Do not hold the camera in the same position for long periods of time. Even if the
camera does not feel too hot, prolonged contact with the same body part may cause
skin redness, blistering or low-temperature contact burns. Using a tripod is
recommended for people with circulation problems or very sensitive skin, or when
using the camera in very hot places.
 Do not fire the flash at anyone driving a car or other vehicle. It may cause an accident.
525
Safety Precautions
 When the camera or accessories are not in use, make sure to remove the battery
and disconnect the power plug from the equipment before storing. This is to prevent
electrical shock, excessive heat, fire, or corrosion.
 Do not use the equipment where there is flammable gas. This is to prevent an
explosion or a fire.
 If you drop the equipment and the casing breaks open to expose the internal parts,
do not touch the internal parts. There is a possibility of an electrical shock.
 Do not disassemble or modify the equipment. High-voltage internal parts can cause
electrical shock.
 Do not look at the sun or an extremely bright light source through the camera or
lens. Doing so may damage your vision.
 Keep equipment out of the reach of children and infants, including when in use. Straps
or cords may accidentally cause choking, electrical shock, or injury. Choking or injury
may also occur if a child or infant accidentally swallows a camera part or accessory. If
a child or infant swallows a part or accessory, consult a physician immediately.
 Do not use or store the equipment in dusty or humid places. Likewise, store the
battery with its protective cover attached to prevent short-circuit. This is to prevent a
fire, excessive heat, electrical shock, or burn.
 Before using the camera inside an airplane or hospital, check if it is allowed.
Electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the plane’s
instruments or the hospital’s medical equipment.
 To prevent a fire and electrical shock, follow the safeguards below:
• Always insert the power plug all the way in.
• Do not handle a power plug with wet hands.
• When unplugging a power plug, grasp and pull the plug instead of the cord.
• Do not scratch, cut, or excessively bend the cord or put a heavy object on the
cord. Also do not twist or tie the cords.
• Do not connect too many power plugs to the same power outlet.
• Do not use a cord whose wire is broken or insulation is damaged.
 Unplug the power plug periodically and clean off the dust around the power outlet
with a dry cloth. If the surrounding is dusty, humid, or oily, the dust on the power
outlet may become moist and short-circuit the outlet, causing a fire.
 Do not connect the battery directly to an electrical outlet or a car’s cigarette lighter outlet.
The battery may leak, generate excessive heat or explode, causing a fire, burns or injuries.
 A thorough explanation of how to use the product by an adult is required when the
product is used by children. Supervise children while they are using the product.
Incorrect usage may result in electrical shock or injury.
 Do not leave a lens or lens-attached camera in the sun without the lens cap
attached. Otherwise, the lens may concentrate the sun’s rays and cause a fire.
 Do not cover or wrap the product with a cloth. Doing so may trap heat within and
cause the casing to deform or catch fire.
 Be careful not to get the camera wet. If you drop the product in the water or if water
or metal get inside the product, promptly remove the battery. This is to prevent a fire
and an electrical shock.
 Do not use paint thinner, benzene, or other organic solvents to clean the product.
Doing so may cause fire or a health hazard.
526
Safety Precautions
Cautions:
Follow the cautions below. Otherwise, physical injury
or property damage may result.
 Do not use or store the product inside a car under the hot sun or near a heat source.
The product may become hot and cause skin burns. Doing so may also cause
battery leakage or explosion, which will degrade the performance or shorten the life
of the product.
 Do not carry the camera around when it is attached to a tripod. Doing so may cause
injury. Also make sure the tripod is sturdy enough to support the camera and lens.
 Do not leave the product in a low-temperature environment for an extended period of
time. The product will become cold and may cause injury when touched.
 Do not fire the flash near the eyes. It may hurt the eyes.
 Never play the provided CD-ROM in a drive that is not compatible with the CD-ROM.
If you use it in a music CD player, you may damage the speakers and other
components. When using headphones, there is also a risk of injury to your ears from
excessively loud volume.
527
Only for European Union and EEA (Norway,
Iceland and Liechtenstein)
These symbols indicate that this product is not to be
disposed of with your household waste, according to
the WEEE Directive (2012/19/EU), the Battery
Directive (2006/66/EC) and/or national legislation
implementing those Directives.
If a chemical symbol is printed beneath the symbol
shown above, in accordance with the Battery
Directive, this indicates that a heavy metal (Hg = Mercury, Cd = Cadmium, Pb
= Lead) is present in this battery or accumulator at a concentration above an
applicable threshold specified in the Battery Directive.
This product should be handed over to a designated collection point, e.g., on
an authorized one-for-one basis when you buy a new similar product or to an
authorized collection site for recycling waste electrical and electronic
equipment (EEE) and batteries and accumulators. Improper handling of this
type of waste could have a possible impact on the environment and human
health due to potentially hazardous substances that are generally associated
with EEE. Your cooperation in the correct disposal of this product will
contribute to the effective usage of natural resources.
For more information about the recycling of this product, please contact your
local city office, waste authority, approved scheme or your household waste
disposal service or visit www.canon-europe.com/weee, or
www.canon-europe.com/battery.
CAUTION
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO LOCAL REGULATION.
528
Handling Precautions
LCD Panel and LCD Monitor
 Although the LCD monitor is manufactured with very high precision
technology with over 99.99% effective pixels, there may be a few dead pixels
displaying only black or red, etc. among the remaining 0.01% or less pixels.
Dead pixels are not a malfunction. They do not affect the images recorded.
 If the LCD monitor is left on for a prolonged period, screen burn-in may occur
where you see remnants of what was displayed. However, this is only
temporary and will disappear when the camera is left unused for a few days.
 The LCD monitor display may seem slow in low temperatures, or look black
in high temperatures. It will return to normal at room temperature.
Cards
To protect the card and its recorded data, note the following:
 Do not drop, bend, or wet the card. Do not subject it to excessive force,
physical shock, or vibration.
 Do not touch the card’s electronic contacts with your fingers or anything
metallic.
 Do not affix any stickers, etc., on the card.
 Do not store or use the card near anything that has a strong magnetic field,
such as a TV set, speakers, or magnet. Also avoid places prone to having
static electricity.
 Do not leave the card in direct sunlight or near a heat source.
 Store the card in a case.
 Do not store the card in hot, dusty, or humid locations.
Lens
After detaching the lens from the camera, put down the
lens with the rear end up and attach the lens caps to avoid
scratching the lens surface and electrical contacts.
Contacts
529
530
16
Downloading Images to
a Computer / Software
This chapter explains how to transfer images from the
camera to a computer, gives an overview of the
software on the EOS Solution Disk (CD-ROM), and
explains how to install the software on a computer.
EOS Solution Disk XXX
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
EOS Solution Disk
(Software)
531
Downloading Images to a Computer
You can use EOS software to download the images in the camera to
your computer. There are two ways to do this.
Downloading by Connecting the Camera to the Computer
1
Install the software (p.536).
the provided interface cable
2 Use
to connect the camera to your
computer.
 Use the interface cable provided with
the camera.
 When connecting the cable to the
camera, use the cable protector
(p.34). Connect the cable to the
digital terminal with the plug’s
<
> icon facing the back of the
camera.
 Connect the cord’s plug to the
computer’s USB terminal.
EOS Utility to transfer the
3 Use
images.
 For details, refer to the EOS Utility
Instruction Manual.
Use the provided interface cable or one from Canon (p.478). When
connecting the interface cable, use the provided cable protector (p.34).
532
Downloading Images to a Computer
Downloading Images with a Card Reader
You can use a card reader to download images to your computer.
1
Install the software (p.536).
the card into the card
2 Insert
reader.
Digital Photo Professional to
3 Use
download the images.
 For details, refer to the Digital Photo
Professional Instruction Manual.
When downloading images from the camera to your computer with a card
reader without using EOS software, copy the DCIM folder on the card to
your computer.
533
About the Software
EOS Solution Disk
EOS Solution Disk XXX
This disk contains various software for EOS cameras.
CEL-XXX XXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
XXXXX
Windows XXX XXX
Mac OS X XXX XXX
© CA
U.
the E
NON INC
. 20XX. Made in
Note that the software provided with previous cameras might
not support still photos and movie files shot with this camera.
Please use the software provided with this camera.
a EOS Utility
Communication Software for the Camera and Computer
 You can download images (still images/movies) you have shot with the camera
to your computer.
 You can set the various settings of the camera from your computer.
 You can shoot photos remotely by connecting the camera to your computer.
b Digital Photo Professional
Image Viewing and Editing Software
 You can edit images with originals remaining unchanged.
 Can be used by a wide range of users from amateurs to professionals. It is
especially recommended for users who mainly shoot RAW images.
* Certain functions differ between the version to be installed on a 64-bit computer
and that to be installed on a 32-bit computer.
c Picture Style Editor
Picture Style File Creating Software
 This software is aimed at advanced users who are experienced in image
processing.
 You can edit Picture Style to your unique image characteristics and create/save
an original Picture Style file.
d Map Utility
Shooting locations can be displayed on a map on a computer screen by
using the geotag location information recorded. Note that Internet
connection is required to install and use Map Utility.
534
About the Software

Downloading from the Canon website
You can download the following software and Software Instruction
Manuals from the Canon website.
www.canon.com/icpd
EOS MOVIE Utility
This software enables you to play back the movies you shot,
consecutively play back movie files that were split up, and merge the
split movie files and save it as a single file. You can also grab movie
frames and save them as still photos.
535
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on Windows
Compatible OS
Windows 8.1
Windows 8
Windows 7
 Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 If there is a previous version of the software already installed on your
computer, follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The
previous version will be overwritten.)
1
Insert the EOS Solution Disk into the computer.
2
Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to
install.
3
After the software is installed, remove the CD-ROM.
536
Installing the Software
Installing the Software on the Macintosh
Compatible OS
MAC OS X 10.8 - 10.9
 Do not connect the camera to your computer before you install the
software. The software will not be installed correctly.
 If there is a previous version of the software already installed on your
computer, follow the procedure below to install the latest version. (The
previous version will be overwritten.)
1
Insert the EOS Solution Disk into the computer.
On your computer’s desktop, double-click and open the CD-ROM
icon, and then double-click [setup].
2 Click [Easy Installation] and follow the on-screen instructions to
install.
3
After the software is installed, remove the CD-ROM.
537
Index
Numerics
10- or 2-sec. self-timer..................143
1280x720 (movie) .........................331
1920x1080 (movie) .......................331
24.00p...........................................333
640x480 (movie) ...........................331
65-point automatic selection AF ...91, 97
A
A (Scene Intelligent Auto)............80
AC Adapter ...................................474
Acceleration/deceleration
tracking .........................................114
Access lamp .............................43, 44
Accessories ......................................3
Adobe RGB...................................187
AE lock..........................................229
AEB
(Auto Exposure Bracketing)....227, 434
AF ...................................................85
AF area selection lever...............58
AF area selection mode .......90, 92
AF-assist beam ..................89, 120
AF Configuration Tool...............108
AF group...................................100
AF method........................299, 343
AF Microadjustment .................133
AF-ON (AF start)
button .........................55, 446, 448
AF operation...............................86
AF point ....................90, 93, 95, 99
AF point expansion...............90, 95
AF point registration .................450
AF point selection...............93, 453
Beeper........................................69
Color information ......................128
Customization...........................117
f/8 AF..................................99, 103
Facial information .....................128
Manual focusing (MF).......140, 308
Out of focus ..................53, 54, 498
Recomposing .............................83
538
Subjects difficult to
focus ................................ 139, 306
AI FOCUS (AI Focus AF) ............... 88
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF) ............... 88
Acceleration/deceleration
tracking .................................... 114
AF Operation indicator....... 89, 131
AF point auto switching............ 115
AF points light up in red ..... 89, 131
AF sensor .................................. 99
Tracking sensitivity................... 113
ALL-I (For editing/I-only) .............. 332
Ambient light sensor............... 24, 394
Anti-flicker shooting...................... 185
Aperture-priority AE.............. 220, 316
Area AF frame.......................... 91, 97
Aspect ratio .................................. 295
Attenuator..................................... 336
Audio/video output ....................... 385
Auto Lighting Optimizer.......... 79, 175
Auto playback............................... 382
Auto power off .......................... 45, 69
Auto reset..................................... 194
Auto rotation................................. 395
Auto switch card........................... 147
Auto time setting .......................... 209
Autofocus 9 AF
Automatic selection (AF) .......... 91, 97
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ...... 220, 316
A/V OUT (Audio/video output)...... 376
B
B (Bulb) ................................ 230, 314
Battery........................ 38, 40, 46, 470
Battery Grip ............................ 46, 478
Beeper............................................ 69
Black-and-white images ....... 162, 165
Bracketing ............................ 173, 227
Bulb exposures ............................ 230
Bulb timer................................. 231
BUSY ........................................... 153
Index
C
W (Custom shooting) ................464
Cable.........3, 385, 412, 425, 478, 532
Protector .....................................34
Camera
Camera shake ..............53, 54, 246
Clearing the camera settings......70
Holding the camera ....................54
Settings display ........................468
Cards ............................5, 41, 67, 529
Card reminder.............................42
Formatting ..................................67
Low-level formatting ...................68
Troubleshooting ....................44, 68
Write protection ..........................41
Case..............................................108
Center-weighted average
metering ........................................225
CF card 9 Cards
Charger .....................................32, 38
Chromatic aberration correction....182
Cleaning (image sensor)...............405
Clearing the camera settings ..........70
CLn ...............................................409
Color space...................................187
Color temperature .................168, 171
Color tone .....................................164
Continuous AF ..............................294
Continuous file numbering ............193
Continuous shooting .....................141
Contrast ................................164, 175
Coordinated Universal Time .........198
Copyright information....................195
Creative photo...............160, 233, 238
M (Creative Zone) icon....................8
Cropping (for printing) ...................419
Cropping information.....................443
Cross-type focusing ........................99
Custom Controls .....................62, 445
Custom shooting mode .................464
Custom WB .................................. 169
D
D+................................................. 180
Date/time ........................................ 47
Daylight saving time ....................... 48
Depth-of-field preview .................. 221
Detailed information ..................... 357
Dials
Main Dial .................................... 56
Quick Control Dial ...................... 57
Digital compass ............................ 206
Calibration................................ 207
Digital terminal... 23, 34, 412, 425, 532
Dimmed menu items ...................... 66
Dioptric adjustment......................... 54
Direct printing ............................... 412
Direct selection of AF point .......... 453
Direction ............................... 204, 206
Distortion correction ..................... 182
Downloading images
(to a computer) ............................. 532
DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format) .......... 421
Drive mode ................................... 141
Dual cross-type focusing ................ 99
Dust Delete Data .......................... 407
E
Electronic level ............................... 75
Erasing images............................. 392
Err........................................... 25, 510
Error codes................................... 510
Evaluative metering...................... 224
ExFAT............................................. 68
Exposure compensation............... 226
Exposure compensation with
Auto ISO....................................... 223
Exposure level increments ........... 434
Exposure level
indicator.................... 26, 27, 288, 323
539
Index
Exposure simulation .....................296
External Speedlite 9 Flash
Eyecup..........................................247
Eye-Fi cards..................................475
Eyepiece cover .......................33, 247
F
FE lock..................................258, 259
Feature guide..................................78
FEB...............................................269
File extension................................192
File name ......................................190
File size.........................151, 334, 357
Filter effects ..................................165
Final image simulation ..........291, 326
Fine (image-recording
quality) ..................................149, 151
Firmware version ..........................491
First-curtain synchronization.........269
Flash (Speedlite)...........................253
Built-in flash..............................254
Custom Functions ....................271
Effective range .........................255
External flash............................259
FE lock .............................258, 259
Flash control.............................262
Flash exposure
compensation ...........257, 259, 269
Flash mode...............................267
Flash sync contacts ....................22
Flash sync speed .............260, 263
Flash sync. speed in Av
mode ........................................263
Manual flash .....................267, 283
Red-eye reduction ....................256
Shutter synchronization
(1st/2nd curtain) .......................269
Wireless............................268, 272
Focus indicator ...............................80
Focus lock.......................................83
Focus mode switch .........50, 140, 308
540
Focusing 9 AF, Manual Focusing
(MF)
Focusing screen................... 440, 478
Folder creation/selection .............. 188
For editing (ALL-I) ........................ 332
Formatting (card initialization) ........ 67
Frame rate............................ 331, 350
Free run........................................ 339
Full Auto mode ............................... 80
Full High-Definition
(Full HD)............................... 313, 331
Function availability by
shooting mode.............................. 480
G
GPS.............................................. 197
Grid ........................ 74, 295, 344, 355
H
HD ................................................ 331
HDMI .............. 34, 341, 348, 350, 385
HDMI CEC ................................... 386
HDR ............................................. 233
Headphones................................. 337
Help................................................ 78
High ISO speed noise reduction ... 176
High-Definition (HD) movies......... 331
Highlight alert ............................... 359
Highlight detail loss ...................... 359
Highlight tone priority ................... 180
High-speed continuous shooting ... 141
Histogram (Brightness/RGB)........ 360
Hot shoe................................. 22, 259
Household power ......................... 474
I
ICC profile .................................... 187
Icon .................................................. 8
Illumination (AF point) .................. 131
Illumination (LCD panel)................. 60
Image conversion factor................. 50
Index
Image dust prevention ..................405
Image-recording quality ........149, 330
Image review time...........................70
Image Stabilizer (lens) ....................53
Images
AF point display ........................359
Auto playback ...........................382
Auto rotation .............................395
Copying ....................................388
Downloading images
(to a computer) .........................532
Erase ........................................392
Highlight alert............................359
Histogram .................................360
Index.........................................361
Jump display
(image browsing) ......................362
Magnification ............................364
Manual rotation.........................367
Numbering ................................193
Playback ...................................353
Protection .................................368
Rating .......................................371
Shooting information.................356
Size...........................151, 334, 357
Slide show ................................382
Transfer ....................................425
Two-image display....................366
Viewing on a TV set..........376, 385
Index display .................................361
INFO. button ...60, 288, 323, 354, 468
Initial AF Point...............................127
Interval timer .................................250
IPB (Light/Standard)......................332
ISO speed .....................154, 317, 321
Automatic setting (Auto) ...........156
Automatic setting range............158
ISO expansion ..........................157
Manual setting range ................157
Minimum shutter speed ............159
Setting increments....................434
ITR AF...........................................128
J
JPEG .................................... 149, 151
Jump display ................................ 362
L
Language ....................................... 49
Large (image-recording quality) ... 151
Large Zone AF ......................... 91, 97
LCD monitor ................................. 529
Brightness adjustment ............. 394
Electronic level........................... 75
Image playback........................ 353
Menu display...................... 64, 484
Shooting function settings ... 60, 469
LCD panel ...................................... 25
Lens.......................................... 30, 50
Chromatic aberration
correction ................................. 182
Distortion correction ................. 182
Image Stabilizer ......................... 53
Lock release............................... 51
Peripheral illumination
correction ................................. 181
Lens group ................................... 100
Lens hood....................................... 52
Light (IPB) .................................... 332
Live View shooting ................. 84, 285
Aspect ratio .............................. 295
Exposure simulation................. 296
Face+Tracking ......................... 300
FlexiZone - Multi ...................... 302
FlexiZone - Single .................... 304
Grid display .............................. 295
Information display................... 288
Manual focusing (MF) .............. 308
Metering timer .......................... 298
Possible shots.......................... 287
Quick Control ........................... 293
Silent shooting ......................... 297
LOCK.............................................. 59
LOG.............................................. 210
Logging......................................... 210
541
Index
Log data ...................................211
Long exposure noise reduction.....178
Long exposures ............................230
Low-speed continuous shooting ...141
M
M (Manual exposure)............222, 320
Magnification.................305, 308, 364
Start position.............................365
Main Dial.........................................56
Malfunction ...................................495
Manual exposure ..................222, 320
Manual focusing (MF) ...........140, 308
Manual reset .................................194
Manual selection (AF).........90, 93, 95
Maximum burst .....................151, 153
Medium
(image-recording quality) ......151, 403
Memory cards 9 Cards
Menu...............................................64
My Menu...................................459
Setting procedure .......................65
Settings ....................................484
3 Icon .........................................8
Metering mode..............................224
Metering timer.................55, 298, 347
M-Fn ...............................92, 125, 258
Microadjustment ...........................133
Microphone ...........................314, 337
Mirror lockup .................................246
Mode Dial..................................29, 56
Monochrome images ............162, 165
MOV..............................................330
Movies ..........................................313
AE lock .....................................318
AF method................................343
AF mode...................................329
AI SERVO (AI Servo AF)..........342
Aperture-priority AE..................316
Attenuator.................................336
Autoexposure shooting.............314
542
Compression method............... 332
Drop frame............................... 341
Editing out first and last
scenes ..................................... 380
Enjoying movies....................... 376
File size............................ 334, 335
Frame rate ............................... 331
Free run ................................... 339
Grid .......................................... 344
HDMI output............................. 348
Headphones ............................ 337
Information display................... 323
Manual exposure shooting....... 320
Metering timer.......................... 347
Microphone ...................... 314, 337
Movie recording size................ 331
Movie Servo AF speed ............ 345
Movie Servo AF tracking
sensitivity ................................. 346
Movie shooting button.............. 348
Playback .......................... 376, 378
Quick Control ........................... 329
Rec run .................................... 339
Record command .................... 341
Recording time......................... 334
Recording/playback count ....... 340
Shutter-priority AE ................... 315
Silent control ............................ 338
Silent shooting ......................... 347
Sound recording ...................... 336
Stills ......................................... 327
Time code ................................ 339
Viewing on a TV set ......... 376, 385
Wind filter................................. 336
MP4.............................................. 330
M-RAW
(Medium RAW)............. 149, 151, 152
Multi function lock................... 59, 442
Multi Shot Noise Reduction.......... 176
Multi-controller................................ 58
Multiple exposures ....................... 238
My Menu ...................................... 459
Index
N
Noise reduction
High ISO speed ........................176
Long exposures ........................178
Nomenclature..................................22
Non-Canon flash units ..................260
Normal
(image-recording quality) ......149, 151
NTSC ............................331, 385, 491
O
ONE SHOT (One-Shot AF).............87
One-Shot AF ...................................87
One-touch image
quality setting ........................153, 456
P
P (Program AE).....................216, 314
PAL ...............................331, 385, 491
Partial metering.............................224
PC terminal ...................................260
Peripheral illumination correction ....181
Personal white balance.................171
Photobook set-up..........................429
PictBridge......................................411
Picture Style..................160, 163, 166
Pixels ....................................149, 151
Playback .......................................353
Possible shots.................46, 151, 287
Power..............................................45
Auto power off ......................45, 69
Battery check......................46, 470
Battery information ...................470
Household power......................474
Possible shots ............46, 151, 287
Recharge performance.............470
Recharging .................................38
Pressing completely........................55
Pressing halfway.............................55
Printing..........................................411
Cropping ...................................419
Page layout...............................415
Paper settings .......................... 415
Photobook set-up..................... 429
Print order (DPOF)................... 421
Printing effects ......................... 416
Tilt correction............................ 419
Program AE.......................... 216, 314
Program shift............................ 217
Protecting images......................... 368
Q
Q (Quick Control)... 61, 293, 329, 374
Quick Control Dial .......................... 57
R
Rating mark .................................. 371
RAW ............................. 149, 151, 152
RAW image processing ................ 398
RAW+JPEG.......................... 149, 151
Rec run......................................... 339
Recharging ..................................... 38
Record function ............................ 146
Record separately ........................ 147
Record to multiple ........................ 147
Recording level............................. 336
Red-eye reduction ........................ 256
Reduced display........................... 361
Release shutter without card.......... 42
Remote control shooting .............. 248
Remote switch.............................. 248
Resizing........................................ 403
Rotation (image)........... 367, 395, 419
S
Safety precautions........................ 525
Safety shift.................................... 436
Saturation ..................................... 164
Scene icons.......................... 290, 319
Scene Intelligent Auto .................... 80
SD, SDHC, SDXC cards 9 Cards
Second-curtain synchronization ... 269
Self-timer .............................. 143, 249
Sensor cleaning............................ 405
543
Index
Sepia (Monochrome) ....................165
Sharpness.....................................164
Shooting function settings.......60, 469
Shooting information display.........356
Shooting modes........................29, 60
Av (Aperture-priority AE) ..........220
B (Bulb) ....................................230
W (Custom shooting)............464
M (Manual exposure) ...............222
P (Program AE) ........................216
Tv (Shutter-priority AE).............218
A (Scene Intelligent Auto) .......80
Shooting orientation registration.....125
Shutter button .................................55
Shutter synchronization ................269
Shutter-priority AE ................218, 315
Silent shooting
Silent continuous shooting .......141
Silent LV shooting.............297, 347
Silent single shooting ...............141
Single shooting .............................141
Single-image display.....................354
Single-point AF .........................90, 95
Single-point Spot AF .................90, 95
Slide show ....................................382
Small
(image-recording quality) ......151, 403
Software........................................534
Speaker...................................24, 378
Spot AF .....................................90, 95
Spot metering................................225
S-RAW (Small RAW) ....149, 151, 152
SRGB............................................187
Standard (IPB) ..............................332
Strap ...............................................33
System map..................................478
T
Temperature warning ............310, 351
Time code .....................................339
Time zone .......................................47
544
Tone priority.................................. 180
Toning effect (Monochrome) ........ 165
Touch pad............................... 59, 338
Tracking sensitivity ....................... 108
Tripod socket.................................. 24
Tv (Shutter-priority AE) ........ 218, 315
Two-image display ....................... 366
U
Ultra DMA (UDMA)......................... 42
Underscore "_" ..................... 187, 192
USB (DIGITAL)
terminal ........................ 412, 425, 532
UTC.............................................. 198
V
Video system................................ 330
Viewfinder ...................................... 27
Dioptric adjustment .................... 54
Electronic level........................... 76
Grid ............................................ 74
Information display..................... 77
Viewing on a TV set ............. 376, 385
Volume (movie playback) ............. 379
W
Warning icon ................................ 441
White balance (WB) ..................... 168
Bracketing................................ 173
Color temperature setting ........ 171
Correction ................................ 172
Custom .................................... 169
Personal................................... 170
Wi-Fi Adapter W-E1 ......... 3, 4, 19, 36
Wind filter ..................................... 336
Wireless flash shooting ................ 272
Z
Zone AF ................................... 91, 96
545
CANON INC.
30-2 Shimomaruko 3-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo 146-8501, Japan
Europe, Africa & Middle East
CANON EUROPA N.V.
Bovenkerkerweg 59, 1185 XB Amstelveen, The Netherlands
For your local Canon office, please refer to your warranty card or to www.canon-europe.com/Support
The product and associated warranty are provided in European countries by Canon Europa N.V.
The descriptions in this Instruction Manual are current as of February 2017.
For information on the compatibility with any products introduced after this date,
contact any Canon Service Center. For the latest version Instruction Manual,
refer to the Canon website.
CEL-SV6GA213
© CANON INC. 2017
Was this manual useful for you? yes no
Thank you for your participation!

* Your assessment is very important for improving the work of artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project

Download PDF

advertisement